IntroductionWelcome| 00:04 | Welcome to Mac OS X Mountain Lion
Essential Training. I'm Chris Breen.
| | 00:08 | In this course, I'll show you not
only how to install the latest version of
| | 00:12 | Apple's computer operating system, but
provide you with insight into the major
| | 00:16 | changes brought by Mountain Lion, as
well as the most helpful features carried
| | 00:21 | over from earlier versions of the Mac OS.
| | 00:24 | Security is a major theme of Mountain
Lion, and I'll show you how to configure
| | 00:28 | your security settings to best suit your needs.
| | 00:30 | Mountain Lion interacts with online
services far more than any preceding
| | 00:35 | versions of the Mac OS through
Apple's cloud-based service, iCloud.
| | 00:39 | I'll show you how to configure your
settings to best take advantage of iCloud.
| | 00:44 | I'll show you how your Mac
can turn your speech into text.
| | 00:47 | I'll guide you through those
applications that help you stay in touch with the
| | 00:50 | world: Mail, Messages, and FaceTime, as
well as keep your personal data under
| | 00:56 | control with the Calendar
and Contacts applications.
| | 01:00 | There's a lot to like in
Mountain Lion, let's get started.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
1. Installing Mountain LionInstalling Mountain Lion| 00:00 | Before you can use Mountain Lion,
you actually have to have a copy of it.
| | 00:03 | And how do you get a copy of it?
| | 00:04 | Well you go to the Mac App Store. So go to
the Apple menu, and we're running Lion currently.
| | 00:12 | It takes you automatically to the
featured page, and if you look down the right
| | 00:17 | side, our very best guess is that you will
find OS X Mountain Lion as the first entry.
| | 00:25 | I'll click on that, and you see I
have the option to purchase it.
| | 00:29 | In order to get Mountain Lion now,
all I have to do is click on the price,
| | 00:34 | choose Buy App, and I will then be prompted
for my Apple ID and password, as will you.
| | 00:41 | Now this point, I would simply enter my
Apple ID and my password, click on Sign In.
| | 00:46 | It will then download to my computer.
| | 00:48 | Now note this, it's about four and a
half gigabytes, so depending on how fast
| | 00:53 | your broadband connection is, this could take
not terribly long to a really, really long time.
| | 00:59 | We're not going to make you sit
through this either way, so we're going to go
| | 01:02 | ahead and download this, and
we'll be back once it's on our Mac.
| | 01:06 | So Mountain Lion has completed
downloading and it has now launched the installer.
| | 01:10 | At this point, we would
continue on by clicking Continue.
| | 01:15 | However before we do that, I want to
do one thing, so I'm going to go into
| | 01:19 | Applications and I'm going to find
the OS X Mountain Lion installer.
| | 01:26 | I'm going to move this out
of the Applications folder.
| | 01:28 | Now why would I do that?
| | 01:30 | Once the installation
completes, your installer is deleted.
| | 01:34 | This isn't a huge problem.
| | 01:36 | What happens is if later you want to
reinstall Mountain Lion, you can do
| | 01:41 | that using something called Recovery
HD partition, which we're going to look
| | 01:45 | at in another movie.
| | 01:46 | However, in order to reinstall Mountain
Lion, you have to download another copy.
| | 01:51 | So what I'm trying to do is prevent
doing that so you will always have a local
| | 01:56 | copy instead of having to download it
again, because again, this is a huge file.
| | 02:01 | It's over 4.5 gigabytes, so it does
take quite a while to download if you don't
| | 02:05 | have a really fast internet connection.
| | 02:07 | So I'm going to make a copy of it, and to
do that, I'll hold down the Option key,
| | 02:12 | click on it, and I'm going to
drag it into my Documents folder.
| | 02:16 | It will then make a copy and I'll have
that other copy, so that once it installs
| | 02:20 | and deletes this original installer,
I will still have another copy of it.
| | 02:24 | Great, so now we have our copy, I will
click the Close button to get rid of that
| | 02:30 | and now we can start our installation.
| | 02:33 | I'll click on Continue.
| | 02:35 | I could read every word of the license
agreement, but if I don't agree, I can't
| | 02:39 | install it, so I will go ahead and agree.
| | 02:43 | Choose the hard drive I want to use.
| | 02:45 | I have just one, but if you had more
than one, you would see as many hard
| | 02:48 | drives as you have, and then you can choose the
one you wish to install to. We're good to go.
| | 02:52 | I click on Install, enter my password.
| | 02:57 | Okay, and the installation begins.
| | 03:00 | Now you'll see that it appears that
it's only going to take a few minutes to
| | 03:04 | install, that's not actually true.
| | 03:06 | What it's doing is installing the real
installer so that it can proceed with the
| | 03:10 | heavy lifting. And again, we're not
going to make you sit through a lot of this.
| | 03:16 | It tells me my computer will restart
automatically, but I don't want to wait, so
| | 03:20 | I'll click on Restart.
| | 03:21 | It will ask me to close other
applications, that would be the Mac App Store, go
| | 03:25 | ahead, and now the Mac restarts.
| | 03:35 | And now Mountain Lion has installed, and
you can tell that it has because here's
| | 03:40 | my name, here's my password field, and
apparently Mountain Lion thinks I'm a
| | 03:45 | hockey puck, and I'm going to
change that as we go through.
| | 03:49 | So, I still maintain the password that I
had previously, so I'll just enter that
| | 03:53 | now, press Return, and then
configuration starts in earnest.
| | 04:00 | First thing I'm asked for is my Apple ID.
| | 04:03 | If you don't have an Apple ID, you can
easily get one, simply click on the Plus
| | 04:07 | Button and you'll be walked through
the process of getting an Apple ID.
| | 04:11 | I happen to have one, so I'll go ahead
and enter it now and I'll click on Continue.
| | 04:17 | Also note, if you don't want to enter
this information now, you don't have to,
| | 04:21 | you can simply click on Skip.
| | 04:25 | I will agree to the terms and
conditions so that I can use Mountain Lion.
| | 04:28 | Now I'm prompted to set up iCloud.
| | 04:33 | Now because I've entered my Apple ID
and password, Apple knows that I have an
| | 04:37 | iCloud account and so I see this screen.
| | 04:40 | Now it's possible that on your Mac,
you saw another step before this and that
| | 04:44 | step was to configure a WiFi network.
| | 04:47 | We didn't see that screen because my
Mac is plugged into an ethernet connection
| | 04:52 | and it already has a web connection.
| | 04:54 | But if yours doesn't and you're
relying on a WiFi connection, you'll see a
| | 04:57 | window about WiFi and you'll be
prompted to select a WiFi hotspot.
| | 05:02 | If that hotspot is password protected,
just enter that password and press Return
| | 05:07 | and you'll be on the web.
| | 05:09 | So I'm going to go ahead and tell it
to set up iCloud on this account by
| | 05:13 | clicking on Continue. And then
up pops this messaging window.
| | 05:17 | This allows me to use iMessage and FaceTime.
| | 05:21 | Now currently, this Apple ID is
connected with a couple of different addresses,
| | 05:25 | one of them is my old MobileMe
account, which is chrisebreen@me.com, but
| | 05:31 | chrisebreen@iCloud.com works as well.
| | 05:34 | So if people want to use iMessage or
FaceTime to get in touch with me, they can
| | 05:38 | use either one of these addresses, or
none of them if I choose to uncheck them, or
| | 05:42 | just the one I checked.
| | 05:44 | I'm going to allow both of
them and I'll click on Continue.
| | 05:47 | You're now asked if you'd like
to use Find My Mac using iCloud.
| | 05:51 | This is a service that uses your Mac's
location to help determine where it is.
| | 05:55 | Now if you have a desktop Mac, say an
iMac or a Mac Pro, this isn't all that
| | 06:00 | necessary because your Mac
really isn't likely to go anywhere.
| | 06:03 | However if you have a laptop,
something you're going to take out on the road
| | 06:07 | with you, it's an
excellent idea to turn this on.
| | 06:10 | For the time being, I'm going to
turn this off and we'll proceed.
| | 06:16 | It's now setting up my iCloud options for
me. And my Mac is set up and ready to use.
| | 06:23 | Start using your Mac?
| | 06:24 | Yes, indeed, let's get to it.
| | 06:29 | So we've run through the installer and
here we are at the Mac's desktop ready to go.
| | 06:35 | Now it's possible that your Mac
will not look exactly like this.
| | 06:39 | We upgraded from another account
that had certain settings turned off.
| | 06:43 | The desktop pattern was different,
there were more items in the menu bar, and
| | 06:47 | the dock was exposed.
| | 06:50 | In a subsequent movie, I'm going to
show you how to configure your Mac so
| | 06:54 | it looks like this.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
2. Settling InPersonalizing the interface| 00:00 | What you're looking at is how the
Mac's Finder appears by default.
| | 00:03 | Now, I'm going to make some changes that
not only will make it easier for you to
| | 00:07 | see what I'm doing throughout the rest
of the course, but will also show you a few
| | 00:11 | simple ways to
personalize your Mac's interface.
| | 00:14 | I'm going to start by right-clicking
on the desktop, and I'll choose
| | 00:17 | Change Desktop Background.
| | 00:19 | So this takes me directly to the
Desktop & Screen Saver preference.
| | 00:24 | As much as I love the this Galaxy
background, I want to simplify this a little
| | 00:27 | bit, so I'll click on Solid Colors and
I'll choose this second blue, which is
| | 00:32 | Solid Aqua Dark Blue.
| | 00:34 | Another thing I want to do while I'm
here is turn off the translucent menu bar.
| | 00:38 | You notice that the menu bar is this sort
of light blue and this is perfectly okay
| | 00:42 | in some circumstances, but suppose I
go back to Desktop Pictures and I choose
| | 00:47 | this green grassy background.
| | 00:48 | If a window shows up near here, it's
going to look a little funny, so I'm going
| | 00:53 | to go back again to Solid Colors and
then turn that off, so it turns white,
| | 00:57 | nothing will show through behind it.
| | 00:59 | I'm going to Show All and
then I'll go to Trackpad.
| | 01:04 | Now, I have a trackpad
that's connected to my Mac.
| | 01:06 | Now, one of the things that they have
here that was introduced with Lion is a
| | 01:10 | feature called natural scrolling, and
what this does is, if you're used an iOS
| | 01:15 | device, you scroll in a certain direction,
that's opposite to the way it used to work on Macs.
| | 01:22 | Because I'm an old time Mac user, I
prefer to have that option off, so I'll turn
| | 01:27 | off natural scrolling.
| | 01:29 | If you prefer things that way,
you're welcome to leave it on.
| | 01:31 | Now, it happens that I also have a
mouse attached, so I'm going to go Show All.
| | 01:36 | I'll click on Mouse and here is
the scroll direction option here.
| | 01:41 | I've turned this off as well.
| | 01:42 | If I turned it on, the scroll will --
would work in the opposite direction.
| | 01:46 | Now, for some people, scrolling
in Apple's natural direction feels
| | 01:50 | perfectly okay on a trackpad, but
I'll tell you, on a scroll wheel, it seems
| | 01:54 | completely bizarre.
| | 01:55 | So, again, feel free to turn off that option.
| | 01:58 | Now we'll close out system preferences.
| | 02:01 | And there are times when you need as
much of the desktop as you can get to, and
| | 02:05 | sometimes this Dock gets in the way.
| | 02:07 | So I'm going to turn that off, so I'll
go to the Apple menu, go to Dock, and I'll
| | 02:12 | Turn Hiding On, and the Dock disappears.
| | 02:15 | It's still there, if I need it, I just
bring my cursor down to the bottom of the
| | 02:18 | screen and there it is, but
for now we're going to hide it.
| | 02:22 | Now, we have some items in the upper
right of the menu bar and we don't need
| | 02:25 | all those either. So we've got a Bluetooth
icon here, Wi-Fi, date and time, and sound.
| | 02:32 | One way to get rid of these things is
to hold down the command key, click and
| | 02:36 | drag on what you want to get rid
off, drag it to the desktop, and it
| | 02:39 | disappears in a puff of smoke.
| | 02:41 | So, we'll get rid of those.
and now we have a very nice and
| | 02:47 | clean-looking desktop.
| | 02:49 | I'm an old time Mac user and I like
to see my hard drive on the desktop, so
| | 02:53 | I'll go to the Finder menu, choose
Preferences, and I'll elect to show hard
| | 02:58 | drives, and here are the two hard drives that
are attached to my Mac, and I'll close that window.
| | 03:04 | I also find it helpful to see how much
space remains on my Mac's hard drive and
| | 03:08 | how many items a folder holds, so I'm
going to create a new Finder window by
| | 03:12 | pressing Command+N, and I'll go to the
view menu and choose Show Status Bar.
| | 03:18 | When I do this in the All My Files view,
I see that I have six items in this
| | 03:23 | folder, but I'll select my
Documents folder, and you can see that it lists
| | 03:27 | the number of items, plus the amount
of storage space, on my hard drive.
| | 03:31 | Also, sometimes I need to rummage
around in my User folder, and for that
| | 03:35 | reason, I like to put my User folder
in the sidebar. So I'll double click on
| | 03:40 | the hard drive, I'll go to Users, here's my Home
folder, and I'll just drag this in to the sidebar.
| | 03:47 | Now, I can click on that and then I
can see the contents of my User folder.
| | 03:51 | I'll close both windows by holding down
the Option key and clicking on the red close
| | 03:56 | button and they both close.
| | 03:58 | Now, again, you're not required
to perform any of these tweaks.
| | 04:01 | These are simply the things I do
to make a Mac more useful for me.
| | 04:04 | At the very least, you now know
how to get some of these settings.
| | 04:08 | Try the ones that make sense for you.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Touring the Finder| 00:00 | Essential Training, though this may be,
I'm going to assume you know the basics
| | 00:04 | of getting around on a Mac, but I
don't want you to assume too much.
| | 00:08 | So in this movie, I want to show you
a few handy shortcuts, for getting where
| | 00:11 | you need to go without a lot of fuss and bother.
| | 00:14 | Now, like Windows, the Mac OS supports
contextual menus, menus whose contents
| | 00:18 | reflect what you're doing at the moment.
| | 00:20 | Apple recommends that you
control click to produce these menus.
| | 00:24 | So in this case, if I want to produce a
contextual menu on the desktop, I would
| | 00:28 | hold down the control key and then
left-click, and here's my contextual menu.
| | 00:32 | But if you have a mouse with a right
click button, and that's most mice today,
| | 00:36 | you can simply right-click and
that will produce the contextual menu.
| | 00:40 | Or if you're using a trackpad,
click with two fingers and again the
| | 00:44 | contextual menu appears.
| | 00:46 | For this next one, I'll open TextEdit.
| | 00:48 | Now, let's suppose that you have an
application full of menus and commands, yet you
| | 00:53 | can't seem to find the command you're after.
| | 00:55 | Well, you don't have to hunt
through the menus to find what you want.
| | 00:59 | Instead, just go to the Help menu and
start typing the name of the command.
| | 01:03 | So, in this case, I'm
looking for Attach Files.
| | 01:06 | I type the first couple of
letters, and here is my menu command.
| | 01:09 | Then, I drag the mouse to that
command and a blue arrow appears showing
| | 01:14 | me where that command is.
| | 01:16 | And now we can quit TextEdit.
| | 01:18 | Let's conduct a search by pressing
Command+F, and here is my search window.
| | 01:21 | Now, by default, when you search your
Mac, the Mac will not produce results
| | 01:25 | from certain folders, and this would be from
like your Library folder or your System folder.
| | 01:30 | There will be cases when you want to
find these hidden files, but how do
| | 01:34 | you that from here?
| | 01:35 | So click on Kind, choose Other, and then
enter system, and you'll see this single
| | 01:40 | entry, which is System files.
| | 01:42 | Enable In Menu and click Okay.
| | 01:46 | Now, you notice when I'm searching,
System files is included in my search options.
| | 01:52 | Let's say I'm looking for something like
a plist file, which is a preference file.
| | 01:55 | I would type in .plist, and I'd see a few results.
| | 02:00 | However, if I choose System files are
included, now I have lots and lots of
| | 02:06 | results because these Plist files are
in folders that are normally hidden.
| | 02:11 | So if you want to conduct deeper
searches, this is one way to do that.
| | 02:14 | Now you notice that when I launched
TextEdit, I didn't do it by digging down
| | 02:18 | into my hard drive and then into folders.
Instead, I went to the Spotlight menu, and
| | 02:22 | the shortcut for doing
that is Command+space bar.
| | 02:25 | If want to launch an application, all
you have to do is start typing its name
| | 02:29 | in the Spotlight menu.
| | 02:30 | For example, if I wanted to launch
iTunes, I just start typing its name and
| | 02:35 | the first result is iTunes. Then to
launch the application, all I have to do is
| | 02:39 | press the Return key, yes I'll agree
to its terms, and then the application
| | 02:43 | launches. And I'll quit that.
| | 02:45 | And lastly, there's a reason that
the Option key is called Option.
| | 02:49 | Look what happens when I click on the
file menu and then I'm going to hold
| | 02:53 | down the Option key.
| | 02:54 | Notice that some of the commands change.
Same idea, I'll go to the Finder menu.
| | 02:58 | When I do this, this is the
Option key off, it says Empty Trash.
| | 03:01 | If I then empty the trash, I'll see a
little warning indicating that I'm about to
| | 03:06 | empty the trash. But if I hold on
the Option key, that little ellipses
| | 03:09 | disappears, indicating that it will
automatically empty the trash without
| | 03:13 | bugging me about it.
| | 03:14 | So, it's worth your while to go through
the various menus, press the Option key,
| | 03:19 | and then see how the commands change.
| | 03:21 | These are some not-terribly obvious
features of the Mac OS, but ones that are
| | 03:25 | sure to save you time if you
take the time to learn about them.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Staying current with Software Update| 00:00 | Although you've just installed a
fresh copy of Mountain Lion, there's a
| | 00:03 | good chance that you don't have the
latest and greatest Apple software
| | 00:06 | running on your Mac.
| | 00:07 | Apple routinely offers updates to not
only its operating system, but other
| | 00:11 | applications such as those in
the iLife and iWorks suites.
| | 00:15 | It also issues security updates that are
important to help keep your Mac secure.
| | 00:20 | For these reasons, you should run
Software Update as soon as you install
| | 00:23 | Mountain Lion, and here's how to go about it.
| | 00:25 | In the old days, you'd go to System
Preferences and then click on Software Update.
| | 00:30 | At this point, you'd click on Show Updates.
| | 00:33 | I'm going to show you the other way
to do it, which is more convenient, but
| | 00:37 | before we leave this system update
preference, I want to show you a couple of options.
| | 00:41 | The first is that you can
automatically check for updates.
| | 00:43 | So turn that on and then you can choose
to download newly available updates in
| | 00:47 | the background or it will install just
system data files and security updates.
| | 00:51 | You can turn both those things off if you
like, or again turn this off all together.
| | 00:56 | You can also automatically download the
apps that you've purchased on other Macs.
| | 01:00 | So, for example, if I had this account
on one of my other Macs, I purchase it on
| | 01:04 | that Mac, those apps would
automatically download to the Mac I'm using now.
| | 01:08 | At this point, I'll leave all that
off and quit System Preferences.
| | 01:11 | So the Mountain Lion way to do this
is really to go to the Apple Menu and
| | 01:15 | choose Software Update.
| | 01:17 | This launches the Mac App Store
and takes you to the updates area.
| | 01:22 | In this case, you see that I have one
update available. If I had more than one
| | 01:25 | update available, there would also be
a button that said Update All and that
| | 01:30 | would download everything.
| | 01:31 | When there's an update available, you'll
often see a More link, click on that to
| | 01:35 | see what else is available to you.
| | 01:38 | If I then wanted to install these
updates, I simply click on Update, and at
| | 01:42 | this point, I won't.
| | 01:42 | While we're here in the Mac App Store, I
want to show you one other thing, which
| | 01:47 | is the Purchases tab.
| | 01:48 | Within this tab, you'll see all the
applications that you have purchased with
| | 01:52 | this particular account. And you
see I have a couple of options.
| | 01:55 | For example on this Mac, I have the
option to download another copy of
| | 01:59 | Mountain Lion, and I do that just by
clicking on Download. Or I have other
| | 02:03 | applications that I purchased that
aren't on this Mac, and to install them, I
| | 02:07 | would just click on Install.
| | 02:08 | They download and then they
would be installed to my Mac.
| | 02:12 | But suppose you're looking for some
older software that isn't in the Mac App
| | 02:15 | Store, I'll quit the Mac App
Store, we'll launch Safari.
| | 02:18 | I'll go to support.apple.com/downloads
and in this case, let's say
| | 02:31 | Mac OS and Software.
| | 02:33 | When I do this, you see that there
are other updates available, some
| | 02:37 | Supplemental updates, an Aperture
update, QuickTime update, you can go back
| | 02:42 | through time and find older
updates from this website.
| | 02:45 | So if the Mac App Store doesn't have
what you're looking for, check out this
| | 02:49 | site. And with that, your Mac
should now be completely up to date.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Configuring Gatekeeper settings| 00:00 | With Mountain Lion, comes
an extra layer of security.
| | 00:03 | In the case of this movie, that means
Apple helping you to ensure that when
| | 00:07 | you download and install new software,
that software will be free of bugs and
| | 00:11 | other malicious cooties.
| | 00:13 | The means for doing this is something
called Gatekeeper and this is how it works.
| | 00:17 | So I'll go to System Preferences, I'll
select Security & Privacy, and we're
| | 00:22 | going to look in the General tab.
| | 00:23 | Now notice this area at the bottom,
Allow applications downloaded from, and
| | 00:28 | you have three options.
| | 00:29 | Mac App Store, Mac App Store and
identified developers, and Anywhere.
| | 00:33 | So what does this mean?
| | 00:34 | Well Mac App Store means that you can
download a piece of software from the Mac
| | 00:39 | App Store, you can open it, and it will
work perfectly well without any problems.
| | 00:44 | However, if you try to download
software from somewhere else, somewhere else on
| | 00:47 | the internet for example, you
will not be able to launch it.
| | 00:50 | You can download it but
you just can't launch it.
| | 00:53 | That is off by default.
| | 00:54 | Now the second option, Mac App Store and
identified developers is on by default.
| | 00:59 | So what does that mean?
| | 01:01 | Well it means so you can download
applications from the Mac App Store and launch
| | 01:04 | them, and if you've obtained software
from an identified developer, you can also
| | 01:08 | download that and launch it as well.
| | 01:11 | What makes an identified developer?
| | 01:13 | Well actually it's pretty easy.
| | 01:15 | If you're a developer, you want to
sell your application not at the Mac App
| | 01:18 | Store but from your own website.
| | 01:20 | You simply apply to Apple for a certificate.
| | 01:22 | Apple gets your name, your number,
where to contact you, and that's it.
| | 01:27 | However, some developers have
chosen not to join this program.
| | 01:30 | And let me show you how this works.
| | 01:32 | I've downloaded a program called Onyx.
| | 01:34 | This is a utility program that let's you
configure some of the settings of the Mac OS.
| | 01:39 | This developer has chosen
not to join this program.
| | 01:42 | So I'll double click on Onyx, and I see
a warning. It says Onyx can't be opened
| | 01:47 | because it is from an unidentified developer.
| | 01:50 | Again, the developer does
not have Apple's certificate.
| | 01:53 | So what do you do at this point?
| | 01:55 | Well you have a couple of options.
| | 01:57 | One, you can click unlock and then
you can choose the anywhere option.
| | 02:06 | You allow it to happen and then at
this point I can launch this application.
| | 02:09 | But let's go back to the other setting.
| | 02:11 | I'll go ahead and lock it just for fun.
| | 02:14 | Now, once again I try to
open it, I'm told I can't.
| | 02:17 | However, if I Control-click or
right click and choose open, I see a
| | 02:23 | different dialogue box.
| | 02:25 | And here is the open command,
indicating, "Well this is from an unidentified
| | 02:29 | developer, are you really
sure you want to open it?"
| | 02:32 | "Yes, because I'm familiar with this
software, this guy is okay, he may not have
| | 02:36 | signed up but I know this
software is perfectly okay."
| | 02:39 | At which point, I click on open.
| | 02:42 | I agree to the license agreement, I would go
ahead and click on continue to run through this.
| | 02:46 | I actually don't want to run
Onyx at this point, so I'll cancel.
| | 02:50 | I'll continue canceling and it quits.
| | 02:53 | And that's basically
Gatekeeper and how to get around it.
| | 02:56 | Now many old time Mac users felt like
Apple was going too far to keep users from
| | 03:00 | installing the software they wanted.
| | 03:02 | As you can see, it's still possible.
| | 03:04 | It's just that Apple is now taking
care of new users who may not know what is
| | 03:09 | and isn't safe to download.
| | 03:10 | So those old timers could either
change their Gatekeeper settings, or use the
| | 03:14 | trick I just offered to open what they like.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Getting on the Internet| 00:00 | I understand that not everyone watching
this course is using a Mac that they've
| | 00:04 | upgraded to Mountain Lion.
| | 00:05 | And of course if you're watching this
movie via the internet, at least one
| | 00:09 | computer you've come in contact
with has access to the internet.
| | 00:12 | During the installation process, the
Mac OS X installer nudged you to join a
| | 00:17 | wireless network if one was available.
| | 00:19 | Or if you had a wired
connection to the internet, it was
| | 00:22 | configured automatically.
| | 00:23 | But it's possible that you weren't able
to configure your internet connection or
| | 00:27 | have questions about how to go beyond
what's offered to you during installation,
| | 00:31 | and that's what we're
going to take a look at now.
| | 00:33 | So I'll go to system
preferences and I'll click on network.
| | 00:36 | You see that you have a few options.
| | 00:38 | The Mac I'm using has two ethernet
ports and they're both listed here.
| | 00:42 | It also has airport aboard
so that's why Wi-Fi is there.
| | 00:45 | You can connect via FireWire and you can
connect via Bluetooth for other things.
| | 00:50 | If you have a router that distributes internet
addresses, your Mac will be using the Using DHCP entry.
| | 00:56 | And this is a method for acquiring the
address necessary to connect to the internet.
| | 01:01 | The IP address, subnet mask, and the
router appear below as well as the DNS
| | 01:05 | server and search domains.
| | 01:07 | If you have a static IP address
assigned to you by your internet provider,
| | 01:11 | instead you would choose Manually,
and then you would configure it there.
| | 01:16 | And Wi-Fi is pretty much the same idea.
| | 01:18 | Here's Wi-Fi, in this case, you would
choose the network that you have access to.
| | 01:22 | In this case I'm using the GUEST network.
| | 01:25 | It's also in this area that I can
show the Wi-Fi status in the menu bar.
| | 01:29 | Once you have that up in the menu bar, the
fan will indicate how strong the signal is.
| | 01:34 | So if it's all black, it's very strong.
| | 01:35 | If you see just a couple of
bars, it's not quite so strong.
| | 01:39 | Click on that and then you could see
any available Wi-Fi networks around you.
| | 01:43 | Those that have locks next to them
indicate that they're password protected.
| | 01:48 | And let's turn that off.
| | 01:49 | While we're here, let's click on
the Advanced button. And go to TCP/IP.
| | 01:54 | The one reason we go here is that,
let's suppose that your Mac has become
| | 01:58 | confused and you're not
able to get onto the network.
| | 02:01 | Sometimes one way to clear that
up is to renew the DHCP lease.
| | 02:05 | And to do that, again you go to this
TCP/IP pane, click on renew DHCP lease.
| | 02:11 | This goes back, clears your
router and it assigns a new DHCP lease.
| | 02:16 | Now it could be that it ends up
being exactly the same address.
| | 02:20 | But at least it's cleared things up with your
router and maybe that'll make things work better.
| | 02:24 | I don't need to do that at this
point so I'll click on cancel.
| | 02:27 | Now if you can't seem to get things
setup correctly or you can't get on the
| | 02:31 | internet when you could before,
| | 02:32 | click on the Assist me button.
| | 02:34 | And you have a couple of
options here. One is Assistant.
| | 02:38 | If you click on Assistant you'll run through
the whole process of setting up your network.
| | 02:42 | However, I find that Diagnostics is
more useful when it did work but now
| | 02:46 | it doesn't seem to.
| | 02:47 | So click on Diagnostics, it will ask
you what kind of network you want to use.
| | 02:52 | In this case we have a couple of
options, Ethernet, Wi-Fi or other.
| | 02:56 | More important is the network
status lights on the left side.
| | 02:59 | In this case, all green
means everything is good.
| | 03:03 | Now in some cases, you may see that
the first light is good, ethernet good,
| | 03:06 | ethernet's working, network settings
are fine but it's when you get to ISP that
| | 03:11 | suddenly this turns red,
| | 03:12 | indicating your computer and your ISP
are not talking to each other. Or maybe
| | 03:17 | that's on and the next light is out,
indicating, well the ISP is telling me
| | 03:21 | everything is okay but it's
not getting onto the network.
| | 03:24 | So if this first ISP light is red,
that indicates that you have some
| | 03:28 | communication problem and it
may be a problem with your Mac.
| | 03:31 | However, if the ISP light is green
and the internet light is red, that's a
| | 03:35 | hint that your internet provider is having a
hard time getting connected to the internet.
| | 03:40 | So what you can do at this point is
click on continue, and if it's working
| | 03:44 | correctly as ours is. You'll be told so.
| | 03:46 | But if not, you'll walk
through a series of steps.
| | 03:49 | It will ask you certain questions,
is it plugged in is the first one.
| | 03:53 | Make sure to check this setting or that
setting, it will check some other things.
| | 03:56 | And often times it will finally come to
the point where it says, "You're doing
| | 04:00 | just fine but it appears that your ISP
is having the problem, why don't you give
| | 04:05 | them a call?" and that's not a bad idea.
| | 04:07 | And we'll click on Quit
because everything is going great.
| | 04:09 | Now if everything really is
going well, you should test it.
| | 04:12 | So one way to do that is launch Safari,
go to your favorite website and if it
| | 04:17 | loads, everything is indeed okay.
| | 04:20 | Quit that and let's move over to Sharing.
| | 04:22 | If you seem to be having some
problems with certain network services it
| | 04:27 | may be that you haven't enabled them
in your Sharing system preference.
| | 04:31 | For example if you think that you
should be able to share files between
| | 04:34 | computers, it maybe because file
sharing has not been turned on.
| | 04:38 | Check that, make sure it's turned on. Or
you want to share a printer between two
| | 04:42 | Macs, it doesn't seem to be working,
and that could be because you haven't
| | 04:45 | enabled printer sharing.
| | 04:47 | However, there are some sharing
services that should work automatically.
| | 04:50 | For example, if you have two
computers, they both have iTunes on them,
| | 04:55 | you'd like to share the library from
one of those computers to the other
| | 04:58 | one, that should happen
automatically as long as you have some kind of
| | 05:02 | network connection.
| | 05:03 | Because they work over
something called Bonjour, which is a zero
| | 05:06 | configuration setup.
| | 05:07 | They automatically see each other
without you having to fiddle with stuff.
| | 05:11 | We'll talk about sharing in another
movie, but right now, things look like
| | 05:15 | they're set up pretty well, so I'll quit that.
| | 05:17 | And that's pretty much
it as far as the Mac goes.
| | 05:20 | If you can't get on the internet after
this, it's likely not the fault of your
| | 05:24 | Mac but rather a router or your ISP.
| | 05:27 | Regrettably, troubleshooting these
issues is beyond the mission of this course.
| | 05:31 | As for sharing, again, we'll delve
deeper into that subject in another movie.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Setting up iCloud| 00:01 | iCloud, Apple's online syncing and storage
service, is an integral part of Mountain Lion,
| | 00:05 | allowing you to sync contacts, calendars,
notes, bookmarks, documents, reminders,
| | 00:10 | and photos between devices
associated with your Apple ID.
| | 00:14 | Here's how to set it up. Go to System
Preferences, choose iCloud and you'll be
| | 00:20 | prompted for your Apple ID.
| | 00:21 | Now if you haven't created one already,
and it's hard to imagine that you haven't
| | 00:25 | but perhaps that hasn't happened.
| | 00:27 | Simply click on create an Apple ID and
you'll be walked through the process to obtain one.
| | 00:32 | We already have one so I'll
on Cancel and click on Sign In.
| | 00:37 | You have a couple of options.
| | 00:40 | You can use iCloud for contacts,
calendars, reminders, notes, and Safari.
| | 00:44 | And this means that when you
create one of these items on your Mac,
| | 00:47 | it will also be added to iCloud
and then sync to your devices.
| | 00:51 | That's perfectly okay with me.
| | 00:53 | And then the other is Use Find My Mac.
| | 00:55 | Now let's suppose that you have a
laptop and you take it around with you and
| | 00:59 | you're in the back of a cab
and you've left it in the cab.
| | 01:03 | You get back to your hotel and realize, "Oh!
| | 01:05 | I forgot to write down the cab number,
I don't know how to find this thing."
| | 01:09 | Well all you have to do is you would
jump on the hotel's computer, and if you've
| | 01:13 | turned on Use Find My Mac, through
your web browser you can locate your Mac's
| | 01:17 | position as long as it's turned on.
| | 01:19 | I think this is a great option and
so I'm going to leave that on as well,
| | 01:23 | and I'll click on next.
| | 01:24 | Yes, you can use location because if
you don't, you won't work, turn that on.
| | 01:28 | Now we have a series of
options that we can use with iCloud.
| | 01:31 | Mail is the first one, turn that on and
your mail will be synced between iCloud
| | 01:35 | and your other devices.
| | 01:37 | Same idea with your Contacts, so
if you add contacts to the Contacts app
| | 01:41 | they will be synced, calendars, reminders,
same idea, the notes you create will be synced.
| | 01:46 | Safari, in this case, it means using
something called iCloud tabs, which I'll
| | 01:51 | explain in another movie
as well as your bookmarks.
| | 01:53 | Photo Stream is an option that if
you add pictures to iPhoto, for example,
| | 01:58 | they will be automatically
synced to your other devices.
| | 02:01 | It's really more helpful on an iOS device.
| | 02:03 | So if I take a picture with my iPhone,
for instance, that picture will then be
| | 02:08 | automatically synced
through iCloud to my computer.
| | 02:11 | So I can take a picture on my iPhone at
the beach, I get home, and I can see that
| | 02:16 | picture on my computer.
| | 02:17 | Documents and data are
for supported applications.
| | 02:20 | So for instance, Pages is supported,
Keynote is supported, Preview is
| | 02:24 | supported, and TextEdit is supported.
| | 02:27 | And this means that I can automatically
have my document saved to the cloud and
| | 02:31 | then open them on another
device and then work on those.
| | 02:34 | Back to My Mac is an option so that if I
happen to be away somewhere, staying in
| | 02:38 | a hotel, and I've left my Mac on at
home, ideally I can then communicate and
| | 02:44 | control my Mac at home and perhaps
retrieve documents from it and send them via
| | 02:49 | email to the Mac that I'm currently working on.
| | 02:52 | I'll be honest with you, it doesn't
always work and most of the time it's
| | 02:55 | because a router in a
hotel has blocked that option.
| | 02:58 | So I think it's a worthwhile option to
have if you have a couple of Mac and you
| | 03:02 | take one with you, but again,
it may not always work.
| | 03:05 | And then we have Find My Mac, and it
tells me that location services are off.
| | 03:09 | To fix that, I click on more and
then open security and privacy.
| | 03:13 | You have to unlock this preference.
| | 03:18 | And then I would enable location services.
| | 03:22 | We'll go back to iCloud and you see when
I do that, Find My Mac is then enabled.
| | 03:26 | Now let's click on Manage to see what happens.
| | 03:29 | One thing, along the left side, it will
tell you how much of your storage you've used.
| | 03:33 | By default you're given
five gigabytes of storage.
| | 03:36 | So if I click on Keynote, I can see that I
have a couple of Keynote file stored there.
| | 03:41 | If I wanted to, to save space, I can
select one and then click on delete to get
| | 03:46 | rid of it, or if I want to,
I can click on Delete All.
| | 03:50 | I have backups for some of my other
devices, again, if I wanted to save some
| | 03:54 | storage space, I can select that
back up and I can choose to delete it.
| | 03:58 | If I want more information about
my account, I click on View Account.
| | 04:01 | I need to enter my password.
| | 04:06 | Once you have this view, account
information, you can then alter it
| | 04:09 | if you like by clicking on the Change or
the Edit buttons, but this gives you an
| | 04:12 | idea of what Apple knows
about you. We'll click on Done.
| | 04:16 | And then finally, again you have five
gigabytes of storage but you can get more
| | 04:20 | if you want by clicking on Change Storage Plan.
| | 04:23 | Apple would be more than
happy to sell you more storage.
| | 04:26 | So, for $20 a year you can get ten
gigabytes additional storage so that
| | 04:30 | you'd have 15 total.
| | 04:31 | $40 buys you 20 gigabytes more, and $100
buys you 50 gigabytes more of storage.
| | 04:38 | I'm pretty happy with my storage, so I'll
click on cancel and then we'll click on done.
| | 04:43 | And that's the basics of
setting up iCloud on your Mac.
| | 04:46 | If you need more information,
I've completed an Up and Running with
| | 04:49 | iCloud course right here at lynda.com,
where you can learn lots more
| | 04:53 | about this service.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Understanding AutoSave and documents in the cloud| 00:00 | You understand that with iCloud
you can sync much of your personal
| | 00:03 | correspondents and data.
| | 00:04 | But you can also sync documents. Better yet,
| | 00:07 | you needn't worry terribly about
choosing the Save command every time you want
| | 00:11 | to save your document.
| | 00:12 | The OS can do it for you in
supported applications. And let's take a look.
| | 00:16 | We'll start with TextEdit, which we'll
launch from Spotlight, press return.
| | 00:21 | And here is our TextEdit window.
| | 00:25 | And I'm going to choose
Open to show you something.
| | 00:27 | Now normally, if you started TextEdit
for the very first time, this is what
| | 00:31 | you'll see, this large window that
says iCloud for TextEdit, indicating that
| | 00:36 | this works with iCloud.
| | 00:37 | You'll also see the New Document
button, and that's the one we'll press, so
| | 00:41 | I'm going to close the old one.
| | 00:42 | Click on New Document, and
here's our new document window.
| | 00:46 | Now let's type something in this.
| | 00:49 | Now you notice that when I type
something in TextEdit, it says Edited at the
| | 00:53 | very top of the window. This
indicates that you've added to the last saved
| | 00:57 | version of the document, in which
case I had nothing at all but now I have
| | 01:01 | something, and it shows edited.
| | 01:02 | Now I'm going to save the file,
so I'll press Command+S to save it.
| | 01:07 | And you'll notice the where pop-up menu.
| | 01:10 | By default, TextEdit will save documents
to iCloud if you have an iCloud account
| | 01:15 | enabled and your
documents and data option enabled.
| | 01:18 | You don't have to save to
iCloud if you don't want to.
| | 01:21 | You could choose to save it on your local drive.
| | 01:24 | So I could save it to my documents folder.
| | 01:26 | But for now, I'm going to leave it
in iCloud, and then I'll click on save.
| | 01:30 | When I do that, that
little Edited entry disappears.
| | 01:34 | I tap one key and Edited appears again.
| | 01:37 | Now let's add some more text.
| | 01:40 | Now if I click on Edited, and the
triangle, it will allow me to revert to Last
| | 01:45 | Saved because I haven't saved it again.
| | 01:48 | So I do that, revert, and I'm
back to my previous version.
| | 01:52 | And this works this way because both
versions have been saved without you having
| | 01:56 | to do anything about it,
and this is called auto save.
| | 01:59 | Now let's go back up to
that triangle menu again.
| | 02:02 | Now notice I can't revert back to the
previous version but I can browse all
| | 02:05 | versions, let's do that.
| | 02:08 | When I do that, a Time
Machine-like interface appears.
| | 02:12 | Here's my original saved version
and here's the version I edited.
| | 02:16 | If I want to restore the version that I
edited, I click on it, I click restore
| | 02:21 | and that version is back.
| | 02:22 | There are more things you
can do with that triangle menu.
| | 02:25 | One thing is I can rename my file, and when
I do that, its name changes in the title bar.
| | 02:32 | This saves you from having to
save it through a menu command.
| | 02:35 | And press return, and now I
have a new name for my document.
| | 02:39 | What else could I do?
| | 02:40 | I could also move it somewhere
else, so currently it's an iCloud.
| | 02:43 | Now I want it to be in my Documents folder.
| | 02:45 | I click move, and now it's
moved to my Documents folder.
| | 02:49 | Note that when I do this,
it's no longer in iCloud.
| | 02:51 | Well, what if I want to put it back in iCloud? OK.
| | 02:54 | This time I can move it to iCloud because
it knows it's on my Mac so I can put it back.
| | 02:58 | Move to iCloud, yes indeed, now it's in iCloud.
| | 03:03 | I can also duplicate the document.
| | 03:07 | Here's my copy, I don't care
to, so I'll delete that copy.
| | 03:16 | And let's add a little more text.
| | 03:18 | And when I try to do that I'm told that
it's locked, so that I have to unlock it.
| | 03:24 | And I'll click on save.
| | 03:26 | Now let's quit TextEdit, now let's launch it again.
| | 03:31 | And now instead of seeing that iCloud
is tied to TextEdit, I see this window,
| | 03:36 | indicating all the documents
that I've saved in TextEdit.
| | 03:40 | I can see those that I have in iCloud and
I can also see those that are on my Mac.
| | 03:44 | And when I see that, I can go through my
folders and dig down and find my TextEdit files.
| | 03:49 | But instead I'll go back to iCloud.
| | 03:51 | I then select that document,
click on open, and there's my file.
| | 03:56 | Now this works not only with
TextEdit but also with Pages.
| | 04:03 | And here's Pages. And these are the documents that
I've saved using my iCloud account.
| | 04:07 | To open one, same idea, open it here, it
opens from iCloud and I can then work in Pages.
| | 04:15 | I go to the top, and here's that little
triangle again showing me the same kind
| | 04:19 | of features that I had in TextEdit.
| | 04:21 | And that's the idea behind auto
save and documents in the cloud.
| | 04:24 | Again, this doesn't work with all
applications, they must be written to be
| | 04:28 | compatible with iCloud.
| | 04:30 | And currently, the list of compatible
applications is limited to a few Apple
| | 04:34 | applications including the
iWorks Suite, TextEdit, and Preview.
| | 04:38 | More applications are likely
to be supported in the future.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Configuring Mail, Contacts, and Calendar| 00:00 | As with Lion before it, you can
configure Mail, Contacts & Calendars in a
| | 00:04 | single system preference.
| | 00:06 | Let's see how that works.
| | 00:07 | So go to the Apple menu.
| | 00:09 | I'll choose System Preferences, click
on Mail, Contacts & Calendars, and you
| | 00:13 | see that I have nothing setup.
| | 00:15 | So, let's go ahead and setup an iCloud account.
| | 00:17 | And if you have an old MobileMe account,
you can use iCloud.com, me.com, or mac.com.
| | 00:24 | Add my password, and click on Sign In.
| | 00:28 | Now I'll be asked a couple of questions.
| | 00:30 | One, do I want to merge the bookmarks that
I have on my computer with iCloud?
| | 00:34 | Indeed I do, click on Merge.
| | 00:38 | And now those bookmarks are going to be
available to anything that uses my iCloud account.
| | 00:42 | And also, do I want to enable location
for this Mac so that I can use the Find
| | 00:47 | My Mac feature, I do want to do
that as well. So I'll click on okay.
| | 00:51 | And there's my iCloud account.
| | 00:52 | We've already setup iCloud in another
movie, so you know what these options mean.
| | 00:57 | Now let's add a Gmail account.
| | 00:59 | I'll click on plus and then click on Gmail.
| | 01:01 | There's my name, I just enter my Gmail
address and my password and then click on Set Up.
| | 01:09 | I'm then asked what
I'd like to sync with Gmail.
| | 01:13 | Well obviously I want my mail
from Gmail in the Mail application.
| | 01:16 | I've also setup a calendar in Gmail so
I'd like that to sync, as well as reminders.
| | 01:21 | And when I do that, this information
shows in the Calendar and Reminders
| | 01:25 | applications on my Mac.
| | 01:27 | I use Google Talk, which is
an instant messaging service.
| | 01:30 | And because I do, I want those
messages to appear in the Messages application,
| | 01:34 | which we'll look at in another movie.
| | 01:36 | And then you can also use Notes with Gmail.
| | 01:38 | So, all these look good to me, you can
disable those that you don't want. Now I'll
| | 01:42 | click on and Add Account.
| | 01:43 | And after a few seconds,
all my options are enabled.
| | 01:47 | Now you notice that the name of my
account is Google and that's fine if I only
| | 01:51 | have one Gmail account.
| | 01:53 | But a lot of people have more than one.
| | 01:55 | So it helps to identify it by clicking
on Details and then changing the name in
| | 02:00 | the description field.
| | 02:02 | So in this case Lynda Gmail, and then
I'll click on OK. So all that's set up
| | 02:06 | but is it really working? Let's find out.
| | 02:08 | So I'll quit System Preferences. I'll
now go to Mail, and I look at my mail.
| | 02:14 | And here's iCloud, so that's set up.
| | 02:17 | And here is my Lynda Gmail
and that's set up as well.
| | 02:20 | So it is working with Mail. I'll quit Mail.
| | 02:22 | And now let's take a look
at the Calendar application.
| | 02:27 | And here is my lynda.com account.
| | 02:29 | Here's my iCloud account, and then here
the calendars that I set up within Gmail.
| | 02:35 | Now suppose you don't want to see all
the calendars that you set up in Gmail.
| | 02:38 | Simple enough, we'll go to Calendar, go
to Preferences, click on Accounts, I'll
| | 02:43 | select my Gmail account,
and then go to Delegation.
| | 02:46 | It shows me any calendars that I can access.
| | 02:49 | So I can show my Home style calendar
and I can show my Work schedule calendar.
| | 02:53 | So those appeared not only under my
Gmail account, but also under my delegates.
| | 02:59 | And I'll turn those back off.
| | 03:03 | And we'll quit Calendar, and I'll go
back to System Preferences, and Mail,
| | 03:07 | Contacts & Calendars.
| | 03:10 | Now you notice that there are a
varieties of accounts that you can add.
| | 03:14 | You can add and Exchange account,
you can add a Twitter account, Facebook,
| | 03:17 | Yahoo!, AOL, Vimeo, Flickr. And
then suppose that you have an IMAP or a
| | 03:23 | POP account that you don't see in this
list, then you choose Add Other Account.
| | 03:28 | You choose the kind of
account that you want to add.
| | 03:30 | So in this case it would be a mail
account, and then I click on Create.
| | 03:34 | I can then enter the
information I need for that account.
| | 03:37 | Now OS X maintains a
list of ISPs that it understands.
| | 03:41 | So for example, when we setup that Gmail
account, it knows all about Gmail's IMAP
| | 03:46 | and SMTP settings. These are
server settings for your ISP.
| | 03:50 | It works the same way with Yahoo! and
a lot of other common email services.
| | 03:54 | So it's a good idea to just
try your email address along with your
| | 03:58 | password, and there's a good chance
that it will be set up automatically.
| | 04:01 | If it's not, you'll be walked
through a series of fields where you'll be
| | 04:04 | asked to enter things like the IMAP server,
or the POP server address, or the SMPT address.
| | 04:11 | And this is all information
that you can get from your ISP.
| | 04:14 | I'm not going to walk through all that now.
| | 04:16 | Instead I'll just click on Cancel.
| | 04:17 | Just so you know, this is how you do it.
| | 04:20 | There are more esoteric settings for
things like CalDAV and CardDAV and Eldav
| | 04:24 | accounts, some of which we'll
get into in some other movies.
| | 04:27 | In the meantime, you've learned how
to set up your email account, which is
| | 04:30 | likely one of your first concerns.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Configuring your printer| 00:00 | Much as we yammer on about the
paperless office, printing documents created on
| | 00:05 | our computers is still a fact of life,
and because it is, you need to know how to
| | 00:09 | add printers to your Mac.
| | 00:11 | So let's take a look.
| | 00:12 | I'm going to go to System
Preferences, choose Print & Scan.
| | 00:17 | And currently I have no printers attached to
my Mac, but I happen to have one next door.
| | 00:22 | And look, heres the printer.
| | 00:25 | Would I like to download and install
software for this particular printer?
| | 00:28 | Indeed, I want to do that.
| | 00:30 | So I click on Install. I agree.
| | 00:33 | It finds the software I
need and then it downloads it.
| | 00:37 | Now this won't always happen.
| | 00:38 | There are cases that the Mac already
has the printer software you need so you
| | 00:43 | may not be queued to download it.
| | 00:44 | In this case, it didn't have it, it
wanted it, and it was more than happy to go
| | 00:49 | out and it get it for us. Okay.
| | 00:52 | This is done and the printer was
automatically installed for us.
| | 00:55 | The printer we just connected was a
USB printer, and this printer not only
| | 00:59 | prints, but it also has a scanning function.
| | 01:02 | But suppose you haven't connected a USB
printer, what if you have something on the network?
| | 01:06 | We'll click on +.
| | 01:07 | We're going to add a printer or scanner.
| | 01:10 | I'm going to select IP, and I'll enter an
IP address for this printer that I want.
| | 01:15 | It goes out searching for
the printer, and it found it.
| | 01:18 | Now I can give it a name
here and then I'll click on Add.
| | 01:24 | It sets up my printer and
it shows me the options.
| | 01:28 | I don't need to configure
those now so I'll click OK.
| | 01:31 | Here I have my USB
printer and my network printer.
| | 01:35 | I can also choose to make one a default.
| | 01:37 | So I'll right-click on the one I
want to make that default and choose
| | 01:41 | Set default printer.
| | 01:43 | That means anytime I pull up a print
dialogue box in an application, this will
| | 01:47 | be the printer that's selected.
| | 01:49 | Now note this "Share this
printer on the network" option.
| | 01:52 | This is a USB printer, so it's not
natively shareable, unlike this printer that
| | 01:57 | actually is on the network.
| | 01:59 | However, I can share this with
any other Mac on my local network.
| | 02:03 | Actually, with a PC as well.
| | 02:05 | And the way you do this is
through Sharing Preferences.
| | 02:08 | So I click Sharing Preferences, and you
see here is the Printer Sharing option
| | 02:12 | and it shows you those
printers that you can share.
| | 02:15 | We'll look at sharing in another movie,
just so you know that's how you get to it.
| | 02:20 | You can add other printers as well.
| | 02:22 | Same idea, click +, Add Printers or
Scanners, and you have a couple of options.
| | 02:27 | One is, if you have a fax machine, and
I believe some people still do, you can
| | 02:32 | do the same kind of thing.
| | 02:33 | Name, look for the location, and
then you can use the fax with your Mac.
| | 02:37 | It doesn't have to be a dedicated fax machine.
| | 02:40 | Actually, some multi-use printers include a
fax function and you can add them through this.
| | 02:44 | Sometimes you need an extra
driver for that device, however.
| | 02:47 | We've gone through IP printing.
| | 02:49 | Also, you can add Windows printer.
| | 02:51 | So if you have a printer that's
connected to a Windows workgroup, you can then
| | 02:56 | connect that printer as well.
| | 02:59 | Note too that this is called print and
scan, and as I mentioned, this printer
| | 03:03 | has a scanner with it.
| | 03:04 | I can open the scanner.
| | 03:06 | That will either launch specific
software tied to that scanner or Image Capture,
| | 03:10 | and then you can use it to scan your documents.
| | 03:12 | Mountain Lion ships with a large
collection of printer drivers, but you may
| | 03:16 | occasionally come across a
printer that isn't natively supported.
| | 03:19 | Now in our case, our printer was happy
to install that software for us, but you
| | 03:24 | may not be so lucky.
| | 03:25 | So if your Mac can't seem to
identify your printer, go to the printer
| | 03:29 | manufacturer's website and find the most
recent Mac compatible version of the driver.
| | 03:34 | Download and install it and you should
be able to use the printer with your Mac.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Protecting your data with Time Machine| 00:00 | It's an old saw in the computer
business that it's not a question of if your
| | 00:04 | hard drive will die, but
rather when, and it's true.
| | 00:06 | The hard drive in your Mac will
eventually fail, though we hope not right away.
| | 00:11 | The one way you can protect your data is
to back it up, and the easiest way to do
| | 00:15 | that is via Mountain Lion's Time
Machine, and here's how it works.
| | 00:18 | I'm going to attach a hard drive to my
Mac and this is going to be a FireWire
| | 00:23 | hard drive but you could
also use a USB hard drive.
| | 00:25 | Now, when I do that, Time Machine
pops up a little message telling me that
| | 00:29 | there's a hard drive attached and I
can choose to use it as a backup disk, and
| | 00:33 | indeed, I want to do that, so
I click on Use as Backup Disk.
| | 00:37 | That will then open the Time Machine preference.
| | 00:40 | I'm going to rename this hard drive
because External Hard Drive doesn't tell me much.
| | 00:44 | Instead, I'm going to call it Backup.
| | 00:47 | It will then tell me that it's going
to back up in 99, 94, 93 seconds or so.
| | 00:53 | Now, at this point, if I wanted to, if
there were another hard drive attached, I
| | 00:57 | could Select Disk and I could choose a
different disk to use, but I want to use
| | 01:01 | this one, so I'll click on Cancel.
| | 01:03 | Now you could be done right now
but we can configure it a little bit.
| | 01:07 | With Time Machine, you tell it
what you don't want it to backup.
| | 01:10 | Otherwise, it backs up everything on your drive.
| | 01:12 | So let's go to Options, and here we have the
option to exclude certain items from backup.
| | 01:18 | So I'm going to click on the +
button, and here I am navigating to the root
| | 01:22 | level of my hard drive.
| | 01:24 | Now I can always install another copy of Mac
OS X, so I'm going to exclude the System folder.
| | 01:31 | When I do that, I'm offered the option
to exclude only the System folder or I
| | 01:35 | can exclude other system files.
| | 01:38 | These would be things like files
within the Library folder that's at the root
| | 01:41 | level of your hard drive.
| | 01:42 | So I'll exclude those.
| | 01:44 | So there are going to be some case
where you don't want to exclude anything.
| | 01:48 | For example, if you'd like to restore
your hard drive exactly as it was when you
| | 01:52 | last backed it up, don't exclude
everything and it will restore that way.
| | 01:55 | However, if instead you intend to
reinstall the Mac OS, you can go ahead and
| | 02:00 | exclude things like System, reinstall
Mac OS, and then restore the other data
| | 02:04 | that was on the hard drive.
| | 02:06 | Now, I'll click on Save.
| | 02:08 | My next backup starts, and
then I'll close this window.
| | 02:12 | Here's our Time Machine backup on the
desktop and you can identify it as such
| | 02:15 | because it has the Time Machine icon on
it and it's kind of this greenish color.
| | 02:20 | Backup is only as good as its ability
to restore your backed up files, so let's
| | 02:24 | find some backed up files.
| | 02:26 | So let's look at that restore process.
| | 02:28 | The way I'm going to do that is I'm
going to go to my Documents folder.
| | 02:32 | I'll see that there is one file in
there currently, but there used to be
| | 02:35 | other files in there.
| | 02:37 | Since then, I've thrown
them away. Let's get them back.
| | 02:39 | So I go to Time Machine and
click on the icon in the dock.
| | 02:43 | Here is the current state of my Mac, but I can
go back in time in a couple of different ways.
| | 02:49 | I can use the arrow to go back in time,
and look, here is the file that I threw away.
| | 02:56 | Now, if I want to restore the state of
the Documents folder as you see it now,
| | 03:00 | all I have to do is click on
Restore and it will be brought back.
| | 03:04 | I'll do that in just a second.
| | 03:06 | In the meantime, let's go back to the
current state and you can do that by
| | 03:10 | clicking on this Now
button here at the right side.
| | 03:12 | Now, let me show you
other ways to go back in time.
| | 03:15 | One is to simply click on
the title bars of the windows.
| | 03:21 | As I do that, you could
see I'm going back in time.
| | 03:23 | Let's take it back again to the current state.
| | 03:26 | You can also use these icons along the right.
| | 03:30 | So you can go back to as far as possible
by selecting the last one that enlarges
| | 03:36 | as you pass your cursor over it,
and there's the initial state.
| | 03:43 | So again, if I want to restore, I
simply click on Restore, or I can cancel the
| | 03:48 | whole thing by clicking on Cancel.
| | 03:49 | I do want to restore that so I click on Restore.
| | 03:57 | And, as if by magic, here is my
Gatekeeper by Breen file.
| | 04:01 | And that's exactly how Time Machine works.
| | 04:03 | So again, if you want to go back in
time, go to whatever folder you want to
| | 04:08 | restore to, click on the Time Machine
icon, up comes the Time Machine interface,
| | 04:13 | go back in time until you find the
state that you wish to restore, and click on
| | 04:17 | Restore, and you're done.
| | 04:20 | Now if you need to restore your entire
Mac, you do that by restarting your Mac
| | 04:24 | with the Option key held down
and I'll show you how to do that.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Learn your way around the Mac App Store| 00:00 | At one time, the way to get software
for your Mac was to trot down to your
| | 00:04 | local software emporium and purchase
a box that contained the software you
| | 00:07 | needed on some kind of disc.
| | 00:09 | Today, we rarely get software on discs.
| | 00:12 | Instead, we download it.
| | 00:13 | While many of us still down software
from various websites, Apple wouldn't mind
| | 00:18 | terribly if you used its Mac App
Store, which makes it very easy to obtain,
| | 00:22 | update, and reinstall your software.
| | 00:25 | Let's take a tour of the store.
| | 00:26 | To do that, you go to the
Apple menu and choose App Store.
| | 00:31 | When you do that, the first
thing you see is the Featured tab.
| | 00:34 | This includes a few applications at the top
that Apple thinks are worthy of your attention.
| | 00:38 | Below, you'll see a New and
Noteworthy area, some highlighted categories of
| | 00:42 | applications, What's Hot, and these
are applications that seem to be getting
| | 00:46 | a lot of attention from people, another set
of collections, and then kind of a special area.
| | 00:51 | In this case, this is enhanced for
the MacBook Pro with Retina Display,
| | 00:54 | so the graphics on these applications
have been tweaked to work with Apple's
| | 00:59 | Retina Display MacBooks.
| | 01:00 | Don't forget to take a look
along the right side as well.
| | 01:04 | First, you're going to find some quick
links to things, and then you're going to
| | 01:08 | look at your All Categories.
| | 01:09 | You can browse applications by category.
| | 01:11 | So for example, I want to look just at
Apple's apps, I click on that and you see
| | 01:15 | the applications that are made by Apple.
| | 01:17 | To go back a page, we just click on
the left arrow, and now we're back on
| | 01:20 | the Featured screen.
| | 01:22 | Another important area is the Top Paid area.
| | 01:24 | This tells you exactly
what's popular at the App Store.
| | 01:28 | In this case, Mountain Lion is
still a big seller, as are lots of other
| | 01:32 | Apple applications.
| | 01:34 | Then there's the Top Free area.
| | 01:36 | These are also popular applications that
you don't have to pay for. They're all free.
| | 01:40 | Now, if you want to see all
applications of a particular kind, say Free, we can
| | 01:43 | click on See All and then we see
a long list of these applications.
| | 01:51 | Now, let's take a look at those Top Charts.
| | 01:53 | So if you don't want to use the sidebar,
instead, you can go to this page and
| | 01:56 | look at what's Top Paid and again, click
on See All and you see lots and lots of
| | 02:00 | popular applications.
| | 02:02 | Top Grossing is important as well.
| | 02:04 | These are the applications that are
making the most money for those people
| | 02:07 | who've manufactured them and look at this.
| | 02:09 | Apple seems to be doing extremely
well as it seems to have the top
| | 02:13 | eight applications.
| | 02:16 | Then Categories is where you can choose the
category of software you want to look for.
| | 02:20 | So if you need something in the
Business category, simply click on its category
| | 02:24 | and you'll see popular apps at the top
and then the applications listed below.
| | 02:29 | Then there's Purchases.
| | 02:30 | We took a brief look at that in
another movie but this is very helpful.
| | 02:33 | Once upon a time, if you purchased
something from Apple, you'd have to download
| | 02:37 | it to your computer, in most cases
this was iTunes content like music and
| | 02:42 | movies and that kind of thing.
| | 02:42 | And when you did, you had to keep a backup of it.
| | 02:45 | If you lost it, if your computer crashed,
for example, and it was completely gone,
| | 02:49 | you would actually have to write to
Apple and say, "Please, I lost all my stuff.
| | 02:53 | Any way you could give it back to me?"
| | 02:55 | And they'd be very nice and they'd say yes,
| | 02:56 | you can download it again just one time.
| | 02:59 | Well, that's all over now.
| | 03:00 | There's a new program called iTunes in
the Cloud, and it's a broad policy that
| | 03:05 | allows you to re-download anything
that you've purchased from Apple.
| | 03:08 | Actually, this can free things that
you've gotten from the Mac Apple Store, as
| | 03:11 | well as from the iTunes store.
| | 03:13 | So while you're on the Mac App Store,
you'll find all your purchases, and if you
| | 03:17 | don't happen to have them on this
particular computer, all you have to do is
| | 03:20 | click on Install and they will
be installed on your computer.
| | 03:23 | I showed you elsewhere the Updates area,
and this is where you get the software
| | 03:27 | updates for any Apple applications that
were installed when you first got your
| | 03:31 | Mac, as well as
applications that you've purchased.
| | 03:34 | Now let's look at actually obtaining an application.
| | 03:36 | Let's go back to Featured
and let's go to Top Free.
| | 03:39 | Let's look at Window Tidy
and we'll click on that.
| | 03:41 | Now we're actually on that app's page.
| | 03:44 | You can see a description at the top.
| | 03:47 | They provide some screen shots so you
can see what you're getting into, and below
| | 03:53 | are customer ratings.
| | 03:54 | These can be very helpful because it shows you
what real customers think of the application.
| | 04:00 | Now what I find most useful is
in Sort By to choose Most Recent.
| | 04:05 | Do this and you can see
the most recent comments.
| | 04:09 | This is helpful because it's
possible that when an application originally
| | 04:12 | shipped, maybe there were some bugs with
it, it wasn't quite finished, and it got
| | 04:16 | a lot of poor ratings.
| | 04:17 | However, the developer then updated the
application and it got better over time
| | 04:21 | and that should be reflected in the rating.
| | 04:24 | Note too, there are occasions when you
want to take some of these comments with
| | 04:28 | a grain of salt,
particularly for free applications.
| | 04:30 | People have paid nothing for something.
| | 04:32 | They may not be happy with it because
they thought it should do this even though
| | 04:36 | it was never intended to, and so
they'll issue negative comments.
| | 04:40 | So it's a good idea to run through the
comments and try to figure out if that
| | 04:44 | person is just a crank or if there
really seems to be trend and there is
| | 04:48 | something wrong with the application.
| | 04:49 | So we'll go back to the top and if we want to
get this application, all we have to do
| | 04:54 | is click on the Price,
| | 04:55 | in this case it's free, and
then click on Install App.
| | 04:58 | When we do that, we'd be prompted
for our Apple ID and our password.
| | 05:01 | I don't actually need this application
right now so I'll click on Cancel, but if
| | 05:05 | you were to enter your password, you'd
be signed in and then the application
| | 05:08 | would download automatically and be
placed in your Applications folder.
| | 05:12 | Those are the basics of the Mac App Store.
| | 05:15 | It's a convenient way to
purchase software but not the only way.
| | 05:18 | Now some applications are barred from
the Mac App Store because they perform
| | 05:21 | the kind of under-the-hood chores that
Apple would prefer that users not do.
| | 05:26 | If you don't find the tools you're
looking for on the Mac App Store, hunt
| | 05:29 | around on the internet. Developers of
these tools may be selling them from
| | 05:32 | their own website.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
3. Searching Your MacFinding files with Spotlight| 00:00 | If you've had your Mac for a while,
you have a lot of files on it, and even if
| | 00:04 | you have a new Mac, it won't be long
before you've packed it with documents.
| | 00:08 | As you put more files on your Mac,
regardless of how organized you are, you'll
| | 00:12 | find it increasingly more difficult
to locate your files by opening folders
| | 00:15 | and looking around.
| | 00:16 | Fortunately, Mountain Lion has a
couple of features that help you search for
| | 00:20 | your files, and the first is called Spotlight.
| | 00:23 | This is how it works.
| | 00:24 | In the top right corner of the Menu
bar, you will find the Spotlight menu.
| | 00:28 | So you can click on that
and then enter a search query.
| | 00:31 | The other option, and this is one that you ought
to keep in mind, is to press Command+spacebar,
| | 00:36 |
and that brings
up the Spotlight search field.
| | 00:39 | Quick searches are easy.
| | 00:41 | Just enter what you're looking for.
| | 00:42 | So we'll put my name in there.
| | 00:45 | And here is a list of results.
| | 00:47 | This will include not only files that
have these words in the title, but also
| | 00:52 | within the contents of the file.
| | 00:54 | Speaking of contents, you can view a
preview of many kinds of documents.
| | 00:58 | So in this case, let me highlight this
Gatekeeper PDF file, and here is a preview
| | 01:03 | to the left showing me what's in the file.
| | 01:05 | So this is an easy way to find the file
you're looking for, particularly if
| | 01:08 | you have files that have similar names.
| | 01:11 | You can preview not only text and PDF
files, but also play audio and movies.
| | 01:17 | Now, let's move down to the bottom
of the list and choose Search for.
| | 01:22 | This pops up a Google search
which shows my name, and there I am.
| | 01:27 | So we'll quit Safari.
| | 01:30 | Now let's take a look at Wikipedia.
| | 01:33 | This opens the Dictionary application
and chooses the Wikipedia tab, and here
| | 01:38 | is my Wikipedia entry.
| | 01:39 | No, I'm not the Canadian ice hockey
player, but this is my entry on Wikipedia.
| | 01:44 | We'll quit Dictionary.
| | 01:46 | There are also ways to narrow your
search, and one of them is to put the thing
| | 01:50 | you're looking for in quotes.
| | 01:51 | So I'll put quote and end quote.
| | 01:56 | This will show you any files that
have this exact phrase within them, and it
| | 02:01 | turns out there's just
one and that's my test file.
| | 02:04 | There's a preview of it.
| | 02:06 | Sure enough, this is my file,
is part of that text file.
| | 02:09 | You can also narrow searches by keyword.
| | 02:12 | So in this case I put name:chris.
| | 02:18 | So this includes any files
that include Chris in their title.
| | 02:24 | I can also search by date.
| | 02:25 | So, that would be date:today, and these
are items that have been modified today.
| | 02:33 | I can search by kind.
| | 02:36 | We'll say kind:PDF, and here are my PDF files.
| | 02:39 | The way you format this is very important.
| | 02:42 | So it must be "keyword:" and then
whatever you're looking for. So no spaces in
| | 02:47 | between any of these items.
| | 02:48 | You can also combine
searches using multiple terms.
| | 02:53 | So we'll say name:breen, kind:PDF, and
that will show you just PDF files that
| | 03:04 | include Breen in their name.
| | 03:07 | As I demonstrated in an earlier movie,
you can launch applications using
| | 03:12 | Spotlight, so just type in their name.
| | 03:13 | I'll type in iTunes, press
return, and iTunes launches.
| | 03:19 | Spotlight can also perform
mathematical calculations.
| | 03:23 | So, just type in a formula.
| | 03:25 | So we'll type in (4*32)*(9+45) and there
you see the calculator entry, and that
| | 03:41 | gives me the result of my calculation.
| | 03:44 | Suppose you need to know the
definition of a word, you can do that as well.
| | 03:47 | I'll type in "numbles" which is a great
word for Scrabble, by the way, but a lot
| | 03:51 | of people don't know what it is.
| | 03:53 | You see the Look Up entry, select
that, click on it, and you find the
| | 03:58 | definition. Or you can preview that as well
just by selecting it, and there's your definition.
| | 04:05 | Now let's enter my name again.
| | 04:07 | Now suppose you have a lot of results,
and they don't all appear in this list,
| | 04:13 | because let's face it, if you have a
thousand results, they're not going to
| | 04:16 | fit in this one list.
| | 04:17 | So instead, choose Show All in Finder.
| | 04:20 | A Searching This Mac window
appears, and here you find all the results
| | 04:26 | that match your query.
| | 04:27 | As you can see, there are
lots and lots and lots of them.
| | 04:31 | We'll look at finding items
in the Finder in another movie.
| | 04:34 | We'll close this window.
| | 04:35 | Now, you can limit what Spotlight
searches for, and to do that, you want to go
| | 04:39 | into Spotlight's system preferences,
and you can choose the kinds of things
| | 04:45 | that will be searched.
| | 04:47 | So for example, if you don't want
messages and chats to be searched, you uncheck
| | 04:51 | that option. Not webpages, okay, no
PDF files, fine, just uncheck those items
| | 04:58 | that you don't want searched.
| | 04:59 | You can also prevent
certain areas from being searched.
| | 05:02 | To do that, click on Privacy.
| | 05:06 | Let's grab something in my User Account.
| | 05:11 | Let's say I'd prefer not to
have my Pictures folders searched.
| | 05:14 | All I have to do is drag it into the
privacy area and Spotlight searches will
| | 05:20 | avoid looking in pictures.
| | 05:22 | So this a good thing to know if somebody
shares your Mac and you don't want them
| | 05:25 | easily finding stuff
that you've put on your Mac.
| | 05:28 | If you want to undo this sort of thing, just
select the item and click on the minus button.
| | 05:33 | Finally, you can change
the Spotlight Menu shortcuts.
| | 05:36 | By default again, they're Command+space,
and if you want to show a Spotlight window
| | 05:42 | which is the Command+F window that
appears, that would be Command+Option+space.
| | 05:47 | Click on one of these pop-up menus
and you can choose a different key.
| | 05:52 | Of course there's no substitute for
organizing your files and applications so
| | 05:56 | you have a good idea of where they can be found.
| | 05:59 | But for those times when you can't find
them or would rather not bother digging
| | 06:03 | through folders, there's Spotlight.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Digging deeper with Finder searches| 00:00 | Spotlight is one way to find items on your Mac.
| | 00:02 | It's fast and it's convenient.
| | 00:04 | But there are times when you need to
perform more complete searches and save
| | 00:08 | those searches for a rainy day.
| | 00:10 | That's when you turn to the Finder
search feature, which we'll look at now.
| | 00:14 | You can do this by going to the File
menu and then choosing Find, or press Command+F,
| | 00:20 | and there's your Searching "This Mac" window.
| | 00:22 | At this point, it's very much like Spotlight.
| | 00:25 | So I'll enter a search term.
| | 00:28 | Let's say, my name, breen,
and here are my results.
| | 00:31 | You notice below there's a file names entry.
| | 00:35 | So if I want to see just those
files that include Breen in the title, I
| | 00:39 | choose Name matches:breen
| | 00:41 | and you see we've lost a result
because it doesn't include the word Breen.
| | 00:46 | If I want to go back to searching
everything, I click on Name and choose
| | 00:50 | Everything, and there's that result.
| | 00:53 | You can then add another search term.
| | 00:55 | So we have Filename and
I'll add Chris, name matches:
| | 01:01 | Chris, and you see just the file that
has both Chris and Breen in its title.
| | 01:06 | You can also search by location.
| | 01:08 | Now, in this case, we're searching the
entire Mac, but I could also search the Desktop.
| | 01:13 | Well, there's nothing on the Desktop,
so clearly, there's nothing to show.
| | 01:16 | But if there were a file on the
Desktop that included Chris and Breen, that
| | 01:20 | would appear in this list.
| | 01:22 | Note that if you've made a sharing
connection to another Mac, you'll have a
| | 01:25 | third entry here, so you'll have this
Mac, whatever it is that you're working
| | 01:29 | with at the moment, and then
there'll also be a shared item.
| | 01:32 | Now suppose I want to save this search
looking for, well, files about my hair. All
| | 01:37 | I have to do at that point is click on Save.
| | 01:41 | I'll title my search.
| | 01:43 | I'll leave the option to add this to
the sidebar, and I'm going to leave this
| | 01:47 | location as Saved Searches.
| | 01:49 | I then click on Save. Look what happens.
| | 01:52 | I've just created
something called a Smart Search.
| | 01:55 | So whenever I select this, I will
see any results that match my search.
| | 02:01 | Now let's go back to a regular search window.
| | 02:04 | You can build searches
using a series of conditions.
| | 02:08 | So under Kind, I'm going to
choose Name, matches, Breen.
| | 02:13 | I'll also use Contains.
| | 02:17 | That broadens the search a little bit.
| | 02:18 | Add another condition, and Kind is Image.
| | 02:24 | This will turn up any image file that
contains the word Breen, and here it is.
| | 02:31 | Now, if these pop-up menus don't include
all the options you want, choose Other.
| | 02:37 | This sheet appears and it
includes scads of conditions.
| | 02:44 | They go and on and on.
| | 02:48 | So for example, if you're looking
for music with a certain rating, you
| | 02:51 | can search by rating.
| | 02:52 | If you do this routinely, select the box
that appears under In Menu. Click on OK.
| | 03:00 | It will appear as a search condition,
but it will always appear as a search
| | 03:03 | condition because you
enabled that in Menu option.
| | 03:06 | We're going to close this.
| | 03:10 | There's another way to
assemble the Smart Search.
| | 03:12 | Go the File menu and choose New Smart Folder.
| | 03:16 | Let's create one that's
worthwhile. I'll click on +.
| | 03:22 | Let me go to Other.
| | 03:24 | I'll type in Size, File Size, and
I'll add that to my menu, click on OK.
| | 03:32 | So File Size, let's say is
greater than 300 Megabytes.
| | 03:39 | So, what does this tell us?
| | 03:42 | Well, suppose that your Mac's hard
drive is getting really full, you've got
| | 03:45 | a bunch of files on there and you're not
sure which ones are taking up the most space.
| | 03:50 | If you configure a search like this, it
will be easy to tell which files are large.
| | 03:54 | At that point, you could choose to
archive these files to another drive or if
| | 03:58 | you don't need them, simply throw them away.
| | 04:00 | I'll click on Save.
| | 04:02 | I'll call it Big Files.
| | 04:05 | I'll leave it in the sidebar.
| | 04:09 | Now, when I want to search for my Big Files,
I click on it and it will be updated.
| | 04:13 | And that's the important
thing about Smart Folders.
| | 04:15 | They're automatically updated.
| | 04:16 | So as I add more files that meet these
conditions, those files will appear in
| | 04:22 | my list of results.
| | 04:24 | Now, before we finish, here
are a couple of quick tips.
| | 04:27 | To search specifically by file name,
hold down Ctrl+Command+F, or you can hold
| | 04:33 | down the Control key, go the
File menu, and choose Find by Name.
| | 04:40 | So this will search specifically for file names.
| | 04:43 | That means you don't have to use the File
name menu that appears in your search field.
| | 04:48 | Apple's Search and Spotlight
technologies are found all over the Mac OS and in
| | 04:52 | Apple's applications.
| | 04:54 | Not only can you use it in the Finder,
but you'll find it in Contacts, Mail,
| | 04:58 | Calendar, and some of the iLife applications.
| | 05:01 | Third-party applications can use it as well.
| | 05:04 | Wherever you find a search field on
your Mac, there's a good chance that
| | 05:07 | Spotlight is behind it. Give it a go.
| | 05:09 | You'll find it helpful.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
4. Configuring System PreferencesConfiguring basic personal preferences| 00:00 | It's time to delve into System Preferences.
| | 00:02 | Specifically, those for configuring the
look and feel of the Mac's interface, and
| | 00:06 | we're going to start with
the General System Preference.
| | 00:11 | So you have various options that you
can configure in the General Systems
| | 00:14 | Preference to change the
look of the Mac's interface.
| | 00:17 | So you can change the color
of the buttons in the menus.
| | 00:20 | You have blue or graphite as choices.
| | 00:22 | You can change the highlight color.
| | 00:23 | So, for example, currently, if I want to
change its Name, it's a light blue, but
| | 00:30 | I can change it to a different color if I like.
| | 00:32 | We'll leave it as the blue.
| | 00:39 | You can change the size of the side bar
icons, much bigger now, and very tiny.
| | 00:49 | And medium, and I'll leave it at medium.
| | 00:53 | Then there are scroll bars.
| | 00:54 | Let's pull up a window.
| | 00:56 | Let's pull up one that actually has scroll bars.
| | 01:01 |
| | 01:04 | Now, as you can see, just like in Lion, you
have these grayish scroll bars here to the side.
| | 01:09 | This is much different than what came before.
| | 01:12 | So you can have those scroll bars
automatically appear based on whether you're
| | 01:15 | using a mouse or a trackpad, or they
can appear only when you're scrolling.
| | 01:20 | So now, I'm scrolling and they appear
and then I stop scrolling and they
| | 01:25 | disappear, or you can have them on all the time.
| | 01:31 | Take it away and they're still there.
| | 01:33 | If you have a mouse,
they'll be there all the time.
| | 01:36 | If you have a trackpad, they won't,
and the reason for this is because it's
| | 01:39 | very much like the iOS.
| | 01:41 | If you're accustomed to swiping things
on your iPhone or your iPod, you don't
| | 01:45 | see scroll bars, it just scrolls, and
so they assume that if you're using a
| | 01:49 | trackpad, you want that same kind of experience.
| | 01:52 | You can change how the scroll bars move,
depending on where you click, so if
| | 01:55 | I click in the scroll bar, currently
it will move down an entire page, or move
| | 02:01 | up a page, or I can choose to jump to
the spot that's clicked. So if I want to
| | 02:05 | go all the way to the bottom, I'll
click on the bottom, go to the middle, click
| | 02:09 | in the middle, and so on.
| | 02:11 | In another movie, I showed you how
to use autosave in TextEdit and other
| | 02:16 | supported applications.
| | 02:18 | By default, when you close a document, it
will automatically save changes you've made.
| | 02:23 | You don't have to allow that to happen, however.
| | 02:25 | If you enable "Ask to keep changes
when closing documents," instead of it just
| | 02:29 | closing and saving, you'll see a
little dialogue box that asks if you'd like
| | 02:33 | to keep your changes.
| | 02:35 | The next option has to do with closing windows.
| | 02:38 | So by default, if you have a bunch of
windows open and you close an application,
| | 02:42 | when you next restart that
application, those windows will open up again.
| | 02:46 | In this case, if you enable "Close
windows when quitting an application" when
| | 02:50 | you close that application, those
windows will close. The next time you open
| | 02:54 | the application, the application will
open without any of these windows open.
| | 02:58 | If you go into the Apple menu, you see
that there's a Recent Items entry, and
| | 03:05 | that includes Applications,
Documents, and Servers.
| | 03:09 | You can choose how many
items are going to appear there.
| | 03:12 | By default, it's 10.
| | 03:13 | But you're going to have no items
appear and you can go as far as 50 items.
| | 03:17 | Font smoothing is on by
default, and this is a good idea.
| | 03:20 | A lot of times, if you're in your web
browser, for example, and this isn't on,
| | 03:25 | some text is going to look a little jagged.
| | 03:27 | If you turn this on, the text
is just going to look better.
| | 03:31 | Here's another font smoothing option,
again you can choose which sizes font
| | 03:35 | smoothing will kick in on.
| | 03:37 | By default, it's at four, I like that setting.
| | 03:39 | Now, we'll move to Desktop & Screen Saver.
| | 03:44 | I can close this window here.
| | 03:45 | So within Desktop & Screen Saver, to no
one's surprise, there are two options,
| | 03:50 | and one is for configuring the look of the
Desktop and the other one is for the Screen Saver.
| | 03:55 | So Apple provides some desktop pictures.
| | 03:57 | To change, simply click on the one
you like, and you can also go with solid
| | 04:03 | colors as we have done.
| | 04:05 | You can also choose a
custom color if you like. Wow!
| | 04:10 | That'll wake you up in
the morning. You betcha!
| | 04:14 | That's a little too much for me, so I'm
going to turn that off and I'm going to
| | 04:18 | change it back to my -- ah, now I feel much calmer.
| | 04:20 | You can also choose items from
your iPhoto library if you like.
| | 04:23 | Let me choose photos.
| | 04:26 | That's very nice, too.
| | 04:28 | You can choose how that's going to work,
so it can fill the screen, it can
| | 04:32 | fit to screen, you can stretch it to fill the
screen, and you can also place it in the center.
| | 04:37 | Once again, we'll go back to our solid colors.
| | 04:42 | Then if you like, you can choose a folder
that has images within it. Now, there you go.
| | 04:51 | Wow, no, not even my wife would like that.
| | 04:54 | Okay, so yes, you could choose
your own pictures if you like.
| | 04:57 | Now, also at the bottom, this is
something we changed earlier, and that's the
| | 05:01 | Translucent menu bar.
| | 05:02 | If you want things behind the Menu Bar to
kind of show through, you can leave this on.
| | 05:07 | I prefer to have it off, however.
| | 05:09 | Then you can choose how often
you're going to change your picture.
| | 05:13 | That can happen every 30
minutes, every hour, every day.
| | 05:16 | Just to show you what can
happen if you choose this.
| | 05:20 | Change picture every five seconds.
| | 05:27 | See, it's not terrible,
because it fades in and out.
| | 05:29 | However, I would find that really
distracting, so I turn that off.
| | 05:35 | Solid colors and back to blue.
| | 05:37 | Now, let's take a look at Screen Saver.
| | 05:40 | There are a variety of Screen Savers
available to you, and a lot of them have to
| | 05:47 | do with slideshows now.
| | 05:52 | They're all very pretty and this comes
from a stock library of Apple's images.
| | 05:56 | You can also choose other sources if you like.
| | 06:05 | Again, you could choose a folder or
you can choose from a photo library.
| | 06:13 | Then there are sort of these synthesized effects.
| | 06:15 | This is Shell, iTunes Artwork, I
don't have anything in my iTunes library
| | 06:20 | currently, but if I did,
you'd see album artwork.
| | 06:24 | I could choose a random Screen Saver.
| | 06:27 | Flurry is the default Screen Saver, and
here's Arabesque, and we'll go back to the default.
| | 06:38 | If you like, when a Screen Saver kicks in,
you can have a clock up here, and then
| | 06:47 | you can configure some of these things as well.
| | 06:51 | Now normally, these will kick in after a
certain time, and this is configured in
| | 06:54 | the Energy Saver System Preference,
which we're going to look at later on, but
| | 06:58 | you can also kick in using a Hot Corner.
| | 07:00 | So you click on Hot Corners, and then
you can configure what happens when you
| | 07:04 | take your mouse to a certain place.
| | 07:06 | So in this case, start Screen Savers in
the upper left corner, so if I drag my
| | 07:09 | mouse to the upper left corner, here's my
Screen Saver, and then just drag it out and it stops.
| | 07:18 | In this case I'll set it
back to none and click on OK.
| | 07:21 | Now, one thing to know about Screen
Savers, it used to be way back in the day,
| | 07:26 | when we're all using these huge CRT
monitors that you really had to worry about
| | 07:31 | something like screen burn-in.
| | 07:33 | This would happen if you were seeing a
static image on your screen for hours.
| | 07:37 | Eventually, that image would
actually be burned into the phosphor.
| | 07:41 | And so whenever you look at anything on your
computer screen, you would see this ghost image.
| | 07:45 | This is not a concern today
with current monitors that we have.
| | 07:48 | You don't have to worry about screen burn-in.
| | 07:51 | So much of this is for your amusement.
| | 07:54 | The other thing is it's also a security issue.
| | 07:57 | So you can configure your Mac, and
we'll look at how that's done, so that when
| | 08:01 | it goes to sleep and shows a Screen
Saver, that in order to wake it up, you're
| | 08:05 | going to have to enter your password, so
that's one other use for a Screen Saver.
| | 08:11 | And now let's look at Dock,
and let's expose the Dock.
| | 08:14 | Go to Dock, Turn Hiding Off, and here's our Dock.
| | 08:19 | So you can change the size of the Dock.
| | 08:22 | It could be big or it could be very
little, and you'll change it based on how
| | 08:26 | many items you have in the Dock.
| | 08:28 | You can also magnify the Dock,
which is kind of a cool effect.
| | 08:32 | So as you drag over, your image
just get larger and then reduce as you
| | 08:37 | drag away from them.
| | 08:40 | You can choose where you're going
to put it, left, right, or bottom.
| | 08:44 | You can't put it at the top.
| | 08:46 | There's a minimize windows effect.
| | 08:49 | Let me show you how that works.
| | 08:52 | So if I click on the yellow
button, it minimizes the window.
| | 08:55 | See it sort of swoops down?
| | 08:58 | Here's a cool trick, hold down the
Shift key and then you can really see
| | 09:04 | how that effect works.
| | 09:06 | It also works that way when you
bring it back by clicking on it.
| | 09:10 | Again, I have the Shift key held down.
| | 09:11 | And you can scale it down instead. So
there's the scale effect with the Shift key.
| | 09:29 | Put it back to Genie.
| | 09:30 | You can double-click on a windows title
bar to minimize it, so I'll turn that on.
| | 09:35 | Click on the window.
| | 09:36 | Double-click, there it goes.
| | 09:41 | You can choose to minimize
windows into the application icon.
| | 09:45 | See how that works.
| | 09:46 | So notice, it didn't go to the right
side, but instead, because it's a Finder
| | 09:50 | window, it went into the finder icon.
| | 09:55 | You can animate the opening of applications.
| | 09:58 | What happens there is that if I open an
application -- see that little bouncing
| | 10:01 | in the Dock, I can turn that off if I want.
| | 10:05 | I can automatically hide and show the
Dock, I did that from the menu before, but
| | 10:09 | I can turn that on here.
| | 10:14 | And very subtle, at the very bottom, any
active applications are going to show a
| | 10:19 | very light, whitish-blue, right here,
light under an active application.
| | 10:25 | You can have that on or you can turn it off.
| | 10:28 | So you can see there's not a lot of
difference, and let's hide our Dock.
| | 10:32 | Then there's Mission Control.
| | 10:36 | We're going to talk about
Mission Control in another movie.
| | 10:39 | This is where you modify its behavior
and assign keyboard shortcuts to it.
| | 10:43 | Now, a lot of the features here were
once known as Expose in earlier versions of
| | 10:48 | the Mac OS, as well as Spaces.
| | 10:50 | The two have been combined
into this System Preference.
| | 10:53 | We're going to talk about
Dashboard in another movie.
| | 10:56 | Again, we're going to get to some of
these features when we talk about Mission
| | 11:00 | Control, and you're also going to
find a Hot Corners option here.
| | 11:03 | Click that and you can choose to have
Mission Control activated via a Hot Corner.
| | 11:07 | That wraps up the basic
Personal System Preferences.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adjusting Input Device preferences| 00:00 | Although it's possible with the help of
third-party software to control your Mac
| | 00:04 | with your voice, most of us still
rely on a physical device to command our
| | 00:08 | Macs, a keyboard, mouse, or trackpad.
| | 00:10 | So in this movie, we'll look at
configuring these System Preferences now.
| | 00:14 | Once again, back to System
Preferences and we're going to start with the
| | 00:18 | Keyboard system preference.
| | 00:19 | Now, in the first tab, you have a
couple of options, one is Key Repeat.
| | 00:24 | What that means is that, when you hold
down a key on your Mac, there'll be a
| | 00:29 | little delay, and then eventually it will
go "x, x, x, x, x" if you're holding down the X,
| | 00:33 | and it will type that multiple times.
| | 00:35 | So what this does is it sets the rate
at which those keys will be repeated.
| | 00:40 | Then there's delay until repeat.
| | 00:41 | So how long will that delay be after you've
typed the first character before the repeat starts?
| | 00:46 | So you can change that with the slider
as well. And then there's the F key option.
| | 00:51 | By default, the special F key features
printed on the key, this is the top row,
| | 00:55 | and you'll see things like brightness,
volume and so on, work when you press the key.
| | 01:00 | But you can change this behavior, so
these things kick in only when you press
| | 01:04 | down on the Fn, key and where that's located
will depend on the kind of keyboard you have.
| | 01:09 | If you have a laptop, it'll be the key
to the far left on the bottom row, if
| | 01:13 | however, you're using some other kind
of keyboard, you may find it up to the
| | 01:17 | right of the main keyboard,
next to the Home button.
| | 01:20 | Then there's the option to "Show
Keyboard & Character Viewers in the menu bar."
| | 01:24 | So I'll enable that.
| | 01:25 | You notice this little icon appears
in the right side of the Menu Bar.
| | 01:29 | So let's look at the Character
Viewer and it looks like this.
| | 01:32 | So what good is this thing?
| | 01:33 | Well suppose that you're working in
some kind of document and you need some
| | 01:36 | special characters, so you really want
this right pointing finger, for example, or
| | 01:40 | you need kind of an odd currency symbol.
| | 01:42 | This is where you pick these things,
you double-click and then they're
| | 01:45 | inserted into your document.
| | 01:46 | Then there's Show Keyboard Viewer, and
you can make that larger by clicking on
| | 01:52 | the green zoom button.
| | 01:54 | Here are the characters
that are on your keyboard.
| | 01:57 | Now, if I press down on the Option key,
those change, showing me where some
| | 02:01 | hidden characters are.
| | 02:03 | I could press Option+Shift and yet here are
more characters, and we'll turn that off.
| | 02:10 | Now, here are modifier keys.
| | 02:13 | This is one of the most important
things that you can do with your Mac, if
| | 02:17 | you're a little clumsy about your typing.
| | 02:19 | Now, I find that I invariably turn
on caps lock when I don't mean to.
| | 02:24 | So I'm typing along in my document
and I make a little mistake, I turn on
| | 02:28 | caps lock, and the next thing I know,
it looks like I'm shouting throughout my
| | 02:32 | text, so you can turn that off so
it does nothing. So choose No Action.
| | 02:38 | Now when you hit the Caps Lock
key, nothing will happen at all.
| | 02:42 | I always turn this off so that it's No
Action, but for now, I'll leave it on in
| | 02:46 | case I need it later on.
| | 02:48 | You can change other Control key
characteristics as well, so the Control key
| | 02:52 | can be the Option key, or the Command key, or
the Caps Lock key, or it can do nothing at all.
| | 02:57 | This is largely for people who are
coming from Windows, who've come to the
| | 03:00 | Mac, and they want to change the arrangement of
these command keys, this is the way to do it.
| | 03:05 | If you have a bluetooth keyboard, just
Set Up Bluetooth Keyboard. At this point
| | 03:10 | you would turn on your keyboard and you'd run
through the process of getting it configured.
| | 03:14 | Now, let's take a look at keyboard shortcuts.
| | 03:17 | There's a lot of
powerful stuff going on in here.
| | 03:20 | The Mac has a lot of keyboard shortcuts and
this is where you can view as well as edit them.
| | 03:25 | So, for example, Mission Control by
default, I would press the Control+up arrow,
| | 03:32 | which I can do now, and there is Mission Control.
| | 03:35 | But I can change that keyboard
shortcut if I like, by clicking on it, and then
| | 03:39 | typing some other kind of shortcut.
| | 03:41 | So let's say I wanted to make that
Control+Option+up arrow, and I can do that as well.
| | 03:47 | Let's change it back.
| | 03:48 | Highlight it, Control+up.
| | 03:50 | Now, if I happen to type a shortcut
that's already in use, I'll see a little
| | 03:54 | yellow triangle indicating
I'm using this somewhere else.
| | 03:58 | So there are a lot of things you can change.
| | 04:00 | You can change your Launchpad & Dock
shortcuts, Mission Control as we saw,
| | 04:05 | Keyboard & Text, your
Screen Shots, your Services.
| | 04:10 | Now, what exactly is a Service?
| | 04:12 | Well, a Service is a little sort of
mini program that runs when you implement
| | 04:17 | the thing, and more often than not,
you're going to look under the Application
| | 04:21 | Menu and you'll see a Services entry.
| | 04:23 | Now, in this case, we don't have any Services.
| | 04:26 | Let me just launch TextEdit.
| | 04:31 | Open a document, now
we'll take a look at Services.
| | 04:36 | So you can see you can perform a
variety of functions based on what you've done
| | 04:41 | in a particular application.
| | 04:44 | The point being that once you've
created services or you have them, you can
| | 04:47 | assign keyboard shortcuts to them.
| | 04:51 | You can change your
Spotlight keyboard shortcuts.
| | 04:53 | You can change those for Accessibility.
| | 04:56 | And here is really the big kahuna,
and this is Application Shortcuts.
| | 05:00 | Within applications, you
have certain keyboard shortcuts.
| | 05:04 | Let's go back to TextEdit again.
| | 05:07 | So here, under File, I see I
have some keyboard shortcuts.
| | 05:10 | There's Command+O for Open, and so on and
so forth, and here more to the side.
| | 05:16 | Now, let's suppose that I wanted to
assign something that doesn't already have
| | 05:20 | a keyboard shortcut.
| | 05:22 | For example, Allow Hyphenation, I'm not
sure why you'd want to do that, but you can.
| | 05:27 | So what I would do here is
click on the plus button.
| | 05:30 | I'm going to choose an application,
TextEdit, for example, then I'll type the
| | 05:35 | name of the command.
| | 05:37 | So again, let's go back here and
make sure that we know what it is.
| | 05:41 | It's Allow Hyphenation, and then I'll
assign a keyboard shortcut, and let's make
| | 05:46 | this Control+Option+H. I click on Add.
| | 05:51 | It shows it here, and here it is here.
| | 05:56 | Allow Hyphenation is now Control+Option+H. So
this is a very handy thing to be able to
| | 06:02 | do, if you like using keyboard
shortcuts and the particular application you're
| | 06:06 | using doesn't support a favorite shortcut.
| | 06:10 | So again, click plus,
choose the application you want.
| | 06:14 | Enter the exact name of the command
and then enter a keyboard shortcut.
| | 06:19 | I can also edit that here as well.
| | 06:20 | So I'll click on it, highlight it,
| | 06:22 | enter a new shortcut, and I can do that.
| | 06:24 | In this case, I don't really need that
shortcut, so I'm going to click on the
| | 06:28 | minus button and get rid of it.
| | 06:30 | Now, if you really like using your
keyboard a lot, you can march through menus
| | 06:33 | and commands using the keyboard's arrow keys.
| | 06:37 | So you just turn on All controls,
| | 06:40 | click on a menu, and I'm using the Tab
key now, but I can move through these
| | 06:46 | menus using the arrow keys.
| | 06:48 | Actually, I'm pressing the arrow keys now.
| | 06:50 | Then once you want to choose a command,
use up or down arrow key to select the
| | 06:56 | command, and to invoke that command,
just press the return key, and there you go.
| | 07:01 | Now, let's take a look at Mouse.
| | 07:04 | As I talked about when setting up the
Mac initially, Apple now has something
| | 07:09 | called the natural scroll direction,
which, to those of us who've been using
| | 07:13 | Macs for a long time, is
completely unnatural because it's the opposite
| | 07:16 | direction that we're used to.
| | 07:17 | On a trackpad, it makes some sense.
| | 07:20 | On a scroll wheel, it makes
absolutely no sense whatsoever.
| | 07:23 | So, as I have done, I would
recommend turning that off.
| | 07:27 | You can change your tracking speed,
and that means, as you move your mouse
| | 07:31 | around, how quickly is
that cursor going to move?
| | 07:33 | How fast will your double-click be?
| | 07:35 | How quickly will you scroll using
either the scroll wheel or a scroll ball,
| | 07:40 | depending on what kind of mouse you have.
| | 07:42 | In this area here, you may see different
options, depending on the kind of mouse you have.
| | 07:47 | You can change the function of the
ball as well as what happens when you
| | 07:50 | click on the thing.
| | 07:52 | Primary Button is a left click.
| | 07:54 | Secondary Button is a right click, but
you can change what that does when you
| | 07:58 | press on that part of the mouse. And
then there are little side buttons, you can
| | 08:02 | change their behavior as well.
| | 08:04 | If you have a bluetooth mouse, click
on Set Up Bluetooth Mouse and you'll be
| | 08:08 | walked through the procedure of
setting it up. And on to Trackpad.
| | 08:12 | Now, I have a magic trackpad that's
linked with this computer, and so, I see the
| | 08:17 | magic trackpad options.
| | 08:19 | Apple has been kind enough to show you what
all their gestures do through these movies here.
| | 08:26 | So all you have to do is select the
gesture and a little movie will pop up and
| | 08:30 | show you what to do to make that gesture work.
| | 08:34 | So here's a secondary click, or a right click.
| | 08:37 | So, two fingers, press down, you get a
contextual menu and I could show you here.
| | 08:42 | So on my trackpad, I press down with
two fingers and I get my contextual menu.
| | 08:48 | If you want to look something up in the
dictionary, highlight, press down with
| | 08:51 | three. There's three finger drag, and
as you can see, you can move a picture
| | 08:56 | around, scroll and zoom.
| | 09:00 | Here are the gestures here.
| | 09:02 | I'm not going to walk you through all
of these, so you can just simply come in
| | 09:04 | here, take a look and see what they do,
and then they have more gestures here.
| | 09:12 | Again, if you have a bluetooth
trackpad, select that, it will look around
| | 09:17 | for any trackpad that you've turned
on, and then you can make the link, and
| | 09:23 | we'll click on Done.
| | 09:27 | If you want to know how much battery is left,
here is your battery level, at the bottom.
| | 09:33 | And that covers the many ways that you can
touch your Mac to bend it to your will.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Examining the basic system preferences| 00:00 | We'll now visit some of the basic
preferences found in the System section of
| | 00:04 | System Preferences, and that would
be Date & Time and Startup Disk.
| | 00:10 | So here's Date & Time in the System section.
| | 00:12 | This is pretty straightforward.
| | 00:14 | Here's where you can set the date and time.
| | 00:17 | Now, by default, it will be set
automatically, and you have a few servers that
| | 00:21 | you can choose from based
on where you're located.
| | 00:23 | If you turn this off, then you have the
option to manually change the date and time.
| | 00:29 | I'll leave that on.
| | 00:33 | You can change the format of date and
time, by clicking on the Open Language &
| | 00:37 | Text button, and then choosing Region,
and this is something we'll look at later.
| | 00:44 | Then there's Time Zone.
| | 00:45 | This, too, is very straightforward.
| | 00:48 | You can set your Time Zone
automatically using current location, or you can
| | 00:51 | simply click where you are, if you're in
the East Coast, for example, we're not,
| | 00:56 | we're in the West Coast.
| | 00:58 | And you could also choose a major city from the
list that pops up here or you can type one in.
| | 01:03 | And then there's Clock, so you can show the
date and time in the Menu Bar and that
| | 01:09 | could either be digital or analog.
| | 01:11 | In time, you could display the time
in seconds, Flash the time separator,
| | 01:18 | you can use a 24-hour clock. And if
you're not using this 24-hour clock, you
| | 01:23 | can show AM and PM.
| | 01:26 | You could show the day of the week, or I can
turn that off, or you can show the longer date.
| | 01:33 | If you like, the Mac will tell you
the time, and we're going to talk about
| | 01:38 | Voice in another movie.
| | 01:40 | Turn that off so you won't be distracted.
| | 01:43 | Then let's take a look at Startup Disk.
| | 01:45 | The Startup Disk preference is where you
choose the volume from which your Mac will boot.
| | 01:51 | Now, if you only have one bootable hard
drive, as we do on this particular Mac,
| | 01:56 | it won't show you anything else, but
you may have more than one disk or bootable
| | 02:00 | volume, and if so, this is
where you would choose it.
| | 02:03 | You can also enable Target Disk Mode, so
you could string a Thunderbolt, if your
| | 02:07 | Mac supports it, or a
FireWire cable between two Macs.
| | 02:11 | So one in disk mode will appear as an
external hard drive, and the way you do
| | 02:16 | that is when you restart that Mac, you
hold down the T key on your keyboard.
| | 02:20 | It will launch and it will show the
FireWire symbol, or the Thunderbolt symbol,
| | 02:25 | depending on which kind of Mac you have.
| | 02:27 | At that point, the other Mac will see
it as an external hard drive that you can
| | 02:31 | access and do things with.
| | 02:32 | This is useful for installing stuff on
another Mac or when you can't boot that
| | 02:37 | other Mac and you need to troubleshoot it.
| | 02:39 | And that covers the basic
preferences in the System area.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
5. Advanced System PreferencesOrganizing workspaces with Mission Control| 00:00 | We're going to return to the
Personal System Preferences to take a look
| | 00:03 | at Mission Control,
| | 00:04 | a navigation feature that was
introduced with Mac OS X Lion, but before we do,
| | 00:09 | let me show you what Mission Control does.
| | 00:12 | This is the Mission Control interface.
| | 00:15 | Mission Control is a way for you to have
separate work environments or spaces on your Mac.
| | 00:20 | So on a Mac with a trackpad, you just
swipe up with three fingers to expose
| | 00:24 | Mission Control and to make it go away,
I'll take those three fingers and I'll
| | 00:28 | swipe down, so it's gone.
| | 00:30 | Swipe three fingers up and here it is,
or if you're using a keyboard, hold down
| | 00:34 | the Control key and press the up arrow, and that
gives you Mission Control, and make it disappear,
| | 00:38 | The Control key, arrow key down.
| | 00:40 | So the main screen shrinks down to the
smaller screen and above the screen, you
| | 00:45 | see two small windows.
| | 00:47 | One represents the screen you're
currently working with, and the other is the
| | 00:51 | Dashboard environment, which contains
small applications called Widgets for
| | 00:55 | doing things like checking
the weather, time, and stock.
| | 00:58 | So you can switch
environments by simply clicking on one.
| | 01:02 | So if I want to go to the Dashboard
environment, I click on Dashboard, and here it is.
| | 01:06 | Swipe up with three fingers, I can
go back to my desktop by clicking on
| | 01:10 | the Desktop window.
| | 01:12 | If you have a trackpad, you can simply
swipe three fingers to the left, I'm in
| | 01:16 | the Dashboard environment,
| | 01:17 | to return, swipe three fingers to the
right, and here is Mission Control again.
| | 01:21 | You can create additional spaces just
by moving your cursor to the top right
| | 01:27 | corner and clicking on the plus button.
| | 01:31 | I'll click on that Desktop 2, and
now I have a new environment here.
| | 01:36 | If you're going to create additional
spaces, it helps to change the look of
| | 01:39 | them, so you can tell
which environment you're in.
| | 01:41 | One way to do that is to
go to System Preferences.
| | 01:44 | Choose Desktop & Screen Saver, and
then change the background color.
| | 01:48 | So in this case, I'll change
this to Solid Kelp. Close that.
| | 01:52 | Now, I invoke Mission Control and note,
Desktop 1 is blue, and Desktop 2 is green.
| | 01:59 | So I can tell at a glance which one I'm in.
| | 02:02 | So what good is this exactly?
| | 02:04 | Well, let's move to Desktop 2.
| | 02:06 | I'll click and hold on the Safari icon,
choose Options, and then I will assign
| | 02:12 | Safari to This Desktop only,
then I'll launch Safari.
| | 02:18 | So here's Safari, I'll go to Mission Control.
| | 02:21 | Now you notice Safari is in
the second desktop environment.
| | 02:25 | If I go back to the first desktop
environment, there's nothing here at all.
| | 02:29 | Let's assign the Calendar to
the first desktop environment.
| | 02:34 | I'll launch Calendar and here's my Calendar.
| | 02:38 | Back to Mission Control, second
desktop environment has Safari.
| | 02:42 | First desktop environment
has Calendar. Let's quit that.
| | 02:46 | I'm going to swipe over, so I'm in my
second environment and I'm going to launch
| | 02:50 | Calendar, and watch what happens.
| | 02:52 | I switched back to my first desktop environment.
| | 02:55 | So what's the point of all this?
| | 02:57 | Well, let's suppose that you have a group
of tasks that you like to perform together.
| | 03:02 | So, for example, I would use Calendar,
I'd use Contacts, and I would use Mail all
| | 03:06 | within the same desktop environment.
| | 03:09 | In my second environment, maybe I
want to work with Safari and iPhoto, for
| | 03:14 | example, because I want to take some
of the images in iPhoto and I want to
| | 03:18 | upload them to a website through my browser.
| | 03:20 | If I assign applications to particular
desktop environments, it makes it very
| | 03:25 | easy for me to work in a particular set
of tasks and then change the environment
| | 03:30 | and then work in a different set of tasks.
| | 03:32 | It's particularly helpful if you're using
a laptop with a limited amount of space.
| | 03:37 | For example, if you have a MacBook Air,
it can be really easy to have too many
| | 03:41 | windows, so you can't see what you're
doing, but if you create multiple desktop
| | 03:45 | environments, when you do that, it's
much easier to confine things so that you
| | 03:50 | can work in a less cluttered environment.
| | 03:51 | Now, there's one other thing I need
to tell you about Mission Control.
| | 03:55 | Let's open iPhoto, and this isn't
assigned to any particular environment at all,
| | 04:00 | so it's going to open in
the current environment.
| | 04:03 | I will then click on the
fullscreen button in the top right corner.
| | 04:08 | Now let's see what Mission Control looks like.
| | 04:10 | Note that we now have an
additional environment, and that is iPhoto.
| | 04:15 | So whenever you flip an application
into fullscreen mode, it will become a
| | 04:19 | separate environment.
| | 04:20 | However, once you close it,
it stops being an environment.
| | 04:24 | So how do you close out these environments?
| | 04:26 | Well, simply hold on the Option key, you'll
see that an X appears above an environment.
| | 04:32 | So if I want to close Desktop 2,
it's gone, but what happens to the
| | 04:37 | application that was there?
| | 04:38 | Well, it goes to my main
environment. Here's Safari.
| | 04:41 | So I don't lose my work, the
applications don't quit, they simply move to
| | 04:45 | another environment.
| | 04:46 | Let's go back to iPhoto.
| | 04:49 | I'll get out of fullscreen mode.
| | 04:52 | Look at Mission Control, and it too has
moved to the main environment, because
| | 04:57 | I'm no longer using it in fullscreen mode.
| | 05:00 | Let's take one more look at its preference.
| | 05:03 | So you can use Dashboard as a space.
| | 05:09 | I can choose not to do that, and when
I swipe to the left, nothing happens.
| | 05:15 | You can choose how your spaces are
arranged, so the most recently used one is
| | 05:20 | going to move to the left. And the other
two options have to do with how windows
| | 05:24 | are dealt with with applications.
| | 05:26 | Here's where you can change your
shortcuts, and again you have Hot Corners.
| | 05:31 | So if you don't feel like swiping or
pressing a keyboard shortcut, just drag
| | 05:35 | your cursor down to one of the corners
and you can invoke Mission Control that
| | 05:38 | way. And then click on the
environment you want, and back it comes.
| | 05:43 | And that's Mission Control and its
preferences, a useful way to organize your
| | 05:47 | work and play.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Modifying Language & Text settings| 00:00 | Mountain Lion is a multi-lingual
operating system. As such, it provides you
| | 00:04 | ways to not only change the language it uses,
but also the formatting for time and dates.
| | 00:09 | We'll look at just what this
powerful System Preference can do now.
| | 00:13 | Here's Language & Text, and
you see there are four tabs.
| | 00:16 | The Language tab is where you
choose the language you want to use.
| | 00:19 | By default, it's the language
you chose when you set up your Mac.
| | 00:23 | You can rearrange the order
of languages by dragging them.
| | 00:26 | For example, if I wanted my Mac to be
French, I drag this to the top then I
| | 00:32 | would restart and all my menus
would change to French. And because
| | 00:36 | applications are also multi-lingual,
all my applications would be in the
| | 00:39 | language that I chose.
| | 00:41 | Major languages appear here, but if
you'd like to choose a less-used language,
| | 00:45 | just click on Edit List and you'll see
there's a long list of languages that you
| | 00:50 | can choose, as well as
variations within certain languages.
| | 00:55 | You can also change the order for
sorted lists, Standard or you can choose an
| | 00:59 | order based on the language.
| | 01:01 | Mountain Lion will autoformat certain
symbols, so a true copyright symbol will
| | 01:07 | appear when you type ©, and then you'll
| | 01:12 | see the real copyright symbol instead of
sort of this fake one that you've made.
| | 01:15 | It can also do fractions.
| | 01:17 | These are off by default, but if you
want a fraction to appear as a superscript
| | 01:21 | or a subscript, you click that option
and you'll have the results you desire.
| | 01:25 | You can also add your own shortcut.
| | 01:27 | For example, I'll click on plus, and I
will say that "TTFN" will be replaced
| | 01:35 | with "Tata for now."
| | 01:38 | Press return, so I got a TextEdit, TTFN, press
space, and it auto expands to be "Tata for now."
| | 01:49 | If you like someone sitting over your
shoulder and telling you how to correct
| | 01:52 | your spelling, you can turn
that on, and it's on by default.
| | 01:56 | As you're typing along, you
misspell something that's a fairly common
| | 01:59 | misspelling, the Mac will make the
corrections for you, and you can choose what
| | 02:04 | spelling you want to use, Automatic by
Language, so if you happen to be in the
| | 02:08 | U.S. using a U.S. Mac, but you're
Australian and you want to spell "color"
| | 02:12 | C-O-L-O-U-R and instead you typed C-O-L-O-R,
it will automatically change it to
| | 02:18 | the other spelling, or the opposite way around.
| | 02:22 | You could choose how your
Word Breaks are handled.
| | 02:25 | You can ask that all quotes be smart
quotes or you can change how the quoting
| | 02:28 | style is done based on the language you're
using, and the same thing with single quotes.
| | 02:35 | Region tab is where you choose and tweak
the formatting to accompany your language.
| | 02:40 | So if you choose a different Region,
you'll see that the date, times, and numbers
| | 02:45 | formatting changes as well.
| | 02:47 | So if I choose the United Kingdom,
time changes and their number in
| | 02:51 | currency changes as well.
| | 02:53 | So again, these are the major regions,
but you can show all regions, and you
| | 02:57 | have a much larger list.
| | 03:01 | If you like, you can customize these fields.
| | 03:03 | So dates, for example, you can choose
a short, medium, long or full, and then
| | 03:08 | you can choose exactly how these things are
going to be named. And then there's Input Sources.
| | 03:14 | In the Input Sources tab, you cannot
only choose keyboard layouts by enabling
| | 03:19 | languages and then choosing them from
the languages menu, but you can also
| | 03:22 | enable the keyboard and character viewer
layouts, which I showed you in another movie.
| | 03:27 | If you like, you can choose a different
input source based on your application,
| | 03:32 | by changing this option here,
so Allow a different one for each document.
| | 03:37 | So for example, if I happen to be multi-lingual,
by default, I have the United
| | 03:42 | States keyboard layout enabled, but if
I also wanted to have Arabic, you notice
| | 03:47 | this little menu appears up in
the Menu bar and I can choose a different
| | 03:51 | layout here, so I can use U.S., or if I
want, I can switch to Arabic and the flag
| | 03:56 | will change to reflect that,
and we'll turn that off here.
| | 03:59 | That covers all you need to know about
the Language & Text System Preference.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Optimizing Security & Privacy settings| 00:00 | The Mac OS is one of the most
secure computer operating systems around.
| | 00:04 | The Security & Privacy system
preference helps you maintain your Mac security
| | 00:09 | when someone is using it.
| | 00:10 | You can additionally configure what
internet services you will and won't allow,
| | 00:14 | as well as control applications that ask
for your Mac's location. So let's take a look.
| | 00:19 | Go to System Preferences and click on
Security & Privacy, and we'll look at the General tab.
| | 00:26 | The General tab is for protecting your Mac
from people who have physical access to it.
| | 00:31 | Now, in order to use this, we'll
click the Lock icon and then I'll enter my
| | 00:35 | password so that I can
configure this system preference.
| | 00:37 | Now, if I like, I can change my
password or my log in account.
| | 00:42 | However, to do this, I
must know the old password.
| | 00:45 | If you've forgotten your old
password, you cannot reset it from within
| | 00:50 | this system preference.
| | 00:52 | So, you type in your old password, you
type in your new password, you verify,
| | 00:55 | and if you like, you can type in a
hint just as you did when you first
| | 00:58 | configured your Mac.
| | 01:00 | You have the option to require a
password, and that would be immediately after it
| | 01:05 | goes to sleep or the screen saver kicks in.
| | 01:08 | So, this is a good thing to do.
| | 01:10 | If you happen to be at an office or
somewhere where people have access to your
| | 01:14 | Macintosh, and you get up and you walk
away, when the Mac goes to sleep or the
| | 01:19 | screen saver kicks in, in order to get
access to that Mac, you would press on a
| | 01:23 | key on the keyboard and then you
would be required to enter the password.
| | 01:27 | You can also change that interval, so
it can be five seconds, a minute, and
| | 01:31 | so on, and so forth.
| | 01:32 | You can set a lock message
when your screen is locked.
| | 01:36 | You can also disable automatic logins.
| | 01:39 | This is generally a good idea if
other people who have access to your Mac.
| | 01:42 | For example, you've been
using your Mac and you log out.
| | 01:46 | If you have automatic login set up,
they can immediately get to it and they can
| | 01:52 | do anything they like on the computer
and then they can put it back to sleep or
| | 01:56 | they can log out again.
| | 01:57 | If you disable automatic login, they
have to have your password to get in.
| | 02:01 | We've already covered Gatekeeper and
again here are the Gatekeeper settings.
| | 02:05 | Now, let's take a look at the Advanced
button. So if you happen to forget to put
| | 02:09 | it to sleep, or if you've configured
your screen saver so that it kicks in after
| | 02:13 | 60 minutes instead of just a couple of
minutes, your Mac can automatically log
| | 02:18 | out after a certain number of minutes.
| | 02:20 | You saw that when we first started
configuring this that I had to unlock this
| | 02:24 | system preference in order to use it.
| | 02:27 | You can be even more stern and
require an administrator's password to
| | 02:31 | access locked preferences.
| | 02:33 | So, this would apply not only to
this preference but lots of other
| | 02:36 | preferences as well.
| | 02:37 | And there's the option to
automatically update safe downloads list.
| | 02:42 | This is a list that comes from Apple
that works with Safari to see what's safe
| | 02:46 | to automatically download. And I
click on OK to get rid of that.
| | 02:51 | You can encrypt your disk with FileVault.
| | 02:53 | This ensures that if someone does get
hold of your Mac, they can't access its
| | 02:57 | data without your login
password or the recovery key.
| | 03:01 | Now, this all sounds like a good idea,
but if you forget your FileVault password
| | 03:06 | or your administrator's password, your
data is toast because its encrypted and
| | 03:11 | you can't unlock it. And then the Firewall tab.
| | 03:15 | The Mac allows common internet
connections, and that would be web browsers and
| | 03:19 | email connections, for example.
| | 03:20 | But you could tell it not to by
configuring the built-in Firewall.
| | 03:24 | So I can turn on the Firewall
and it will prevent certain things.
| | 03:28 | If I then click on Firewall Options, I
can choose the kinds of things that I'm
| | 03:33 | going to allow it to block.
| | 03:36 | If I want to completely shut down the
Mac from outside access, I can turn on
| | 03:39 | Block All Incoming Connections.
However, that makes my Mac less useful.
| | 03:45 | And then, Enable stealth mode, this is
an interesting option. If you don't want
| | 03:49 | people to be able to see that your Mac
is on the internet, using something like a
| | 03:54 | ping tool, you can enable Stealth Mode.
| | 03:57 | And basically, this makes your Mac
invisible to other computers on the internet
| | 04:01 | and also on your local network.
| | 04:04 | You can still do lots of things
with it, but it doesn't show up.
| | 04:07 | Now, Apple's Firewall is a very broad tool.
| | 04:11 | So, if you turn it on, unauthorized
applications aren't allowed to receive
| | 04:15 | internet connections.
| | 04:17 | As I said, you can tweak it
a little bit, but not a lot.
| | 04:20 | I'm going to turn it off for now.
| | 04:22 | And generally, I don't turn on the
Firewall and the reason I don't is
| | 04:26 | because it is so broad.
| | 04:27 | However, you can find other tools that
let you tweak it to a much greater degree.
| | 04:31 | So, for example, there's one called
NoobProof, and this is by Hanynet, that let's
| | 04:36 | you really get in and tweak a lot
of the settings of the Firewall.
| | 04:41 | And then, finally, there's the
Privacy tab. This has been expanded quite a
| | 04:45 | bit with Mountain Lion.
| | 04:47 | So the first option is Location Service.
| | 04:50 | Now we've turned this on because an
application requested access, but -- and
| | 04:55 | if an application has requested access for
location, its name will appear in this area.
| | 05:01 | If you like, you can then disable it
simply by unchecking the check box next to it.
| | 05:08 | Next is Contacts. If an application
under Mountain Lion would like to access
| | 05:12 | your contacts, it will
ask for permission to do so.
| | 05:15 | Most of the time, you say yes because
you need whatever that feature is that
| | 05:19 | requires your contacts.
| | 05:20 | But at some point, you may decide, No
I don't want you to be able to access
| | 05:24 | my contacts anymore.
| | 05:25 | So you would go into Security &
Privacy and click on Privacy, select Contacts,
| | 05:30 | and then at that point, you can
uncheck any applications that you've granted
| | 05:33 | contacts to that you no
longer want to grant that access.
| | 05:37 | And finally, there's the
Diagnostics & Usage option.
| | 05:41 | If you like, you can choose to send
diagnostic and usage data to Apple.
| | 05:45 | This is anonymous, so you won't be identified,
but it's up to you if want to do it or not.
| | 05:51 | So what kind of information might this contain?
| | 05:53 | Well it might contain things like location data.
| | 05:55 | So, for example, you've taken your
laptop on the road, you're a passenger in a
| | 05:59 | car, you're using it, it checks to
see where you've travelled and maybe it
| | 06:03 | helps them develop their networks services
and their internet services as they go along.
| | 06:08 | The Mac OS is very secure, but that
doesn't mean that you can't tweak it to
| | 06:12 | a greater extent using the settings
you find in the Security & Privacy
| | 06:16 | Sytem Preference.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Getting notifications| 00:00 | Click on the far right of your
Mac's menu bar and you see the
| | 00:04 | Notification Center.
| | 00:05 | This is where you see alerts
regarding things like received email, upcoming
| | 00:09 | events, Facebook and Twitter
notifications, and Game Center requests.
| | 00:13 | Working with the notifications is
pretty easy, you just click on the
| | 00:17 | notification and the associated
application will launch and you can do what you like.
| | 00:21 | So, for example, I can click on this
Lunch with boss notification, the
| | 00:26 | Calendar application
launches, and it shows me that event.
| | 00:31 | Or I can click on a mail message, Mail
launches, and it shows me the contents of that message.
| | 00:38 | It's also with the Notification Center
that you can tweet and create Facebook
| | 00:42 | posts, and you find these
options at the top of the pane.
| | 00:46 | So, for example, if I click on
Click to Tweet, a message window appears,
| | 00:53 | and then click on Send.
| | 00:55 | If you like, you could add location.
| | 00:57 | In this case, I'll cancel.
| | 00:59 | And then there's Facebook,
and the same idea there.
| | 01:02 | If you want to post something on
Facebook, enter your text, click Post, and
| | 01:06 | again, you can add your location or you can
choose not to, and I will cancel that as well.
| | 01:12 | Scroll up a bit more and you can choose
to turn off Alerts and Banners, simply
| | 01:17 | by clicking that to off, and all alerts
and banners will be off until tomorrow, at
| | 01:22 | which point this will
automatically be turned on.
| | 01:25 | Now, why would you want to do this?
| | 01:26 | Well, perhaps it's late at night and
you keep your Mac running, every so often,
| | 01:30 | one of these alerts may sound an alert sound.
| | 01:32 | If the computer happens to be in your
bedroom at the same time, you don't want
| | 01:36 | to hear these things go off, so turn it off.
| | 01:40 | Now let's take a look at
Notifications in System Preferences.
| | 01:45 | I showed you the Twitter and
Facebook buttons, if you don't want those to
| | 01:48 | show, simply click that off and
you'll see that that they disappear from
| | 01:53 | Notification Center.
| | 01:55 | I find them handy so I'm going to leave them on.
| | 01:58 | Let's take a look at one of the
applications that will send alerts.
| | 02:01 | You see that you have three options here.
| | 02:03 | You could have no alerts, whatsoever.
| | 02:06 | So that means, if I receive a
calendar event or an alarm goes off for a
| | 02:10 | calender, nothing happens.
| | 02:12 | Next option is a banner, and
the final one is an alert.
| | 02:15 | Now let's see one of these in action.
| | 02:18 | Currently, I have Mail configured so that I
see a banner, but let's change that to an alert.
| | 02:24 | My producer, Ian, has just sent me a
message from mail and because this is an
| | 02:28 | alert, I have to respond to it.
| | 02:30 | I can close it, or if I choose Open, mail
opens and it shows me the contents of the message.
| | 02:38 | You noticed that once I clicked one of
those buttons, that notification went away.
| | 02:43 | Now, if instead, I had chosen banners,
what I would see is a little banner that
| | 02:47 | showed up, it would sit there for a few
seconds and then it would disappear, but
| | 02:51 | it would still be in Notification Center.
| | 02:54 | Because I took a look at Ian's message,
it is no longer in Notification Center.
| | 02:58 | Now, also within Notification Center,
you can choose the number of recent items
| | 03:02 | you see from 1, 5, 10, or 20.
| | 03:06 | You can see a badge app icon.
| | 03:08 | So, for example here in Mail, it
indicates that I have 19 unread messages.
| | 03:14 | I don't have to have that show, so if I
turn badge app icon off, I don't see any
| | 03:19 | of those notifications there.
| | 03:20 | And I can choose to either play
a sound or not play a sound when
| | 03:25 | receiving notifications.
| | 03:27 | I can choose how things are
sorted in Notification Center.
| | 03:30 | So manually means that I can take
reminders and I can have them appear higher up
| | 03:36 | the list. Calendars, I can move
those down if I like. Or, by time.
| | 03:41 | If you sort them this way, the most
recent notification will appear at the top
| | 03:45 | of the Notification Center and
less recent ones appear below it.
| | 03:50 | If you don't want things to appear in
Notification Center, you can simply
| | 03:53 | grab them and drag them down to Not in
Notification Center, then they will not appear there.
| | 03:59 | You may receive a notification that there
are updates available in the Mac App Store.
| | 04:04 | There doesn't seem to be a way to
remove that notification as if you click
| | 04:08 | either one of the buttons that appear,
the Mac App Store application will open.
| | 04:13 | To remove it, all you have to do is
click and drag on it and drag it to the
| | 04:18 | right and it will disappear.
| | 04:20 | Unfortunately, a few minutes
later, it will come back again.
| | 04:24 | So to make the thing go away all
together, simply click one of the buttons, the
| | 04:27 | Mac App Store will launch and then you
can update your software and that will be
| | 04:31 | the end of it, until there's
another update available to you.
| | 04:35 | And that's Notification
Center and its preferences.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Configuring displays and AirPlay| 00:00 | Here we are in the Display System Preference .
| | 00:02 | This particular computer is a MacBook
Air with an external display hooked up to
| | 00:06 | it, and of course, yours may
look a bit different than mine.
| | 00:10 | Now, as I mentioned, you can attach
more than one monitor to your Mac, or a
| | 00:14 | projector, or in some cases,
an HDTV with an HDMI port.
| | 00:18 | When you do that, you're
going to see this arrangement tab.
| | 00:22 | Click on that arrangement tab and you'll
see the number of monitors you have here.
| | 00:26 | If you choose to mirror displays, and
that means having the same image on each
| | 00:31 | display, they'll be placed on
top of each other as you see here.
| | 00:35 | If you uncheck this option, the two of
them will go side by side and you can
| | 00:39 | move the images around.
| | 00:41 | So, for example, in a two-monitor setup
you may have one on the left and one
| | 00:45 | on the right, you want to make sure
that that left monitor appears that way in
| | 00:49 | this display and the right
monitor appears to its right.
| | 00:52 | When you have these multiple
displays, you'll have a different display
| | 00:55 | window for each display.
| | 00:58 | Heres one for an HP display, and here's one
for the native display on this MacBook Air.
| | 01:04 | Within these, you can change the
resolution of each display, and you can
| | 01:08 | also change the color.
| | 01:10 | This is helpful because, oftentimes,
when you have two displays, you want
| | 01:14 | them to look similar.
| | 01:15 | And in the case of different
manufacturers, you may have to tweak those color
| | 01:19 | settings a little bit.
| | 01:20 | Now, some newer Mac laptops
include this AirPlay Mirroring option.
| | 01:25 | When you click on this, any Apple TVs
on your local network will appear, and I
| | 01:30 | have one here, so I can select Apple TV.
| | 01:32 | Again, I'm not actually going to
enable it because it will change the
| | 01:36 | resolution on our display now.
| | 01:38 | When you choose this, the picture that's
displayed on your Mac will be projected
| | 01:42 | wirelessly to that Apple
TV, and what good is this?
| | 01:45 | Well, to begin with, it's a nice
option for doing presentations to an HDTV if
| | 01:51 | you do that sort of thing for your business.
| | 01:53 | But it's also great for home use and
that AirPlay Mirroring will display
| | 01:58 | everything on your Mac screen, and
that includes things like streaming movie
| | 02:02 | and TV services that you can access through
a Mac's web browser but not on an Apple TV.
| | 02:08 | Through AirPlay Mirroring, you basically bring
a rich multimedia experience to a television.
| | 02:14 | And that's single, dual-monitor, and
Apple TV configuration within the
| | 02:18 | Display System Preference.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using Energy Saver| 00:00 | Over the years, Apple has made
efforts to produce devices that are more
| | 00:04 | energy efficient, but the energy
efficiency of your Mac is only as good as
| | 00:08 | the energy settings you use.
| | 00:10 | We look at configuring those settings
now in the Energy Saver System Preference.
| | 00:15 | So back up to System
Preferences, and I select Energy Saver.
| | 00:20 | What you see in the Energy Saver tab
depends on the kind of Mac you're using.
| | 00:25 | If you have a desktop Mac, you may see
only one setting because it doesn't use
| | 00:29 | battery power, instead it's
always on the power adapter.
| | 00:33 | On laptops, however, you'll see
settings for both battery and power adapter.
| | 00:38 | You configure each separately because
with a battery, you want to be more
| | 00:42 | miserly with the power, and not
so much when the Mac's plugged in.
| | 00:46 | So let's take a look at the options.
| | 00:48 | On my laptop, we're going to look at Battery.
| | 00:50 | The first one on this particular
MacBook Pro that we're using, it has two
| | 00:55 | graphic subsystems. One uses a lot of
power because it's using the big graphics chip.
| | 01:01 | It can also use an integrated graphics
chip, and that takes less power, so I can
| | 01:06 | configure it to automatically
switch depending on the power needs.
| | 01:10 | If I go to Power Adapter, I
may choose to turn that off.
| | 01:14 | In that case, it always uses
the high performance graphics.
| | 01:19 | And we'll flip that back on
for now and go back to Battery.
| | 01:22 | You see a couple of sliders here, one is
Computer sleep and the other one is Display sleep.
| | 01:28 | So, when your computer goes
to sleep, it uses less power.
| | 01:31 | So again, when you're on battery, you
want that to happen more quickly than you
| | 01:35 | would with a power adapter.
| | 01:36 | So, in this case, I've got
it set to about 10 minutes.
| | 01:41 | I can change that if I want.
| | 01:42 | I can make it go to sleep right away
but it does make your computer hard to use,
| | 01:46 | and it can go on up to never or three hours.
| | 01:50 | Now note, this will only kick in if
you're not doing something with your computer.
| | 01:55 | So as long as I'm typing and doing
things with my computer, it won't go to
| | 01:58 | sleep, but if I take a break and
do nothing with it, then it will.
| | 02:03 | As you can see, your Mac tries to take
care of you in terms of energy savings,
| | 02:08 | so if you set a setting that's pretty
high and leave it there, you'll see a
| | 02:12 | little warning saying, by the way,
if you choose this, this is going to use
| | 02:15 | more energy and you may run
out of your battery power sooner.
| | 02:18 | In this case, i'll say,
Yep, that's fine, go ahead.
| | 02:21 | It's possible you'll be involved in
some kind of routine where you need your
| | 02:25 | computer running but you don't
need the display to be asleep.
| | 02:28 | For example, you're downloading a
huge file that you know is going to take
| | 02:31 | about an hour and a half.
| | 02:33 | Well you want to keep your computer
awake, in this case, I'd want to go up to,
| | 02:37 | say, an hour and 56 minutes, but I
don't need my display to be on at the same
| | 02:43 | time, so I can set that very low.
| | 02:44 | It can be down to a minute,
six minutes, whatever.
| | 02:47 | At that point, the display goes to sleep,
but the computer continues to operate
| | 02:51 | and it finishes that job.
| | 02:55 | You can also choose to put your
hard drive to sleep when possible.
| | 02:58 | If your hard drive is
awake, it's using more power.
| | 03:01 | Also, when you're on battery power,
you can slightly dim the display.
| | 03:06 | At the bottom, when you choose
battery, you see a battery read out.
| | 03:09 | It tells us that the battery is charged.
| | 03:11 | If you want to go back to the recommended
settings, just click on Restore Defaults.
| | 03:16 | If you'd like to see how much power you
have left on your battery, enable Show
| | 03:21 | Battery Status in menu bar, and here it is.
| | 03:24 | This icon indicates that it's plugged in.
| | 03:26 | Let me unplug it and I'll
show you what that looks like.
| | 03:30 | I've just unplugged the power, and you
see that it still got a fair amount of
| | 03:33 | power, indicated by the black.
| | 03:36 | If you click and hold on that, it will
do some calculations and it will make its
| | 03:40 | best guess of how much power remains.
| | 03:43 | You can also choose to show percentage,
so right now, I have 100%, over time
| | 03:48 | that will decrease. And we
can turn off that display.
| | 03:53 | Then there's Power Adapter,
let's restore the defaults.
| | 03:57 | You notice that with power adapter,
you have more time, so the computer will
| | 04:00 | stay awake longer and the display will
stay awake longer, as well, same idea
| | 04:05 | here, hard drives. Wake for
network access is different.
| | 04:09 | The difference here is that if you have
your Mac plugged in, it's gone to sleep
| | 04:13 | on its own or you've put it to sleep, and it
receives some kind of network access call.
| | 04:18 | For example, you have another Mac on
your network and it wants to access some
| | 04:23 | files that are on your hard drive, it
will wake up to do that so that you can
| | 04:27 | get that stuff and then copy it over,
at which point, it will follow these
| | 04:31 | settings again and then go back to sleep.
| | 04:33 | One other thing you can do here is you
can schedule this, so that you can ask
| | 04:38 | your Mac to wake up or start up at a
particular time, either every day, a
| | 04:44 | particular day, weekends, or week days.
| | 04:48 | You can also choose what
time that's going to happen.
| | 04:52 | So, let's say I want my Mac to start
up at six, will download my email, it
| | 04:56 | will update my calendar events, and
so when I sit down at the computer at
| | 05:00 | seven, it's ready to go.
| | 05:02 | And you can also schedule sleeping, or
you can have it restart or shut down at
| | 05:07 | particular times of the day. Very
convenient, but I will say, OK and not have
| | 05:12 | it scheduled for now.
| | 05:13 | Then there's one little hidden treat
and it requires that we turn on Show
| | 05:18 | Battery Status in menu bar one more time.
| | 05:21 | Hold on the Option key and click on
that battery icon, and it will tell you the
| | 05:25 | condition of your battery.
| | 05:27 | So, if you've had your laptop for a
while and it seems to lose power pretty
| | 05:32 | quickly when on battery power, there
maybe something wrong with the battery.
| | 05:36 | If it says Normal, you're in good shape.
| | 05:39 | However, if it says, Check battery,
| | 05:41 | there's a good chance that that battery
is on its way out, at which point, you
| | 05:45 | may wish to take it in to Apple.
| | 05:48 | If your Mac spends all its time plugged
in, energy saving settings are important
| | 05:52 | only for your power bill, but if you
depend on an unplugged laptop, these are
| | 05:57 | settings that you want to
spend a long time configuring.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Setting up Bluetooth wireless devices| 00:00 | As we go through this course, you'll
see that we mention wireless input
| | 00:03 | devices such Apple's
Magic Trackpad fairly often.
| | 00:07 | These devices and others work through
a wireless technology called Bluetooth.
| | 00:11 | This is a short range wireless
service that's good up to about 30 feet.
| | 00:16 | So its fine for things like
headphones and printers but not so good for
| | 00:20 | transferring files to a computer far away.
| | 00:22 | In this movie, we'll look at how to set
up these devices, and we do that by going
| | 00:27 | to System Preferences, we'll click on
Bluetooth, and I have no Bluetooth devices
| | 00:32 | that are currently working with this Mac,
so I will click on Set Up New Device.
| | 00:38 | This launches Bluetooth Setup Assistant, and
it looks for any devices that are within range.
| | 00:44 | My trackpad happens to be one of them,
so I click on Continue and it will
| | 00:49 | attempt to pair with my trackpad.
| | 00:51 | It tells me it's connected, so we're good to go.
| | 00:54 | Now, in some cases, depending on the
kind of device you have, up will pop a
| | 00:59 | little number that you have to enter
on that device. Do that and then the
| | 01:03 | two will be paired.
| | 01:04 | At this point, I could set up
another device or I could simply quit.
| | 01:09 | Once devices have been paired, they can
be disconnected, but they'll still remain.
| | 01:14 | So, I click on the tools menu, choose
disconnect, and it's no longer connected.
| | 01:19 | I can reconnect it simply by clicking on
Connect, and it tells me it's connected
| | 01:24 | and again there's this little overlay
indicating that it really is connected.
| | 01:29 | You can choose the option to show Bluetooth
in the menu bar, and what does that show us?
| | 01:34 | Well it shows you that Bluetooth is
on, whether your Mac is discoverable,
| | 01:38 | because your Mac can operate as a
Bluetooth device as well for doing
| | 01:42 | something like file transfer in a
short distance from one Mac to another
| | 01:45 | within that 30 feet distance.
| | 01:47 | You can also turn Bluetooth off.
| | 01:49 | I could send a file to another Mac if
we have Bluetooth sharing turned on.
| | 01:53 | You could browse a device so I can check
out the contents of another Mac, again,
| | 01:57 | if we have Bluetooth sharing turned on.
| | 01:59 | I can see the devices that are attached,
I could disconnect it here, I could
| | 02:03 | also see the battery level,
which can be really helpful.
| | 02:06 | I could set up a new Bluetooth device,
and I can open Bluetooth Preferences.
| | 02:12 | We'll turn this off and we'll
take a look at the Advanced button.
| | 02:16 | This brings down a sheet that offers a
number of options. So for example, if
| | 02:21 | the Mac doesn't see that a keyboard is
attached to it, it will automatically
| | 02:25 | open Bluetooth Setup Assistant. Then you can
pair your keyboard and then you're ready to go.
| | 02:31 | Same idea with a mouse or a trackpad,
if doesn't see one of these pointing
| | 02:34 | devices, it will automatically open
up and offer to configure it for you.
| | 02:39 | You could also allow Bluetooth
devices to wake up your computer, and you can
| | 02:43 | choose to reject incoming audio requests.
| | 02:46 | So, if you have an audio device that
wants to broadcast over Bluetooth and use
| | 02:50 | your Mac and its speakers,
you can tell it not to.
| | 02:54 | At the very bottom, is this option for
serial ports that devices use to connect
| | 03:00 | to this computer, so what is this all about?
| | 03:02 | Well this is kind of a legacy thing.
| | 03:04 | If you happen to have like an old Palm
device, for example, and a few of us
| | 03:08 | still do, it communicates over
Bluetooth using these serial ports.
| | 03:11 | You set up sort of virtual serial ports
and that's how you make the connection
| | 03:15 | to these pin devices.
| | 03:17 | Again, most people are not going to
have to do this. And you click on OK
| | 03:21 | to dismiss that sheet.
| | 03:23 | For our purposes, Bluetooth keyboards
and particularly Apple's Magic Trackpad
| | 03:27 | are the key Bluetooth devices that
you're likely to work with, but you might
| | 03:31 | work with headphones and speakers as well.
| | 03:33 | Using the Bluetooth System
Preference and Setup Assistant, you should be
| | 03:37 | able to do this easily.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Sharing files on a network| 00:00 | The Network system preference is where
you set up a variety of services for
| | 00:04 | connecting your Mac to a
local network and the internet.
| | 00:07 | So, let's take a look.
| | 00:09 | Back to the System
Preferences and select Network.
| | 00:13 | Along the left side of the window, you
see any services capable of networking.
| | 00:19 | In most cases, you'll see Wi-Fi
and either an Ethernet entry or a
| | 00:22 | Thunderbolt Ethernet.
| | 00:24 | You also may see a Bluetooth entry as we have here.
| | 00:27 | Any service that is currently
working will read Connected.
| | 00:31 | We have Ethernet one connected, Wi-Fi
is connected, and those that are not
| | 00:35 | connected read Not Connected and
of course they show this red icon.
| | 00:39 | If you select Wi-Fi, you'll see its status.
| | 00:43 | So, it will tell you it's either
connected or it's not connected.
| | 00:46 | At this point, you can turn Wi-Fi off if you
like just by clicking Wi-Fi Off, and it disappears.
| | 00:51 | You notice it says Off and
then it changes to this red dot.
| | 00:54 | We'll turn it back on, it will
seek out my network, and there it is.
| | 00:59 | Now, speaking of network name, this pop-up
menu will show you available networks nearby.
| | 01:05 | So, here are networks available to me.
| | 01:08 | However, you notice the lock icon.
| | 01:09 | This indicates that this network is
password protected, so I would need to know
| | 01:14 | the password for that network.
| | 01:16 | So, for example, if I choose this IPHONE
network, I will be prompted for the password.
| | 01:21 | If I know it, I type it in,
click on join, and I'm ready to go.
| | 01:26 | We'll stick with GUEST for now.
| | 01:28 | If you like, you can show the Wi-Fi status
in the menu bar by clicking Wi-Fi status.
| | 01:33 | Here again, you see the same kinds of options.
| | 01:35 | So, local networks available
to me if I know the password.
| | 01:40 | Let's go back to this menu
and look at a couple of options.
| | 01:43 | One is Join Other Network.
| | 01:45 | Now, it's possible to create a Wi-Fi
network that other people can't see.
| | 01:50 | What you would do is you would type in
the network name in this field, choose
| | 01:54 | the kind of security it's using, and
here are your various security options.
| | 01:58 | Enter the password for the network,
click join, and then you're on the network.
| | 02:03 | The other option is Create
Network, and this is a very cool option.
| | 02:08 | Basically, it allows you to turn your
Mac into a wireless hotspot that other
| | 02:12 | computers and devices can share.
| | 02:15 | So, you choose this command, name your
network, choose the channel that it's
| | 02:19 | going to be on, and this is a Wi-Fi channel.
| | 02:21 | Generally, a lot of Wi-Fi networks end
up on eleven or one, so you might want to
| | 02:25 | choose something in the
middle like six or seven.
| | 02:29 | Choose the kind of security you want,
and that can be 40-bit WEP or 128-bit
| | 02:33 | WEP, 128-bit is a little more secure. And
once you've done that then you create the
| | 02:38 | network and it will become a wireless
hotspot to other computers around you.
| | 02:43 | So, in what case would you use this?
| | 02:44 | Well, let's say that you're in an old-style
hotel and they don't have a wireless
| | 02:49 | network, instead they have a wired network.
| | 02:51 | So, you plug the ethernet cable into
your Mac, and you have other devices around
| | 02:55 | you that you'd like to use.
| | 02:56 | Well, let's say my iPad for instance.
| | 02:58 | Well, I don't have an Ethernet
cable for that so how do I connect?
| | 03:02 | Well, I can set my MacBook Pro up as a
hotspot, then I can connect my iPad to
| | 03:07 | that hotspot and be able to share the
hotel's network with all my devices.
| | 03:12 | I don't care to do that now, but I can.
| | 03:16 | If I do that, this Wi-Fi
icon will change a little bit.
| | 03:19 | It will show a little icon of a
computer with a fan in it indicating that the
| | 03:23 | computer is now acting as a hotspot.
| | 03:26 | Let's click on the Advanced button,
and we're not going to look at all this
| | 03:30 | stuff, but I do want to look at
TCP/IP, and the reason I do is because of
| | 03:35 | this Renew DHCP Lease.
| | 03:38 | Now, it's possible that as you're
using your network that it could get a
| | 03:42 | little confused and it doesn't seem to be
making the kind of connection you want it to make.
| | 03:46 | What you can do at that point is click
on Renew DHCP Lease, that will go back to
| | 03:52 | the router and say, "Could you
refresh that address for me?"
| | 03:55 | And then it works properly.
| | 03:58 | After all this, it may be something
of a disappointment to discover that
| | 04:02 | Ethernet is pretty much the same thing.
| | 04:04 | The difference is that they put the
DHCP menu here at the front instead
| | 04:08 | of behind Advanced.
| | 04:10 | But again, click on advanced, you have
the option to renew your DHCP Lease here,
| | 04:15 | and then you have some other, more obscure
settings that are outside the goals of this course.
| | 04:21 | Although it's a somewhat advanced topic,
it's something that those working from
| | 04:24 | home and connecting to a corporate
network need to know a bit about, and that's
| | 04:28 | VPN, which stands for Virtual Private Network.
| | 04:32 | This is a means for connecting your Mac
from a remote location to a server, like
| | 04:36 | the one in your office, in a secure way.
| | 04:38 | Now, I'm not going to tell you how to
configure your particular VPN because
| | 04:42 | it's different for each company, but I
can get you started. And the way to get
| | 04:46 | started is to click on the + button, from
Interface choose VPN, and you'll see various VPN types.
| | 04:56 | So, for example, L2TP over IPsec,
PPTP, and Cisco IPsec. For some companies
| | 05:03 | they'll use a Cisco IPsec.
| | 05:06 | You would name your service
name and then click on create.
| | 05:12 | At this point, you need to enter the
server address, the account name, and the
| | 05:17 | password, and most
importantly, authentication settings.
| | 05:20 | You'll need to know the shared secret.
| | 05:23 | Now, all this information is something
that you're going to get from your IT
| | 05:26 | professional at work.
| | 05:28 | They'll either set it up for you or
they'll send you a long message detailing
| | 05:32 | how you set this up.
| | 05:34 | Some require a group name and others
don't. Again, I can't show you how to set up
| | 05:39 | your particular VPN, but at least now
you now how to get to the settings, should
| | 05:42 | you get this kind of information from
your IT Department and need to set up a
| | 05:46 | VPN. And we can get rid of
that because we don't need it.
| | 05:50 | There are many more things that you
can do with the Network system preference,
| | 05:53 | but they're advanced enough to be
outside the scope of this course.
| | 05:56 | What I've shown you is all a typical
user needs to know about networking
| | 06:00 | their Mac.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Configuring sharing| 00:00 | As they say, no Mac is an island.
| | 00:02 | And because this Mac of yours is likely
to be surrounded by other devices, you
| | 00:06 | should know how to configure it to
communicate with those other devices.
| | 00:09 | This is done through the Sharing
system preference, which we can look at now.
| | 00:13 | Go to System Preferences,
and I'll click on sharing.
| | 00:18 | If you don't like the name of your computer,
you can change it at the top of this window.
| | 00:23 | This is how my computer will appear
to other computers on the network.
| | 00:28 | If your Mac includes a DVD or CD drive,
you can turn on the option to share it
| | 00:33 | with other computers.
| | 00:34 | This is helpful, for example, if you
have an older iMac that has a media drive
| | 00:39 | and you have a MacBook
Air that doesn't have one.
| | 00:42 | When you turn this on, you can put a
disk into your iMac and then share it
| | 00:47 | to your MacBook Air.
| | 00:48 | So, for example, you might want to
install software that's on that disk on the
| | 00:52 | iMac to your MacBook Air.
| | 00:55 | When screen sharing is switched on,
other Macs can view and control your Mac
| | 00:58 | remotely, and it works like this.
| | 01:00 | So, I'll open a new finder window.
| | 01:04 | I'll go to Shared and I'll
look around on the network.
| | 01:07 | And what I want to find is my
MacBook Air, and here it is.
| | 01:11 | So, I double-click on it, and
I can click on Share Screen.
| | 01:14 | When I do that, I have two options.
| | 01:16 | One is that I can share the display,
so I will see exactly what's on that
| | 01:20 | MacBook Air's screen, and I
can control the computer.
| | 01:23 | The other option, and this is very
interesting, is that if you choose log in,
| | 01:29 | you can choose to use a different account
while somebody else is using their account.
| | 01:33 | So, for example, on that computer,
the Chris Breen account is the one
| | 01:37 | that's currently active.
| | 01:38 | If I wanted to, I could log into my
Macworld account, do my work there while
| | 01:43 | they're working in their Chris Breen account.
| | 01:45 | So, it's a way to use two
accounts at the same time.
| | 01:49 | I don't want to do that, so I'll close that.
| | 01:52 | I'll choose share screen again and
this time I want to share the display.
| | 01:55 | So, on the other computer it's
asking if it's okay to share the screen.
| | 01:59 | I will say it is and now I can
see the screen to my MacBook Air.
| | 02:04 | The indication that we're
sharing the screen is right up here.
| | 02:08 | This is the screen sharing icon.
| | 02:10 | So, on that computer, if I happen to
be sitting at the MacBook Air, I could
| | 02:14 | disconnect simply by choosing disconnect.
| | 02:17 | But as you can see, I can do
all kinds of things with that Mac.
| | 02:21 | So, I could go into my pictures
folder on that Mac and then I could take
| | 02:26 | this file if I wanted to and e-mail it to
myself or I could copy it across the network.
| | 02:32 | This is particularly handy if you need
to troubleshoot somebody else's computer
| | 02:35 | that's on the same network.
| | 02:37 | And we'll quit screen sharing.
| | 02:40 | When you enable file sharing, other
users can access shared folders on this Mac.
| | 02:44 | By default, there's one folder
called public in your user folder.
| | 02:48 | So, anything that you drop into that
folder can be copied to another Mac, except
| | 02:53 | the Drop Box, which is for others to
share stuff with you by copying it.
| | 02:57 | So, let's see how that works.
| | 02:59 | Once again, I'll find my MacBook Air.
| | 03:03 | I'll open the Christopher Breen
public folder, and here is Drop Box.
| | 03:07 | Now, you see when I try to open it,
I can't, I'm told that I don't have
| | 03:12 | permission to see the contents.
| | 03:13 | However, I can copy contents from this
Mac to that Mac, and we'll do that now.
| | 03:18 | So, I'll take this image, I'll drag it
to the desktop, take a file on it, quit
| | 03:22 | iPhoto, and then I take the
image, drag it to Drop Box.
| | 03:27 | It tells me that I can put items into
drop box but I won't be able to see them
| | 03:31 | from this computer, and that's perfectly okay.
| | 03:33 | So, I click on OK, and that sound
indicates that the file has been copied to
| | 03:39 | the Drop Box of the other computer.
| | 03:40 | Now, on your computer, once
you've turned file sharing on, you can
| | 03:46 | configure shared folders.
| | 03:48 | So, I have a few configured
here, I can add more if I like.
| | 03:51 | So, if I wanted to share this guest
folder, I click on add and here it is.
| | 03:57 | So, now, this is a shared folder.
| | 03:59 | Once you've shared a folder then you can
decide what the permissions are going to be.
| | 04:03 | So, system administrators can
read and write to that folder,
| | 04:06 | administrators can read only,
and everyone can read only.
| | 04:09 | If I wanted everyone to be able to
read and write to the folder, I can change
| | 04:13 | the permission so they
can read as well as write.
| | 04:16 | I'm going to get rid of that folder
because I don't want to share it, and I'll
| | 04:19 | click on okay and it's gone.
| | 04:22 | Also check the Options button.
| | 04:24 | Here, you'll find a couple of different options.
| | 04:26 | One is share files and folders using AFP.
| | 04:31 | This is a kind of transfer protocol that
Macs use routinely. Leave this one on.
| | 04:36 | If you intend to share files and
folders with Windows machines, turn on share
| | 04:40 | file and folders using SMB Windows.
| | 04:43 | There are times when you also need
to turn this option on if you're using
| | 04:48 | network-attached storage device, or some
kind of media device that requires that
| | 04:52 | it has SMB enabled. And click on done.
| | 04:55 | Then there's Printer Sharing.
| | 04:57 | So, if you have a printer that's
attached to your Mac and you'd like to share it
| | 05:01 | with other devices on the network, turn
Printer Sharing on and other computers
| | 05:04 | will be able to see that
printer and print to it.
| | 05:08 | Scanner sharing is the same idea, turn
that on and other computers can use the
| | 05:12 | scanner across the network.
| | 05:15 | When you switch on Remote login, your
Mac can be accessed over the internet via
| | 05:19 | something called SSH.
| | 05:22 | And this is a secure connection that
allows others to copy files on and off the Mac.
| | 05:27 | With remote management on, others can
control your Mac over the internet using
| | 05:31 | Apple's remote desktop or a Virtual
Network Computer, which is a VNC program.
| | 05:36 | This is like screen sharing but it's
internet-based instead of using a local network.
| | 05:42 | Remote Apple Events allows Apple
scripts run on a remote computer to perform
| | 05:45 | actions on your computer.
| | 05:47 | Internet Sharing let's you share the
internet connection on your Mac with other devices.
| | 05:52 | For example, you have an ethernet connection.
| | 05:55 | You can then share that wirelessly to
other devices by turning this on and
| | 05:58 | creating a wireless hotspot.
| | 06:00 | And then there's Bluetooth Sharing.
| | 06:02 | Turn this on and you can share files
between compatible Bluetooth devices, and
| | 06:07 | that may be some mobile
phones and computers, for example.
| | 06:11 | And that covers the sharing options
offered by the Mac. Which to use?
| | 06:15 | Well, I always have Screen
Sharing and File Sharing turned on.
| | 06:18 | And I do because I need to copy files
between Macs and occasionally I need to
| | 06:22 | view the screens of other Macs.
| | 06:24 | Of course, your needs may vary from mine.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Editing your users and groups| 00:00 | In previous versions of Mac OS X, you
created and controlled the powers of users
| | 00:05 | in the Account system preference.
| | 00:07 | With Lion, this was renamed to Users &
Groups, and it remained so in Mountain Lion.
| | 00:12 | So, here's how it works.
| | 00:14 | By default, you'll see two users.
| | 00:17 | Normally, you'd see the current user,
which is an administrator account, and then
| | 00:21 | you see a guest user account.
| | 00:23 | The guest user account is there only to
allow guests accessing the Mac through a
| | 00:28 | network connection to share files with this Mac.
| | 00:31 | In the first tab, which his called
Password, you can change your password.
| | 00:35 | You need to know your old password, then
you can enter a new one verify it, and if
| | 00:39 | you like, enter a password hint.
| | 00:42 | If you want some help with the
password, click on this key, and it can
| | 00:46 | generate passwords for you.
| | 00:48 | So, you can generate short passwords,
or you can generate long passwords.
| | 00:53 | And you see, these are a little
bit memorable, but not entirely so.
| | 00:57 | And you can see how strong the password is.
| | 01:01 | You could choose a type of memorable,
letters and numbers, numbers only, random,
| | 01:08 | and FIPS-181 compliant.
| | 01:11 | I'm going to cancel that and we'll
stick with the password that we have.
| | 01:15 | If you need to change your Apple ID
you can do so by clicking on Change.
| | 01:20 | And if you want to create an Apple
ID you can do that from within here.
| | 01:23 | When we talk about contacts, I'll
mention that you want to make sure that you
| | 01:29 | have a contacts card.
| | 01:30 | If you want to open it, you click here.
| | 01:33 | The Contacts application opens
and it shows you your contacts card.
| | 01:38 | And you can tell it's yours because it says me.
| | 01:40 | You'll see some other options
down here that are grayed out.
| | 01:44 | So, how do we turn those black?
| | 01:46 | Well, we click on the lock icon
and I'll enter my password, and now I
| | 01:51 | can configure those.
| | 01:52 | So, we talked about changing your password.
| | 01:54 | Well, let's suppose that
you've forgotten your old password.
| | 01:57 | You have the option to allow yourself to
reset your password using your Apple ID.
| | 02:01 | So, if you can't remember your initial
password, just enter your Apple ID and
| | 02:06 | then you'll be able to change the password.
| | 02:08 | Allow user to administer this computer,
when you set your Mac up initially you
| | 02:12 | will be the administrator, and I'll
talk about what these various kinds of
| | 02:15 | accounts are in a minute.
| | 02:16 | And then enable parental controls.
| | 02:18 | We're going to talk about parental
controls in another movie so we'll leave
| | 02:21 | this alone for now.
| | 02:23 | We'll flip over to Login Items, and
this tells you that these items will
| | 02:27 | automatically open when you log in.
| | 02:29 | So, this is a helpful way if when
you first log in, you want certain
| | 02:33 | applications to be opened from the get-go.
| | 02:35 | To do that, just click on +, I'll go
to my Applications, and I'll say that I'd
| | 02:41 | like Calendar to open as soon as I launch.
| | 02:44 | Click on Add, and now when I restart my
Mac, calendar will open automatically.
| | 02:51 | I don't actually want that to happen so
I'll select it and I'll click on the minus
| | 02:54 | button to get rid of it.
| | 02:56 | And then you have Login Options. You
can enable or disable automatic login.
| | 03:01 | If you enable it, you can choose which
account will automatically be logged in
| | 03:05 | when you start up your Mac.
| | 03:07 | If you choose to display the login
window, you can choose to show a list of
| | 03:10 | users or you can simply
have name and password fields.
| | 03:14 | And in the login screen, by default,
you'll see Sleep, Restart, and Shut Down
| | 03:19 | buttons, you can turn that off if you want.
| | 03:22 | You can choose to show the Input
menu in the log in window if you want,
| | 03:25 | that's off by default.
| | 03:26 | When you first set up an account
you're offered the opportunity to
| | 03:29 | enter password hints.
| | 03:31 | By default, these will be shown,
but you can turn that off as well.
| | 03:34 | There's an option within OS X that allows
you to do something called fast user switching.
| | 03:40 | What this does is it puts your
account name in the menu bar.
| | 03:44 | When it's there, you can click on that menu.
| | 03:47 | Down will come a list of all the users
on that computer and you can change to a
| | 03:51 | different user account by choosing that user.
| | 03:54 | Of course, you still have to
log in using that user's password.
| | 03:59 | And if you like, you can use
VoiceOver in the login screen.
| | 04:03 | We'll talk about accessibility in
another movie but the gist is that if you have
| | 04:06 | somebody using the computer who is
vision impaired, they would use VoiceOver
| | 04:11 | that would speak commands to them so
that they can navigate the computer.
| | 04:15 | Suppose that you'd like to
add another user account.
| | 04:17 | To do that, click on the + button,
and down comes this sheet offering
| | 04:22 | various kinds of accounts.
| | 04:23 | And your choices are Administrator,
Standard, Managed with Parental Controls,
| | 04:29 | Sharing Only, and Group.
| | 04:31 | So, what can these users do?
| | 04:33 | Well, the administrator can install
applications and dig into folders that are
| | 04:36 | otherwise forbidden.
| | 04:38 | A standard user can't install
software or muck around with the OS.
| | 04:43 | Again, parental controls is something
we're going to look at later, but the gist
| | 04:47 | is that someone else configures the
computer for their use, thus prohibiting
| | 04:51 | them from doing certain things.
| | 04:53 | And with the Sharing Only account, you
can access shared folders but nothing else.
| | 04:59 | As for Group, this is an account
that you can create that contains other
| | 05:02 | accounts configured with this computer.
| | 05:04 | So, let's say that John, Mary, and
Jill have accounts on the computer.
| | 05:07 | You can create one group account for
just John and Mary, but not for Jill.
| | 05:12 | John and Mary can then work within this account.
| | 05:15 | And as you can see, you'd enter a
full name, the Mac will create an account
| | 05:20 | name for you but you can edit that,
password, verify, and here's your password hint.
| | 05:25 | I don't need to create a
user so I'll click on cancel.
| | 05:27 | Now, let's select my account
and then click on the tools menu.
| | 05:32 | You have the option to set a master password.
| | 05:35 | If you set a master password, this
allows you to reset the password for any
| | 05:40 | user on this computer.
| | 05:42 | So, for example, if you have an iMac and
you're using it with the entire family,
| | 05:47 | you have multiple accounts set up, you
have one for your teenage son and you have
| | 05:51 | another one for your daughter.
| | 05:53 | They can have their own accounts,
but you can create a master password.
| | 05:56 | So, let's say that your son
has forgotten his password.
| | 05:59 | You can reset the password and
establish a new one. And we'll click on Cancel.
| | 06:06 | Now, if you're the one person who uses
your Mac, you may think that you have no
| | 06:10 | need to create additional
accounts, and that's not necessarily so.
| | 06:14 | I always create a troubleshooting
account with administrator's privileges.
| | 06:18 | If my regular account starts
behaving strangely, I can then log into my
| | 06:22 | troubleshooting account and try to
perform the same action that gives my
| | 06:26 | regular account problems.
| | 06:28 | If I don't have that problem in the
troubleshooting account, I know that
| | 06:32 | there's some specific problem in that account,
perhaps a startup item that I can disable.
| | 06:37 | It's a valuable troubleshooting
technique and one I suggest you employ if you're
| | 06:41 | the kind of person who likes
to fix their computer problems.
| | 06:45 | And that's Users & Groups in Mountain Lion.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Setting rules with Parental Controls| 00:00 | Mountain Lion includes parental
controls, which allows you to limit what
| | 00:04 | particular users can do on their
Mac. And here's how to set it up.
| | 00:08 | Click on Parental Controls, and we see
that there's the guest user account.
| | 00:13 | I'll click the lock to unlock it, enter
my password, click on +, and I'm going
| | 00:19 | to create a parentally controlled
account, and we'll call this Kid.
| | 00:24 | The account name will be Kid.
| | 00:25 | On our password, verify the password, put
in a password hint, and create the account.
| | 00:38 | So, here's the Kid account and
we see that there are five tabs.
| | 00:40 | Let's go through them. The first is Apps.
| | 00:43 | You can choose to use a Simple Finder.
| | 00:46 | What this does is it simplifies the Dock,
it removes some menu commands, and it
| | 00:51 | generally allows the person using
the account to have access to the basic
| | 00:54 | functions of the Mac but
none of the advanced ones.
| | 00:58 | You can also choose to limit applications.
| | 01:00 | When you do this, you have a few options.
| | 01:02 | First is, you can choose to allow any
application that you got from the Mac App
| | 01:07 | Store, or you can limit them by age rating.
| | 01:10 | Every application that's at the Mac App
Store has an age rating, kind of like a
| | 01:14 | movie rating, whether it's appropriate or not.
| | 01:17 | So if you've purchased something for
a preschool child, you may see that the
| | 01:20 | rating is up to four plus.
| | 01:23 | There's also up to nine plus, up to
twelve plus, and up to seventeen plus.
| | 01:29 | So, this may be helpful to limiting a
small child to age appropriate games.
| | 01:34 | You can also choose Allowed Apps.
| | 01:36 | Now, the Mac sets up some of these for you.
| | 01:38 | So for example, you probably aren't
going to allow a child to use Automator,
| | 01:43 | which automates tasks on your Mac.
| | 01:45 | But you will want them to use
Calculator so they can do their math homework.
| | 01:48 | Calendar is a good idea, your browser,
dictionary, but perhaps you don't want
| | 01:54 | them wasting time talking to their
friends over FaceTime, so that's disabled.
| | 01:58 | If you want to, click on it,
and then you can enable it.
| | 02:01 | So the idea is, choose the
applications that you want them to use and disable
| | 02:06 | those that you don't.
| | 02:08 | And then you have the option
whether to allow them to modify the Dock.
| | 02:11 | Turn that off and they can't drag items
into the Dock, instead there'll be a set
| | 02:16 | configuration and that's it.
| | 02:18 | Now, let's go to Web.
| | 02:19 | And this has to do with Safari.
| | 02:21 | So, if they're browsing the web with Safari,
| | 02:24 | by default, Safari will try to
limit access to adult-themed websites.
| | 02:29 | This can sometimes be a hit and miss affair.
| | 02:32 | So, for example, if your child is
doing research on breast cancer, for
| | 02:35 | example, there may be some perfectly
legitimate sites that have been blocked
| | 02:39 | because of this setting.
| | 02:41 | If you don't want to worry about that
but do want to restrict in other ways,
| | 02:43 | you can simply turn on "Allow unrestricted access
to websites" and then Safari can go everywhere.
| | 02:49 | You can also customize.
| | 02:51 | So, for example, if you are blocked by
an education website that you don't think
| | 02:54 | you should be, you can add it just by
clicking on the + button and then typing
| | 02:58 | in the URL for that site.
| | 03:01 | And if there are websites that you
absolutely do not want your child to visit,
| | 03:04 | you can click on + and then add the
URL there and they won't be able to get to
| | 03:09 | that site. Or if you want to be very
strict, Apple has gone through a series of
| | 03:14 | websites that are perfectly
okay for kids of all ages.
| | 03:17 | That point, turn on "Allow access to
only these websites," unless you click on
| | 03:23 | the + button and once again you can
add a bookmark or you can add a folder
| | 03:27 | that contains bookmarks and
they'll be able to access those sites.
| | 03:32 | Then there's the People tab.
| | 03:34 | The first one has to do with Game Center.
| | 03:36 | The first option is if they are
invited to a multi-player game,
| | 03:39 | by default, they're allowed to join.
| | 03:41 | You can turn that off if you want.
| | 03:43 | They may also receive Game
Center invitations from friends.
| | 03:46 | By default, they can receive those and accept
them, turn it off and they won't be able to.
| | 03:51 | You can also limit Mail and Messages.
| | 03:54 | So, if I enable Limit Mail, you can then
add email addresses that they can send
| | 04:00 | to and receive mail from.
| | 04:02 | So, just type in the first and last name,
and then type in the email address, and
| | 04:06 | if you like, you can add
that person to the address book.
| | 04:08 | Click on add and then they can an
exchange email with that person.
| | 04:12 | Limit message, same idea.
| | 04:14 | Click on +, first name, last name.
| | 04:18 | If they're on AOL's AIM, you can then
allow certain accounts, others will be blocked.
| | 04:22 | Now, it's possible that your child
will need to be able to communicate with
| | 04:28 | somebody over the email,
and maybe you're not at home.
| | 04:30 | What will happen is your child will
attempt to send an email message to
| | 04:34 | somebody and this person
is not on the approved list.
| | 04:37 | If you unable "Send permission request to,"
you can enter your email address here.
| | 04:42 | When your child attempts to send that
email, you will be sent a request saying,
| | 04:45 | Is it okay if little Johnny
communicates with so and so.
| | 04:50 | If you recognize the person and the
address, just say, "Yup, that's okay."
| | 04:54 | A message will be returned to
your child, they'll then be able to
| | 04:57 | communicate with that person.
| | 04:59 | You can limit the time that
your child has on the computer.
| | 05:02 | So, you can set weekday time limits.
| | 05:04 | For example, during the week, they can
be on for three hours total a day, two
| | 05:09 | hours a day, half an hour a
day, up to eight hours a day.
| | 05:13 | When they're about to reach their time
limit, they'll see warnings every so often.
| | 05:17 | This allows the child to finish up
their work, log off, and then they're okay.
| | 05:22 | You can set weekend time limits separately.
| | 05:25 | So, maybe you want to give them more
or less time during the weekend so that
| | 05:29 | they can get outside and play.
| | 05:31 | And then you can set bedtime hours as well.
| | 05:34 | In this case, we have School nights,
and that means after eight o'clock up till
| | 05:38 | 6:00 a.m., they will not be
able to log in to their account.
| | 05:41 | And then you can set a
separate time for the weekend.
| | 05:46 | And then there's some
miscellaneous settings as well.
| | 05:49 | You can keep them from using the
dictation feature, you can hide profanity in
| | 05:53 | the dictionary, you can keep them from
administrating printers, you can keep
| | 05:58 | them from burning CDs and DVDs.
| | 06:00 | That's not such a big problem that it
once was because fewer Macs have media
| | 06:03 | burners now. And you can prevent
them from changing the password.
| | 06:07 | Let's go back to Apps because I
want to show you the Logs button.
| | 06:11 | Click on Logs, and this keeps a record
of everything your child has done within
| | 06:17 | certain applications.
| | 06:18 | First there's Websites Visited. This will
keep a log of all the websites that
| | 06:23 | the child has visited.
| | 06:24 | If you haven't prevented any
websites, you'll still see a list of the
| | 06:28 | websites they've been to.
| | 06:30 | If you have limited websites and they
try to visit one that's forbidden, you'll
| | 06:34 | see a list of those that they've
tried to visit but have been blocked from.
| | 06:38 | Choose applications and you'll see all
the applications that they've used, and
| | 06:42 | Messages will include a list of the
people that they've messaged with.
| | 06:46 | And you can show activity for a week,
a month, three months, six months, one
| | 06:49 | year, or you can see all of them if you want.
| | 06:52 | When you choose Messages, you can
choose how you're going to group them,
| | 06:54 | by contact or by date.
| | 06:57 | And basically, all this does is it
serves as a way so you can check up on your
| | 07:00 | kid to see what they've been doing.
| | 07:03 | And that's Parental Controls.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Taking notes with Dictation & Speech| 00:00 | You know that you can input text with
your Mac's keyboard, but Mountain Lion
| | 00:04 | brings a new compelling way
to enter text, your voice.
| | 00:07 | For the first time, Mac OS X offers
solid speech-to-text capabilities with
| | 00:12 | the dictation feature.
| | 00:14 | We'll start by looking at the
Dictation & Apeech preference. System
| | 00:18 | Preferences, Dictation & Speech.
| | 00:24 | Here, you see the option to
turn dictation on and off.
| | 00:27 | When you turn it on, you see this
warning, and that indicates that when you
| | 00:33 | dictate text, the words that
you say will be sent to Apple.
| | 00:38 | Now, this isn't so Apple can
listen in on your conversations or your
| | 00:41 | private correspondence.
| | 00:43 | What they do want to do, however, is
use the power of their many, many, many
| | 00:47 | servers that can quickly turn that
spoken text into written text and then
| | 00:52 | send it back to you.
| | 00:54 | So, I will now click on Enable
Dictation, and it's switched on.
| | 00:58 | Also within this window, you'll see a
shortcut pop-up menu, which allows you to
| | 01:02 | change the shortcut if you like.
| | 01:04 | In this case, the default is pressing
the Function or Fn key two times in a row.
| | 01:09 | And also you can choose the
language that you'll be speaking.
| | 01:13 | If you are concerned about Apple's
policies regarding dictation and privacy,
| | 01:17 | click on that button and you'll
see a document that explains how this
| | 01:21 | information is used.
| | 01:23 | Dictation is supported system wide, so
an application doesn't have to be written
| | 01:27 | in order to take advantage of it.
| | 01:29 | In this case, I'm going to
launch TextEdit and we'll use that.
| | 01:33 | And here's TextEdit and we
will create a new document.
| | 01:37 | I can now go to the edit
menu and choose Start Dictation.
| | 01:42 | "I don't know about you, but I
think Mountain Lion is awesome!
| | 01:50 | Don't you think so to?"
| | 01:53 | And then I press Return, and here
are the results. It's pretty good.
| | 01:59 | The one area where it was
possibly confused is Mountain.
| | 02:03 | Now, if I Control-click on
that, it offers a suggestion.
| | 02:07 | So, what's the difference?
| | 02:08 | My Mountain is capitalized and their
suggestion is not, which is pretty darn close.
| | 02:13 | What they didn't do however is
capitalize Lion, and I can simply make
| | 02:17 | that correction now.
| | 02:20 | Now, you notice that when I
spoke, I spoke the punctuation.
| | 02:23 | So I had to say, I don't know about you--comma--
but I think Mountain Lion is awesome--exclamation point.
| | 02:30 | If you want to add this kind of
special punctuation, you have to speak it.
| | 02:35 | Now, dictation is pretty good about
understanding punctuation but you have to
| | 02:39 | know what to call it.
| | 02:40 | So, instead of saying, "Parenthesis,"
you must say, "Open parenthesis" and
| | 02:45 | "close parenthesis."
| | 02:47 | So, let's give that a try.
| | 02:48 | Press Fn twice, "I think this is
pretty good (but you may not agree)."
| | 03:00 | And as you can see, it
inserted the parenthesis correctly.
| | 03:05 | You can also insert line breaks by
saying, "New line" or paragraphs by
| | 03:09 | saying, "New paragraph."
| | 03:10 | It also recognizes punctuation, such
as open quote and close quote, hyphen,
| | 03:16 | asterisk, em dash, en dash, and underscore.
| | 03:20 | In general, if you know the proper name
for the kind of punctuation you want to
| | 03:24 | use, dictation will recognize it.
| | 03:26 | Like I said, dictation is available everywhere.
| | 03:29 | So, I'll quit TextEdit.
| | 03:32 | Now, I'll go into Mail, and now I'll
create a new mail message.
| | 03:36 | I'll send it to my good buddy Elmore.
Press Fn twice. "Elmore, how about if we
| | 03:46 | meet for lunch tomorrow?
| | 03:49 | Love to see you again!"
| | 03:52 | New line, "Don't forget to bring your guitar."
| | 03:58 | New line, "See you then,"
New line, "Chris." Not bad.
| | 04:04 | It got everything I said, plus
it took my new line commands.
| | 04:08 | At this point, I would just send
my message and I'd be ready to go.
| | 04:12 | I can leave dictation on if I like,
however, I can also turn it off.
| | 04:17 | The advantage of turning it off is that
any speech that you've uploaded to Apple
| | 04:21 | will be deleted from their servers.
| | 04:24 | So, simply turn off and the words you said
will be erased from Apple's servers in the Cloud.
| | 04:30 | While we're here, let's take a
quick look at Text to Speech.
| | 04:35 | Your Mac cannot only transcribe what you say.
| | 04:37 | It can act as a screen reader for existing text.
| | 04:41 | Here, you can choose a system voice.
| | 04:43 | In this case, the Alex voice is the
default for good reason, because it
| | 04:47 | sounds really good.
| | 04:48 | You can change the speaking
rate if you like, from fast to slow.
| | 04:53 | It could also announce
when alerts are displayed.
| | 04:57 | It can also give you a spoken warning
when an application requires your attention.
| | 05:02 | If you press a certain key, it will
speak the selected text, and you can have
| | 05:06 | the clock announce the time, and if you need
VoiceOver, you can change VoiceOver settings.
| | 05:13 | Now, Alex isn't the only voice available to you.
| | 05:17 | Click on System Voice pop-up menu
and you'll see a variety of voices.
| | 05:22 | If you don't want the standard
voices that came with your Mac, click on
| | 05:25 | Customize and you'll see a long list of voices.
| | 05:29 | And some of these have
different kinds of accents.
| | 05:32 | Under this Novelty accents, you're
going to find a lot of very odd voices.
| | 05:36 | They're fun to play with but
they're not terribly useful.
| | 05:39 | Here's some Chinese, Dutch.
| | 05:43 | If you want your Mac to speak to you in
an Australian accent, you would pick one
| | 05:47 | of those voices, Indian
accent, and so on and so forth.
| | 05:51 | So, the language you want the voice
to speak as well as a regional accent.
| | 05:56 | And that is Dictation & Speech on your Mac.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Exploring the Accessibility settings| 00:00 | One of the most powerful features of the
Mac OS is also a feature that few of us
| | 00:04 | rely on, and that's accessibility.
| | 00:06 | This is a group of features built into
the Mac OS that allows those with certain
| | 00:10 | physical limitations to use the Mac.
| | 00:13 | While it's designed primarily for
those with vision and hearing challenges,
| | 00:16 | there are a couple of features that
those without these issues can benefit from.
| | 00:20 | So, let's take a look.
| | 00:21 | We'll go into System
Preferences and click on Accessibility.
| | 00:26 | Accessibility is made up of three sections.
| | 00:28 | There's Seeing, Hearing, and Interacting.
| | 00:31 | We'll start with Display.
| | 00:34 | First option is to Invert colors.
| | 00:36 | Let's see what that looks like.
| | 00:38 | So basically, you have this X-ray kind of look.
| | 00:41 | For some people with visual impairments,
it makes it easier to see their screen.
| | 00:46 | You can also use Grayscale, Enhance
Contrast, that's an extreme but you can
| | 00:52 | pump it up a little bit.
| | 00:54 | And then there's Cursor Size and this
is actually something that's helpful if
| | 00:57 | you're doing a presentation.
| | 00:59 | Turn that on and you notice
how much larger the cursor gets.
| | 01:02 | So if you're doing a presentation to a
large room, it's much easier to see this
| | 01:06 | large cursor instead of
something that size. Then there's Zoom.
| | 01:13 | You can use keyboard
shortcuts to zoom. So I turn this on.
| | 01:16 | To turn it on, I press Command+Option+8.
| | 01:19 | It's zoomed in, and if I hold down
Command+Option+minus, it goes back to the normal size.
| | 01:29 | You can also use a scroll
gesture with a modifier key to zoom.
| | 01:32 | I find this really helpful. So I turn that on.
| | 01:35 | I hold down the Control key, and then
using the scroll ball on my mouse, I
| | 01:41 | can zoom in and out.
| | 01:43 | You can choose different
modifier keys if you like:
| | 01:45 | Control, Option, or Command.
| | 01:49 | Smooth images is on by default, and then you
can choose Zoom follows the keyboard focus.
| | 01:56 | So you'll zoom in to areas
where you're using the keyboard.
| | 01:59 | With Zoom Style, you have a
couple of different options.
| | 02:02 | The default option is Fullscreen, or you
can choose Picture-in-picture. Now watch
| | 02:07 | what happens when I do that.
| | 02:09 | You see that just the area
right around the cursor is zoomed.
| | 02:15 | If I click on More Options, you
see that I can change Zoom settings.
| | 02:19 | So I can set maximum zoom
as well as minimum zoom.
| | 02:24 | And then there's VoiceOver.
| | 02:26 | Now if during installation of the Mac
OS you waited too long at the beginning
| | 02:29 | of the process, the Mac would start talking to
you and asking you if you'd like to use VoiceOver.
| | 02:35 | This is a screen reader built into the Mac.
| | 02:37 | It's very powerful and better yet, it's free.
| | 02:40 | The general idea is that VoiceOver provides
spoken feedback on what's on your Mac's screen.
| | 02:45 | It tells you what's under your cursor
and then it will read the text to you.
| | 02:50 | When you turn it on, you'll see the
beginning of a tutorial on using VoiceOver.
| | 02:53 | Going into the details of VoiceOver
is beyond the scope of this course.
| | 02:58 | If you need it or know someone who
does, run through the tutorial and look
| | 03:02 | at Apple's Help Menu.
| | 03:03 | Now we'll take a look at Audio.
| | 03:06 | The first option is to flash
the screen when an alert goes off.
| | 03:09 | So if you don't hear very well and some
kind of alert goes off, you may miss it.
| | 03:14 | However, if you see that, you
know that an alert has happened.
| | 03:21 | If you hear better with one ear than
another, you may not be able to hear all
| | 03:25 | the audio that's coming
in through your headphones.
| | 03:27 | So what you can do instead is choose
to Play stereo audio as mono so that the
| | 03:32 | stereo sound is mixed, so that you
hear the same thing, both through the right
| | 03:37 | and the left channel.
| | 03:39 | Into Interacting, let's look at Keyboard.
| | 03:40 | If you have some difficulty moving
your fingers, Sticky Keys can help.
| | 03:46 | What you can do is you can turn on
Sticky Keys and then you can press the
| | 03:49 | Command key, let go, and then press
another key, and it will act as if both had
| | 03:54 | been pressed at the same time.
| | 03:56 | So if you wanted to save a file, for
example, you'd press Command, let go, press S,
| | 04:01 | and the Mac would react as if you
pressed Command+S at the same time.
| | 04:06 | If you can't move very quickly on
the keys, turn on Enable Slow Keys.
| | 04:10 | So you can press it and
it won't react right away.
| | 04:14 | And then Mouse & Trackpad.
| | 04:16 | If you enable Mouse Keys, this allows you
to use the number pad to move your cursor.
| | 04:20 | So you'd enable this.
| | 04:23 | I'm pressing the number 8 key on my
keypad, I'll press 2 now, and that
| | 04:27 | makes the cursor go down.
| | 04:29 | I'll press 1, now you go southwest,
7 northwest, 9 will send you
| | 04:36 | northeast, 6 sends you east.
| | 04:40 | Anyway, you get the idea.
| | 04:41 | Using a number pad, you
can move the cursor around.
| | 04:45 | You can change the speed of your
double-click, and you can also ask your Mac
| | 04:49 | to ignore the trackpad that's built
into your laptop if you're using a mouse
| | 04:53 | or a wireless trackpad.
| | 04:54 | And then Speakable Items.
| | 04:57 | Now the idea behind Speakable Items is
that you're supposed to be able to press
| | 05:01 | a key, instruct your Mac to do
something, and then it will do it.
| | 05:05 | So, you have a Settings screen, and on this
screen, you can turn on Speakable Items
| | 05:09 | and you could choose how
your microphone is connected.
| | 05:12 | Also, if your Mac recognizes what
you've said, it can speak the acknowledgement,
| | 05:17 | or by default, it will play a sound.
| | 05:20 | Listening Key is where you choose which
key to press to enable Speakable Items.
| | 05:25 | And you can choose, it will listen
only when the key is pressed or listen
| | 05:29 | continuously with a keyword.
| | 05:31 | So for example, if the keyword is "computer,"
and then you'd command it to do something.
| | 05:37 | And then you click on Commands and
then you see this Command set list.
| | 05:41 | Here you can choose the kind of commands
that you want your Mac to keep an ear out for.
| | 05:45 | As I said, there are plenty of
helpful options here even if you don't have
| | 05:49 | disabilities that might prevent you from
using the Mac as it's initially set up.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Listening with Sound| 00:00 | If you spent more than a day with your Mac,
you're certainly aware that it can make sound.
| | 00:05 | Well, it can also record sound.
| | 00:07 | So how is all this sound
handled on this machine?
| | 00:10 | It's through the Sound System
Preference, which we're going to look at now.
| | 00:14 | Here we are in the Hardware
Preferences, and here's Sound.
| | 00:17 | You see three tabs.
| | 00:18 | The first is Sound Effects.
| | 00:20 | The first thing you can do here is
change the kind of sound that your Mac makes
| | 00:24 | when it sounds an alert.
| | 00:25 | So you see we have a whole bunch
of different sounds to choose from.
| | 00:33 | We'll come back to this area in just a second.
| | 00:34 | Now let's look at Output.
| | 00:37 | When you look at the Output settings for
your Mac, you may see just a couple of options.
| | 00:42 | For example, you might see Internal
Speakers and Line Out, but there are
| | 00:46 | other options as well.
| | 00:48 | Most Macs also have a Digital Output.
| | 00:51 | So if you use the right kind of cable,
you get digital audio out, rather than
| | 00:55 | analog audio, which you get
out of the Line Out port.
| | 00:58 | Now in some cases, that
port is actually the same port.
| | 01:01 | Whether you get analog or digital out
depends on the kind of cable you use.
| | 01:06 | If you have some kind of audio interface
plugged into your Mac, you may see another entry.
| | 01:10 | For example, I have such an
interface, and I see it here.
| | 01:15 | You can also configure Input.
| | 01:17 | If your Mac has a built-in
microphone, that will be listed.
| | 01:21 | In our case, we're using a digital input, but
I also have my audio hardware here as well.
| | 01:27 | And as you can see, as I speak, I
can view my audio input here.
| | 01:32 | Now let's go back to sound effects.
| | 01:34 | I can choose how to output my sound effects.
| | 01:36 | Currently, I'm using sound out, but as
you see, I can use any of the output
| | 01:40 | destinations that appear in the output tab.
| | 01:43 | I don't want to change that because
otherwise, you won't be able to hear me.
| | 01:48 | You can separately adjust your
Alert Volume versus your Output Volume.
| | 01:53 | You can also adjust the
volume from your keyboard.
| | 01:56 | So now I'm pressing my volume down key,
and you can see that that's reflected
| | 02:01 | in a couple of ways. Not only does
the slider go down, but you see that
| | 02:05 | on-screen representation.
| | 02:07 | If I want to mute sound out, I can
click the Mute Box, or on my keyboard, I can
| | 02:13 | simply press the mute key.
| | 02:15 | If you want to, you can show volume in
the menu bar, and then you can click on
| | 02:19 | that and adjust the volume using that slider.
| | 02:23 | Now here's a cool trick.
| | 02:23 | Hold down the Option key
and click on that same icon.
| | 02:28 | When you do that, you can
choose your Output and Input Devices.
| | 02:32 | So if you quickly need to change your
Output Device, for example, maybe between
| | 02:36 | headphones and some external
speakers, you can do that here.
| | 02:41 | Same idea with Input Devices. And if you
want to quickly open Sound Preferences,
| | 02:45 | select that and this window opens.
| | 02:48 | And that's the ins and outs
of sound on your Macintosh.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
6. Mail, Calendar, Contacts, and Reminders EssentialsOrganizing your business with Mail| 00:00 | Delving into every nook and cranny of
Mountain Lion's mail is beyond the scope
| | 00:04 | of this course, but I can certainly
provide you with a good start, and that good
| | 00:08 | start begins with the Mail,
Contacts & Calendar System Preference.
| | 00:13 | Go to System Preferences.
| | 00:14 | Click on Mail, Contacts & Calendars,
and as I've shown you earlier, you can
| | 00:20 | create a new email account in here.
| | 00:22 | So you can create an iCloud account
if you don't already have one created,
| | 00:26 | Exchange, Gmail, Yahoo!, AOL, or add other
and then add an IMAP account or a POP account.
| | 00:35 | Once you have that set up, launch Mail.
| | 00:37 | If you have mail waiting for you on the
server, Mail would download it for you.
| | 00:45 | My mail has already been downloaded.
| | 00:47 | Any messages that you've
received will appear in the left column.
| | 00:51 | Select the message, and the contents of
that message will appear to the right.
| | 00:57 | Now Mail supports
something called Conversations.
| | 01:00 | So what we'll do is look for any
message that has a little gray box with a
| | 01:04 | number in it, and here's one
right here between me and Ian.
| | 01:07 | So I select that message and we see
that there are two messages here that
| | 01:12 | detail the conversation
we've had between each other.
| | 01:15 | So Ian can't make the meeting, and
here's my response that we'll get
| | 01:18 | together another time.
| | 01:20 | This is an easy way to keep track of a
conversation that may have happened over
| | 01:24 | days or maybe even weeks.
| | 01:25 | It's much easier to keep the thread
of a conversation if you could see them
| | 01:29 | all in a single window.
| | 01:31 | If you bring your cursor up to the
message header, you can see buttons for
| | 01:35 | reply, reply all, forward, and trash.
| | 01:42 | You can also find these
icons up here in the toolbar.
| | 01:45 | But if you prefer to work within the
message itself, just bring your cursor up
| | 01:48 | and you can access those options here.
| | 01:51 | Now it's possible that within an
account, you have multiple mailboxes, and in
| | 01:56 | this day and age, you may have multiple
email accounts, so how do you see those?
| | 02:01 | Click on Show, and here you see your
accounts as well as the mailboxes within
| | 02:06 | them. So this is my unified inbox, and
that means any mail that I've received
| | 02:11 | regardless of the account, will
appear when I select that inbox.
| | 02:16 | If I like, I can go down and select
individual accounts, so here's my iCloud
| | 02:20 | account and here's my Gmail account.
| | 02:23 | So if I want to see messages just in my
Gmail account, I click on All Mail and
| | 02:28 | that shows me that Gmail information.
| | 02:32 | We'll go back to the unified inbox.
| | 02:33 | When I click the down arrow there, I can
also explore those inboxes, so iCloud and Gmail.
| | 02:43 | Now this look came into being with
Lion, but suppose you're an old-fashioned
| | 02:47 | mail user and you don't care for this look,
we can put things back the way they once were.
| | 02:52 | So we'll go to Preferences, and then
Viewing, and Use Classic Layout, and
| | 03:00 | we'll dismiss that.
| | 03:02 | This is the way that mail used to
look back in the Snow Leopard days.
| | 03:06 | In this configuration, again, you see
your accounts and mailboxes on the left,
| | 03:10 | you see your messages on the right.
Select the message and then the contents of
| | 03:16 | the message appears at the bottom of the window.
| | 03:20 | We'll go back to Preferences, and
Viewing, and you have a couple of options here.
| | 03:25 | One is that you can choose to
display unread messages with a bold font.
| | 03:29 | Let's see what that looks like.
| | 03:32 | So even though unread messages appear
with this little blue dot next to them,
| | 03:36 | you can make them even more
obvious by making them bold.
| | 03:41 | Now let's actually create
and receive email messages.
| | 03:44 | To create an email message, I just
click on the Compose New Message button.
| | 03:50 | I would enter an email address. So
I've typed my email message, I've
| | 03:58 | addressed it to Ian.
| | 03:59 | I can add other recipients if I like.
| | 04:01 | If I wanted to, I can attach a file by
clicking on the Attach button, choosing a
| | 04:07 | file to attach, and Choose
File, and there's my attachment.
| | 04:13 | I can also drag in files and
they will become attachments.
| | 04:15 | I can also choose the image size.
| | 04:17 | Right now, it's actual
size, which is quite large.
| | 04:20 | So let's make that medium, so that
the email message will be smaller.
| | 04:23 | I can CC this message to someone
else if I like, and it will autofill any
| | 04:29 | addresses that I have in my contacts. And
if I want to add a Bcc field, which is
| | 04:35 | described as Blind Carbon Copy, or Courtesy
Copy, I can add a recipient there as well.
| | 04:43 | If you're not familiar what Bc is for,
it means that you can send a message to
| | 04:48 | somebody but the people who received
that message will not be aware that you've
| | 04:52 | sent the message to the person in the Bcc field.
| | 04:55 | It's a little sneaky but
sometimes you need to use it.
| | 04:58 | You can also choose the account to send it from.
| | 05:00 | So in this case, I would be sending it
from my iCloud account, but I could also
| | 05:04 | choose my Gmail account. And if a
recipient has more than one address, you can
| | 05:09 | choose which address you want to send it to.
| | 05:12 | If you've chosen to send your mail in
Rich Text Format, which is the default
| | 05:16 | setting, you can click on the Format button
and you can reformat your message if you like.
| | 05:22 | So, I can take this text.
| | 05:24 | I could choose a different font, change
the size, bold, underlined, and change
| | 05:30 | the alignment, for example.
| | 05:31 | When you're ready to send the message,
simply click on the little paper airplane icon.
| | 05:38 | Mail activity shows you how it's
going, and you'll hear that little whoosh
| | 05:42 | when it has been sent.
| | 05:45 | Now, I'm ready to receive some email.
| | 05:46 | I just need Ian to send me a message.
| | 05:49 | I can do that by clicking
on the Get Messages button.
| | 05:52 | I'll look at my unified
inbox, and here's Ian's message.
| | 05:59 | This isn't just for spammers.
| | 06:01 | Now Mail will also
automatically look for your email.
| | 06:04 | So you don't necessarily have to click that
button every time you want to get your email.
| | 06:09 | Mail will, on a schedule, go
out and grab your messages.
| | 06:12 | If you tend to email the same people
over and over again, it's a good idea to
| | 06:16 | add them to your address book.
| | 06:18 | One easy way to do that is to select
a message that you receive and choose
| | 06:23 | Message > Add Sender to Contacts. And
so now, Ian is part of my contacts.
| | 06:30 | Again, if I wish to reply, I just
click on Reply, New Message, and Send.
| | 06:37 | You now have the basics of Mail's
layout and sending and receiving messages.
| | 06:45 | Before we go, let's take a quick
look at junk mail rules and VIPs.
| | 06:49 | By default, messages that mail
believes are junk are marked in brown.
| | 06:54 | Now currently, I don't think I have any brown
messages but I can certainly turn one brown.
| | 06:59 | So we'll say the iBookstore, as much as
I'd like their offer, I'm going to say
| | 07:04 | that's junk, and the way I say that's junk
is to click on the downward pointing thumb.
| | 07:11 | You see that the text turns brown and
when I select it, there is a very obvious
| | 07:16 | indication that this is junk mail.
| | 07:19 | Now junk mail filtering
works best if you train it.
| | 07:23 | So if you get a message that's marked as
junk and it's not, you simply click on Not Junk.
| | 07:29 | Mail learns that it's not, and then when
it sees a similar message in the future,
| | 07:32 | it won't mark it as junk.
| | 07:34 | However, if you receive a message that is
junk, again, thumbs down, marked as junk.
| | 07:40 | By default, junk mail messages remain
in your inbox, again, marked in brown.
| | 07:45 | Once you're confident that mail is
correctly separating the wheat from the
| | 07:48 | chaff, you open Preferences, click on
Junk Mail, and then change the option in
| | 07:56 | When junk mail arrives.
| | 07:57 | Currently, it's set up to leave it in
my inbox, and that's the option you'll see
| | 08:01 | when you first start using Mail.
| | 08:02 | But once it learns about junk, you want
to move it to the junk mail mailbox, and
| | 08:07 | you do that by selecting
Move it to the junk mailbox.
| | 08:12 | You can also create something
which is a basic white list.
| | 08:15 | So for example, if a sender of messages
is in my contacts, so it's somebody you
| | 08:19 | know, they won't be marked as junk
mail, or if they appear in a list of your
| | 08:24 | previous recipients, they are not junk,
and if it's addressed using your full
| | 08:28 | name, then it's not marked as junk.
| | 08:31 | But you can disable these options if you want.
| | 08:33 | While we're in Preferences,
let's click on the Rules entry.
| | 08:38 | This is where you create filters that
help you automatically deal with your mail.
| | 08:42 | To create a rule, let's add
one by clicking on Add Rule.
| | 08:45 | We'll call it From Facebook.
| | 08:50 | If it's From, Contains, Facebook, we're
going to have it move it to another mailbox,
| | 08:58 | but I need to create a mailbox
first, so move that out of the way.
| | 09:02 | Click on +, New Mailbox, Facebook, click OK.
| | 09:11 | Now, we'll move the message to
Facebook. So from this point forward, if I
| | 09:19 | receive anything where the From field
contains Facebook, that message will be
| | 09:24 | moved to another folder called
Facebook. And I'll click on OK.
| | 09:27 | It will ask if I'd liked to apply that rule.
| | 09:30 | Indeed, I do want it to happen.
| | 09:33 | I'll close this window.
| | 09:35 | I'll look at my Facebook folder, and
sure enough, here are the two messages I've
| | 09:39 | received from Facebook.
| | 09:41 | In the future, any other messages that come
from Facebook will appear in here as well.
| | 09:46 | So this isn't just for filtering out
companies like Facebook or Amazon, but you
| | 09:50 | can use it for friends or family.
| | 09:52 | So any message I received that
includes Breen, for example, in the From field
| | 09:56 | could be filtered into a Breen folder
and I'd understand that that was from a
| | 10:00 | member of my family.
| | 10:01 | Now one of the advantages of this is
that it will move messages from your inbox
| | 10:06 | and place it in these folders.
| | 10:08 | You can also filter messages by
creating Smart Mailboxes, and these are
| | 10:12 | mailboxes that look for certain
conditions, and then file messages when those
| | 10:16 | conditions are met.
| | 10:17 | So we go to Mailbox and
then choose New Smart Mailbox.
| | 10:23 | Just like in the Finder when we created a
Smart folder, this works very much the same way.
| | 10:28 | So I'm going to call this iTunes.
| | 10:34 | In this case I'll say Subject,
Contains, iTunes, and click on OK.
| | 10:41 | Now I have a new iTunes mailbox.
| | 10:44 | This is a Smart Mailbox and it
includes any messages that include the word
| | 10:48 | iTunes in the subject heading.
| | 10:50 | The difference between this and a rule
is that rules will take messages and move
| | 10:55 | them out of the inbox.
| | 10:57 | A Smart Mailbox will not do that.
| | 10:59 | This message remains in the inbox.
| | 11:01 | I just happen to see another copy
of it here in this iTunes mailbox.
| | 11:06 | Finally, let's take a look at
one more way to filter your mail.
| | 11:10 | Mountain Lion has introduced
something called the VIP feature.
| | 11:14 | What this means is that you can
designate certain contacts as VIPs.
| | 11:18 | When you do, their messages
appear in a special VIPs mailbox.
| | 11:23 | So to add somebody as a VIP,
find a message from them.
| | 11:28 | So here's one from Ian.
| | 11:29 | Now, as I move my cursor over his name, you
see a little star that appears to the left.
| | 11:35 | If I click on that star to highlight it,
suddenly a VIPs mailbox is created.
| | 11:40 | I will select it, and I will see any
messages from those people that I have
| | 11:45 | designated as VIPs. And how
can I tell who those are?
| | 11:49 | All I have to do is click the triangle
next to it, and I see the recipients that
| | 11:54 | I designated as VIPs.
| | 11:55 | If Ian were to do something to irk me,
in a serious way, I could right-click on
| | 12:01 | his name and I could choose Remove from VIPs.
| | 12:05 | Now in truth, Ian really is a very
important person, but for the time being, I'm
| | 12:09 | saying that he's not.
| | 12:10 | Of course I can always add him again
just by clicking on that little star, and
| | 12:14 | he's back in my good graces.
| | 12:16 | If you designate someone as a VIP and
sync contacts via iCloud, that person will
| | 12:20 | be marked as a VIP on all your iCloud
compatible devices, provided that you use
| | 12:25 | Apple's Mail client on those devices.
| | 12:27 | So that would be your iPad, your
iPhone, your iPod Touch, and your Macs.
| | 12:33 | Again, these are the basics.
| | 12:34 | There's more to Mail, but what I've
shown you will give you more than a good
| | 12:37 | start to sending,
receiving, and filtering email.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Scheduling time with Calendar| 00:00 | Calendar is another component of
Mountain Lion's information hub.
| | 00:04 | It's an application for keeping track
of the events in your and others' lives.
| | 00:08 | Here are the basics of how
it works. Here's Calendar.
| | 00:13 | Calendar's interface
resembles a large desk calendar.
| | 00:17 | Hopefully, you like the look because
there's not an easy way to turn that off.
| | 00:21 | But like it or not, the
interface is pretty straightforward.
| | 00:23 | If you click on the Calendars button,
you see all the calendars you have that
| | 00:27 | are tied to the various
accounts that you've set up.
| | 00:29 | So in my case, I have my iCloud
calendars and my Gmail calendars.
| | 00:34 | If you'll uncheck a calendar, any events
that are associated with it will disappear.
| | 00:42 | To make them reappear,
simply click on them again.
| | 00:45 | You can also show and hide calendars
completely, so there goes my Gmail account,
| | 00:51 | and there goes iCloud, but notice, it
doesn't change what actually appears in
| | 00:55 | the calendar itself, but it does hide the
separate calendar entries in that left pane.
| | 01:01 | And we'll go back to showing them.
| | 01:03 | The buttons at the top, day, week,
month, and year show you those views.
| | 01:09 | So here's Day, I can see my week on the
left side and that will continue on, and
| | 01:16 | then I can see events for that particular day.
| | 01:20 | Click the arrows and you
can move up through the days.
| | 01:24 | I can have a Week view, Month
view, and of course, Year view.
| | 01:30 | Anything that has an event
associated with it will appear in yellow.
| | 01:35 | Any days that have a lot of events are
colored more darkly. And we'll go back to Month view.
| | 01:41 | Regardless of which view you're in, if you
click on Today, it will highlight the current day.
| | 01:47 | So if you've gone forward a couple
of months, you can easily return to this
| | 01:50 | view just by clicking on Today.
| | 01:52 | To quickly add an event, click on
the plus button and enter your event.
| | 01:58 | Now, this actually turns out to be pretty smart.
| | 02:01 | Watch what happens.
| | 02:04 | I've written, "Lunch with Ian
tomorrow," and I press Return.
| | 02:09 | When I do this, it creates, "Lunch with Ian."
| | 02:11 | It shows me the details, and it fills in
the time automatically, we tend to have
| | 02:16 | lunch at noon, and sure enough,
it filled in noon as the time.
| | 02:20 | Now, I'll delete that.
| | 02:21 | Click on plus and I could choose
something like, "Football with Nick."
| | 02:31 | It filled in the event's name, I told
it it was Saturday, so it went to the
| | 02:36 | next Saturday and I told it that it
would happen at two o'clock and sure enough,
| | 02:39 | that's the time it scheduled it for.
| | 02:41 | If you like, you can specify a date,
so I could have "Football with Nick,
| | 02:47 | December 22nd" and it would
create an event on that date.
| | 02:50 | While we're here, let's look at
the innards of an edit window.
| | 02:55 | I could have this event repeat, if I liked.
| | 02:57 | So if I wanted to go to a football
game with Nick each and every week, I could
| | 03:01 | click on repeat and choose every week.
| | 03:07 | As you can see, an event has
been created for every Saturday.
| | 03:13 | You can decide when that's going to end.
| | 03:16 | Well football season doesn't last
forever, so we'll say, "After four times."
| | 03:24 | I can show that time as busy or free,
well I'm definitely going to be busy.
| | 03:28 | I can assign it to a Calendar.
| | 03:29 | I think Fun Times because
Football sounds like fun to me.
| | 03:33 | I can also have an alert go off.
| | 03:35 | So it can be a simple message and
that will appear in Notification Center.
| | 03:38 | I can have it be Message with a Sound.
| | 03:40 | It can be an email message to me
or I can ask it to open a file.
| | 03:45 | So, for example, I could have a
TextEdit file that includes all the details
| | 03:49 | about that football game, it could
automatically launch when this alert goes off.
| | 03:54 | I can choose invitees, when I do that,
I just start entering the name of
| | 03:58 | somebody in my address book, press
return, and an email message will be sent to
| | 04:04 | this person, letting them
know about the upcoming event.
| | 04:08 | I can also check their
available meeting times if I like.
| | 04:11 | I can add an attachment, so that
TextEdit file I was talking about, I could add
| | 04:15 | that as an attachment instead.
| | 04:17 | I can add a URL for the
stadium and I can also add a note.
| | 04:23 | Because I've added a recipient for this
invitation, I would click on Send, the
| | 04:27 | email message will be sent out with the details.
| | 04:30 | I'm going to click on Revert because I
don't actually need to send anybody an
| | 04:33 | invitation to this event.
| | 04:35 | Now, if you're a busy person, you have
a lot of events in your calendar and you
| | 04:39 | may not remember when they all are, so
that's where the search field comes in.
| | 04:43 | So if I want to find just those events
that have to do with football, I type
| | 04:49 | those words and I see any
event that's connected to it.
| | 04:52 | We can do the same thing with
lunch, and I can see all my upcoming
| | 04:58 | lunch appointments.
| | 04:59 | When I select one, it will give me some of
the details and it will highlight the date.
| | 05:04 | Now, let's take a look at Preferences.
| | 05:09 | In the General preference, you can choose
how many days you're going to see in a week.
| | 05:13 | Your options are seven days or five days.
| | 05:16 | You can decide when you're
going to start your week.
| | 05:18 | Most people start it on Sunday, but if
it's a work kind of week and you're that
| | 05:22 | sort of calendar user, you can choose Monday.
| | 05:25 | You can choose how you're going to
scroll in Week view, decide when your day
| | 05:29 | starts and when it ends, and
shows the number of hours in a day.
| | 05:33 | For me, it's 24 hours a day, I don't
slack, and your default calendar can be any
| | 05:37 | calendar that you have.
| | 05:40 | If you like, you can show event times
as part of your calendar, and you can
| | 05:44 | show the Birthdays Calendar.
| | 05:45 | What this does is it looks through
your contacts, it sees if the birthday
| | 05:49 | field is filled in for someone, and if so,
their birthday will be appended to your calendar.
| | 05:57 | You have an accounts option.
| | 05:58 | We set up two accounts so that they use
calendars, iCloud and Gmail, and you have
| | 06:04 | this Delegation option.
| | 06:05 | What this means is, you can choose
which calendars that you're going to be able
| | 06:10 | to access that are on Gmail.
| | 06:11 | So I may want to access my Home Style calendar.
| | 06:15 | Now, when I turn on that delegate, you
see Home Style appears under delegates.
| | 06:19 | Now I have access to that calendar.
| | 06:21 | So when I add an event to that calendar,
it will automatically be synced to Gmail.
| | 06:26 | I can also turn on my Work Schedule and
yet again, here's another delegate, when
| | 06:30 | I add something to that calendar, it
will be broadcast to Gmail, and then any
| | 06:35 | devices that are synced with that Gmail
calendar, as well as any people that are
| | 06:38 | subscribed to that calendar.
| | 06:40 | Now, we're in Advanced, and
these are mostly self-explanatory.
| | 06:45 | Let's say that you take your laptop
from one time zone to the next time zone
| | 06:49 | to the next time zone.
| | 06:50 | If you turn on time zone support, the
times of your events will shift so that
| | 06:56 | they work within that time zone.
| | 06:58 | If you leave it off, they will
maintain their original time.
| | 07:02 | You can show events in year view,
you can show week numbers if you like,
| | 07:05 | open events in separate windows,
ask before sending changes to events, and
| | 07:10 | you can also automatically
retrieve invitations from Mail.
| | 07:14 | Then there's Alerts, and this is
new with this version of Calendar.
| | 07:19 | You can set up Alerts by account.
| | 07:22 | So I have two options here, I can set up
iCloud or I can set it up for my Gmail account.
| | 07:27 | Let's say for iCloud, I can have alerts
go off for an event, at the time of the
| | 07:33 | event, 30 minutes before, two days
before, or whatever. Or I can leave it as none,
| | 07:38 | so that I see no alert for that.
| | 07:41 | By default, all day events, I'll see an
alert, one day before at 9:00 A.M., but
| | 07:46 | I can change that setting.
| | 07:47 | I can also change birthday alerts.
| | 07:49 | Also, you have the option to use these
default alerts only on this computer.
| | 07:54 | So when you do this, your other
computers that are synced with this account
| | 07:58 | will not show these alerts as
you've configured them here.
| | 08:01 | Same idea with your iOS devices, they
will use their default alerts instead of
| | 08:05 | the ones that you've configured here.
| | 08:07 | If you don't want shared calendar
messages to appear in Notification Center, you
| | 08:11 | could turn that off, and you can turn
off all invitations in Notification Center
| | 08:16 | if you like. And that's Calendar in a nutshell.
| | 08:19 | By itself, it's a capable calendar program.
| | 08:22 | When used in league with an iOS device
and an online service such as Google or
| | 08:27 | iCloud, it becomes a central component
for organizing the events in your life.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Keeping tabs with Contacts| 00:00 | Like Calendar, Contacts has inherited
the look of the iOS version of the program.
| | 00:05 | And like the paper-based counterpart
that you may have jammed in a desk drawer,
| | 00:09 | Mountain Lion's Contacts is designed
to hold and organize your Contacts.
| | 00:13 | Let's give it a look.
| | 00:14 | Go ahead to the Dock and click
on Contacts. It's most basic.
| | 00:19 | Contacts is a place where you add
single contacts and to do that, click on the
| | 00:23 | plus button, in the second column,
enter a name and some other information.
| | 00:29 | Add a company name if you like.
| | 00:32 | You could choose a phone number and
choose a variety of phones, so if you want
| | 00:36 | to add somebody's iPhone
specifically, select that.
| | 00:41 | Notice that it formats the number for you.
| | 00:44 | You can add an email address,
home page URL, and so on and so forth.
| | 00:48 | You can also add notes if you like.
| | 00:51 | When you're done, click on Done.
| | 00:53 | Now, when you first open Contacts, you
should see at least one card, and that
| | 00:58 | card will be yours, and you can tell
it's yours because there's a little head
| | 01:02 | icon next to it, indicating,
this is your home card.
| | 01:06 | So what's this good for?
| | 01:07 | Well, it's one way that
your Mac has identified you.
| | 01:10 | So every so often, it will need to
autofill in an address, or a phone number, or
| | 01:14 | something like that, and this is the card
it will look to for that information.
| | 01:18 | Unlike a real paper-based address book, this
one let's you arrange contacts into groups.
| | 01:23 | So you can create a group of friends,
business associates, or people you owe money to.
| | 01:28 | Go to File, choose New Group, name your group,
and then you can add contacts to that group.
| | 01:38 | So I'll go into all of my contacts,
this Joe Blow guy as it turns out is a
| | 01:42 | deadbeat, and Sonja Limberger is
also a deadbeat, they both owe me money.
| | 01:50 | Now, when I want to look into a group,
all I have to do is select my group and I
| | 01:55 | can see the members of that group.
| | 01:56 | Now, this is more than just a
convenience when working in Contacts.
| | 01:59 | When you create a group in contacts,
you could easily send an email message to
| | 02:04 | everyone in that group.
| | 02:05 | The same idea works with
Calendar. So here's Calendar.
| | 02:12 | I can create a new event, edit it, add
invitees, and I can choose that group and
| | 02:23 | then both people wind up in my invitees list.
| | 02:27 | Now, Smart Groups is a way
to easily filter contacts.
| | 02:31 | So let's create a new Smart Group.
| | 02:35 | Like other Smart items, I simply
configure a group of conditions, and those
| | 02:39 | contacts that meet those
conditions become part of the group.
| | 02:43 | So let's say this will be for people with
phone numbers, so, Phone, is set, click on OK.
| | 02:53 | Here's my new Smart Group, and it includes
just those contacts that have phone numbers.
| | 02:59 | So if I were to create one that
included both phone numbers as well as email
| | 03:03 | addresses, this is a group that I'd
want to bring over to my iPhone, because a
| | 03:06 | lot of the time with an iPhone, I
don't need to know their street address, I
| | 03:10 | just need to know how to get in contact
with them, and that means giving them a
| | 03:13 | call or sending them an email message.
| | 03:16 | Now, having a personal address book
is great, but it's better when you can
| | 03:20 | share contact information in
that address book with other people.
| | 03:24 | So let's say I wanted to share
the information of Sonja Limberger.
| | 03:27 | I click on the Share button, and you
see that I can email this card, I can
| | 03:31 | message it, and I can AirDrop the card.
| | 03:35 | When I do that, this contact is turned
into something called a vCard file.
| | 03:39 | Once you have that vCard file, you can
drag it into any device that supports
| | 03:44 | vCards or any application that supports vCards.
| | 03:46 | It's a universal standard, so
almost anything will read a vCard.
| | 03:50 | So this is an easy way to
swap contacts between people.
| | 03:54 | There are other ways to get your
contacts out of Contacts, and that is to
| | 03:57 | choose File, Export.
| | 04:00 | You can export as a vCard,
I'll save that to the desktop.
| | 04:07 | There's my vCard file, and this vCard file
includes all of my contacts, not just a single contact.
| | 04:12 | Or I can take a contact and drag it
to the desktop, and that's a single
| | 04:18 | vCard just for Joe Blow.
| | 04:20 | If I want to take contacts and copy
them to another Mac, I can choose Export,
| | 04:26 | Contacts Archive, Save, and it saves it
as an archive file that I can use with
| | 04:33 | another copy of Contacts
on another Mac that I have.
| | 04:36 | Let's go up to Preferences for
just a second and look at Accounts.
| | 04:43 | This window includes any
accounts that you're using with Contacts.
| | 04:46 | This is something that I've already
set up in Mail, Contacts & Calendars.
| | 04:50 | So I have my iCloud account, my Facebook
account, and then I can also have local contacts.
| | 04:55 | If I wanted to add a different
account, I click on plus, I can choose the
| | 05:00 | kind of account I'm going to use,
enter a user name, password, and then a
| | 05:04 | server address, if I'm using a
CardDAV file, which is another protocol for
| | 05:09 | sharing contacts across the internet,
or I can choose Exchange and you have A
| | 05:14 | different kind of setup.
| | 05:15 | Click on Create and that account
will then appear in my list of accounts.
| | 05:21 | Contacts has some othe,r more obscure
talents that beyond the scope of this course.
| | 05:25 | What you've learned here serves the
vast majority of your Contacts needs.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Tracking your tasks with Reminders| 00:00 | Mountain Lion introduces another
application that's already found on iOS devices,
| | 00:04 | and it's called Reminders.
| | 00:06 | Reminders, as the name implies, is
Mountain Lion's to-do application.
| | 00:10 | Yes, you could create to-do's in the old iCal.
| | 00:13 | But the feature was hidden
and not terribly capable.
| | 00:16 | Having them in their own
application is a step in the right direction.
| | 00:20 | So let's take a look.
| | 00:21 | Go down to the Dock and I'll choose
Reminders, and here are my reminders.
| | 00:26 | On the left side are projects.
| | 00:29 | On the right are my reminders.
| | 00:31 | If I'd like to create a new reminder,
I have a couple of ways to do it.
| | 00:35 | One, I could click on the plus button.
Otherwise, I can simply click on a line
| | 00:39 | and add the reminder.
| | 00:41 | So I've entered my reminder.
| | 00:43 | And now there's an info button, and let's click on
that to configure the reminder. Here's the name.
| | 00:48 | I can have it choose to remind me on a
particular day, and I can also choose a
| | 00:53 | location, and this is very powerful.
| | 00:57 | If you have location services turned on
at this point, it may ask you if you'd
| | 01:02 | like to use your current location.
| | 01:03 | I don't have location services turned on
at this point so I've skipped that warning.
| | 01:07 | But don't be surprised if you see it,
if location is working on your Mac.
| | 01:11 | Because it can't use my current location, how
about if I just enter some address I make up.
| | 01:16 | So let's see. What do you know?
| | 01:19 | That's in Contacts. Okay.
| | 01:20 | I can have this reminder go off when
I'm leaving this location or when I am
| | 01:24 | arriving at that location.
| | 01:26 | Well, swell, Chris, you say, what good is that?
| | 01:28 | I don't happen to have my Mac with
me when I'm out and about visiting
| | 01:32 | this mythical location.
| | 01:34 | You don't, but you do have your iPhone
with you, and that's the best part about this.
| | 01:39 | This will sync with your iPhone.
| | 01:41 | So when you're leaving this location,
a little reminder will pop up on your
| | 01:44 | iPhone and say, "By the
way, eat your vegetables."
| | 01:48 | Location-based reminders are very,
very cool and something you should take
| | 01:52 | advantage of if you have an iPhone.
| | 01:54 | These don't work on other iOS
devices but they do work on an iPhone.
| | 01:59 | You can choose when to repeat this,
everyday, a week, two weeks, month, or a year.
| | 02:04 | You can assign it a priority if you like.
| | 02:06 | So we'll make this a medium priority and
you can add notes to it, and click on Done.
| | 02:12 | When I do that, because I made it of
medium importance, couple of exclamation
| | 02:16 | marks, tells me what the details
are of this in an easy to see format.
| | 02:21 | So what happens when I
completed the task? Simple enough.
| | 02:24 | Click on the box next to it. It disappears.
| | 02:27 | But where did it go?
| | 02:29 | It's in my completed reminders. And
here it is, "Eat my vegetables" along with
| | 02:33 | the other things that I've already completed.
| | 02:36 | Now I can create other projects as well
and to do so, I click on the plus button
| | 02:41 | below the projects area, and here's my new list.
| | 02:47 | Here's my list here, and those are the
two important things I need to do for
| | 02:53 | my upcoming vacation.
| | 02:54 | Now notice this little broadcast icon here.
| | 02:57 | This is because my
reminders are synced with iCloud.
| | 03:00 | So these reminders are now being sent
out to all my iOS devices and my other
| | 03:04 | Macintoshes that happen to
be using the iCloud service.
| | 03:08 | If you like, you can also create
reminders that are tied to a specific date.
| | 03:12 | Click on the Calendar icon.
| | 03:16 | Let's say one for December 25th.
| | 03:18 | I believe that is a traditional
reminder on the 25th of December.
| | 03:24 | And also, of course, there's a search
field at the top of the window.
| | 03:28 | If you're looking for a specific
reminder, just type in the keyword and the
| | 03:32 | reminder will appear to the right.
| | 03:33 | And with that, you can take Learn about
Reminders off your things-to-do list.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Staying in touch using Messages| 00:00 | Messages under Mountain Lion takes
the place of Apple's previous instant
| | 00:04 | messaging client, iChat.
| | 00:06 | It offers not only the ability to
conduct text chats, but also audio and video
| | 00:10 | chats. Plus, with it, you can share
and control another person's screen.
| | 00:15 | So here's the tour.
| | 00:16 | Go down the Dock and I'll click on
Messages, and here is our Messages window.
| | 00:23 | So here's the main Messages window,
where you can keep track of who you're
| | 00:27 | conversing with, and then the
contents of your conversation.
| | 00:30 | In this case, I have a buddy list, or
Bonjour List, because that's how we're
| | 00:34 | communicating, over here
that indicates my status.
| | 00:37 | So I can say I'm available.
| | 00:39 | I can put myself offline.
| | 00:40 | I could say I'm away if I want to,
and it's perfectly okay to lie about
| | 00:45 | this stuff if you want.
| | 00:46 | If you just don't want to be bothered, put
up Away and then people won't bother you.
| | 00:50 | But I'll make myself available.
| | 00:52 | Now to use Messages, you
must have an account tied to it.
| | 00:56 | If you've created an iCloud account,
that can be one of these accounts,
| | 00:59 | though you can also use it
with services that support chat.
| | 01:03 | These include AIM, Yahoo!,
Google Talk, and Jabber.
| | 01:07 | If you'd like to add an account, just
go to Messages Preferences, click the
| | 01:13 | Accounts tab, and then click the plus button.
| | 01:16 | Under account type, you'll see
the accounts that are supported.
| | 01:19 | Choose the one you want.
| | 01:20 | Enter your username and password,
click on Done, and you'll add that account.
| | 01:26 | Now, let's start at text chat. And I
think we'll talk to my good buddy, Ian.
| | 01:31 | So I'll double click on Ian, and let me
send a little message. And you hear the
| | 01:39 | sound when I send my message.
| | 01:40 | You see his icon with the little
dots indicating that he's typing.
| | 01:45 | I'll reply, and not only will I reply
with a word, but I could also put a little
| | 01:52 | smiley on it, and there's my little smiley face.
| | 01:56 | The behavior of Messages differs
depending on what kind of service you're using.
| | 02:01 | So for example, here in Bonjour,
I'm not allowed to add buddies.
| | 02:04 | If I were using an AIM account however,
I could go to the Buddies list and I could
| | 02:09 | choose Add Buddy and add buddies that way.
| | 02:11 | If I were using iCloud, what I would
see up here in the top of this window is
| | 02:17 | a little plus button.
| | 02:18 | I can click on plus, and then I will
see all the contacts within my Contacts
| | 02:23 | application and I can add people in
that way, and these are people who have some
| | 02:27 | kind of Instant Messaging account.
| | 02:29 | Now, let's say I want to conduct a video chat.
| | 02:32 | Well, here's Ian again, and look at the bottom.
| | 02:34 | This means text, audio,
video, and screen sharing.
| | 02:40 | I'm going to start a video chat.
| | 02:42 | This activates my camera.
| | 02:44 | Here I am in my studio, and I'll just
wait for Ian to respond. And there's Ian.
| | 02:53 | Ian how are you doing?
| | 02:55 | Good. Hey, Chris.
| | 02:56 | Okay.
| | 02:56 | So again, man of few words.
| | 02:59 | I want to do more than just video chat with him.
| | 03:01 | I'd also like to share a presentation with him.
| | 03:04 | So I have a presentation file on my desktop.
| | 03:06 | I can grab it and drag it
in, and I have two options.
| | 03:10 | One, I can send this as a file to
Ian, or I can share it with Theater.
| | 03:16 | So, I'll drag it in there.
| | 03:17 | This will launch keynote on my Mac.
| | 03:22 | And now, I can show Ian my presentation.
| | 03:25 | So here he is in the corner.
| | 03:26 | When he's looking at me,
he sees me in this corner.
| | 03:30 | And now, I can run through my
presentation using these presentation controls,
| | 03:36 | and he can see everything I'm doing.
| | 03:38 | So this is a great way to do remote presentations.
| | 03:43 | I'll stop doing that.
| | 03:45 | We'll quit out of keynote.
| | 03:47 | And now, I'm going to say, "Bye."
| | 03:50 | And we're done with the video chat.
| | 03:56 | Now, it's not only
presentations that you can share.
| | 03:58 | I could drag a web page in here.
| | 04:00 | It would launch Safari and then he
would be able to see that web page.
| | 04:03 | Now, one of the most powerful
things you can do with Messages is to
| | 04:07 | share someone's screen.
| | 04:08 | This is very useful when you're
troubleshooting someone else's computer or you
| | 04:12 | need them to troubleshoot yours.
| | 04:14 | The beauty of this is that not only
can you see their screen remotely, but you
| | 04:18 | can also control their computer.
| | 04:20 | If your dad is in Iowa and you're in
Florida, you can start a chat with your
| | 04:24 | dad, make the screen sharing
connection, do what needs doing and then give
| | 04:28 | control back to them.
| | 04:29 | I'm going to try this with Ian as well.
| | 04:31 | So I'm going to ask to share his screen.
| | 04:34 | He'll see a little message on his
screen, which you'll have to click on, and then
| | 04:38 | I'll be able to see his screen.
| | 04:41 | I hear a little sound, and here is Ian's screen.
| | 04:44 | Now check this out.
| | 04:47 | I have control of his screen. I'm doing this.
| | 04:49 | He is not doing it.
| | 04:50 | And again, imagine how powerful this
can be if you're doing this with somebody
| | 04:57 | who has no idea how to run their Mac and all.
| | 04:59 | They're calling you in the middle of the night
saying, "I can't get this to work, please help me."
| | 05:04 | All you have to do is get them onto
Messages, share their screen, and you can
| | 05:08 | conduct the repairs remotely.
| | 05:10 | This is a wonderful thing.
| | 05:12 | I use it with a lot of people and you
should definitely try this feature out.
| | 05:16 | Now, I'll go back to my screen.
| | 05:19 | And now we're back on my screen.
| | 05:22 | I'll click this x, and we stop screen sharing.
| | 05:25 | There are some additional subtleties
to Messages, but you've got the idea.
| | 05:29 | It's an easy way to engage in a quick,
or long if you like, chat with your pals,
| | 05:34 | share files and presentations,
and control another Mac remotely.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
7. Key Productivity AppsTracking your documents in TextEdit| 00:01 | TextEdit is Apple's text editing application.
| | 00:03 | While it's not a full-blown word
processing application like Apple's Pages or
| | 00:08 | Microsoft Word, it has a surprising amount of
power for a free text editor. Let's take a look.
| | 00:13 | So we'll launch it from Spotlight.
| | 00:17 | I will open a document.
| | 00:20 | Again, this is one of those
applications that can store documents in the cloud,
| | 00:25 | and I'm going to open one that's in iCloud.
| | 00:28 | So as you can see, TextEdit looks a
little bit like a word processor from the
| | 00:32 | early 1990s, but it has a lot of
capabilities of a standard word processor.
| | 00:37 | For example, I can change the font,
and within that font, I can change it
| | 00:45 | to supported styles.
| | 00:46 | So I can change to Italic, Bold, or BoldItalic.
| | 00:53 | I can also change the font size, make it big.
| | 00:58 | I can change the font color.
| | 01:02 | I can change the
highlighting, if I like, behind it.
| | 01:08 | And we'll get rid of that because that's a
little distracting, and also change the
| | 01:15 | font back to black.
| | 01:18 | Then you also have formatting buttons,
Bold, Italic here, and Underline.
| | 01:26 | I can change the alignment of the
entire document, I'll select it all, and now, I'm
| | 01:30 | left aligned. Here's center aligned, right
aligned, and here's justified text.
| | 01:37 | I can change the line
spacing, and I can also format lists.
| | 01:51 | By default, TextEdit
documents are in the Rich Text Format.
| | 01:54 | So that allows me to use
this kind of formatting.
| | 01:56 | However, I can change it so that it has
no formatting but instead is plain text.
| | 02:00 | Yes, I want to convert that.
| | 02:03 | Here it looks very much
like the computer text evolved.
| | 02:06 | So why would you want to
use something like this?
| | 02:08 | Well, suppose that you're formatting
your document for HTML or Markdown or some
| | 02:12 | other kind of coding.
| | 02:13 | In this case, you'd want to use plain
text rather than rich text. Or you
| | 02:18 | may be sending it to a platform that doesn't,
for some reason, support rich text formatting.
| | 02:22 | In that case, send it as plain text.
| | 02:24 | We're going to back to rich text.
| | 02:27 | Now, like some more advanced word
processing applications, TextEdit will do
| | 02:31 | spell correction for you.
| | 02:33 | Let me intentionally misspell something.
| | 02:36 | As I type and hesitate for a bit,
TextEdit will offer a suggestion.
| | 02:41 | To implement that suggestion, all I
had to do was press the spacebar and it
| | 02:46 | made the correction.
| | 02:47 | At the same time, it puts a blue line
under that, indicating that it has made
| | 02:51 | that suggestion and I have some options.
| | 02:53 | So if I were to right click on that, I
could change it back to "pickel" or I
| | 02:58 | could choose some other suggestion.
| | 02:59 | In this case, I like that fact that it
chose "pickle" and I'm going to stick with it.
| | 03:06 | If you don't care to have TextEdit change
your spelling for you, you can turn that off.
| | 03:11 | So go to Edit, Spelling and Grammar,
and then you can turn off Check Spelling
| | 03:16 | While Typing and Correct Spelling Automatically.
| | 03:18 | Let's create a new document to
show you a couple of other features.
| | 03:24 | TextEdit can create both lists and tables.
| | 03:26 | So let me create a list of some kind
that will be -- which by the way makes
| | 03:32 | an excellent sandwich. I'll select that.
| | 03:36 | I'll choose Format and then I choose List.
| | 03:40 | Then I can choose the kind
of bullet it's going to have.
| | 03:43 | So let's put check marks
before there, and now I have a list.
| | 03:48 | I can also create a table if I like.
| | 03:51 | So go to Format, Table, and then I
choose how many Rows and Columns I want.
| | 03:57 | I can also choose the alignment and I
can choose Cell Border as well as Cell
| | 04:02 | Background so I can have a
colored background. Here's my table.
| | 04:08 | You can also embed hyperlinks
that work with the document.
| | 04:11 | So I can type a web address, highlight
it, choose Add Link or press Command+K. It
| | 04:20 | adds it to the link destination box,
click on OK, and now I have a web link.
| | 04:26 | That is now clickable.
| | 04:27 | When I do that, Safari opens,
and I'm taken to the website.
| | 04:32 | I can also do this with the mailto: link.
| | 04:35 | So if I type
| | 04:36 | mailto:Chris@example.com,
highlight it, Command+K
| | 04:50 | it becomes a link.
| | 04:51 | It's underlined as such. And then again,
if I click on it, Mail will launch.
| | 04:57 | It will create a new mail message
that is addressed to that person.
| | 05:01 | You can also embed images in your document.
| | 05:03 | To do that, choose File, Attach Files,
I'll take this picture of a palm tree, Open,
| | 05:11 | expand that out, and here is my image.
| | 05:17 | If I wanted to get rid of it, I just
click on it, press Delete, and it's gone.
| | 05:21 | Let's go back to our original document.
| | 05:23 | Let me highlight a little text.
| | 05:26 | TextEdit supports Apple speech
services, so I can have it speak my text.
| | 05:34 | (Audio playing)
| | 05:45 | It only speaks that portion of
the text that I've highlighted.
| | 05:48 | If I simply start at the beginning,
it would read the entire document.
| | 05:51 | If you want to change the default
layout for your documents, you can do that
| | 05:56 | within TextEdit's Preferences.
| | 05:58 | So in a New Document, you can
make it Plain text or Rich text.
| | 06:02 | You can choose the width and the
height of your window, change your default
| | 06:06 | fonts, and then if you don't want to
have to play with the spelling and grammar
| | 06:10 | options, you can set those to defaults as well.
| | 06:13 | Before we go, let's see what
you can do with TextEdit services.
| | 06:17 | So let's highlight some text, go to the
TextEdit menu, choose Services, and see
| | 06:21 | what kind of options we have.
| | 06:23 | One of the things we can do is we
can turn this into a spoken track.
| | 06:27 | So I showed you how this document
could be read to you, but you can also make
| | 06:31 | that a transcription and
save it as an audio file.
| | 06:34 | If you choose Make New Sticky Note, it
will take that text and turn it into a
| | 06:39 | sticky. And you can also capture
selection from the screen, and on and on.
| | 06:47 | These are all contextual.
| | 06:48 | So these options may change depending
on what you've done with the document.
| | 06:53 | We're going to talk a lot more about
services when we discuss Automator.
| | 06:57 | And that's largely everything you need to know
about TextEdit, Apple's not-so-basic text editor.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Looking up words in Dictionary| 00:00 | Now let's take a look at Dictionary, which we
will launch via Spotlight. And here's Dictionary.
| | 00:07 | Now we've seen evidence of it in
Spotlight as we've defined words, and it will
| | 00:11 | also occasionally help us with
misspelled words in applications such TextEdit.
| | 00:16 | It's fairly intuitive.
| | 00:17 | All you have to do is type the word
you're looking for in the Search field.
| | 00:21 | Let's enter Spotlight.
| | 00:22 | And if you have All selected,
you'll see the various sources.
| | 00:26 | So we have Dictionary,
Thesaurus, Apple, Wikipedia.
| | 00:31 | But if I want to search a particular
resource, I can select just Dictionary and
| | 00:35 | I see the dictionary definitions here.
| | 00:38 | Thesaurus, which will show you the
synonyms and sometimes the antonyms.
| | 00:43 | Apple has its own definition for Spotlight.
| | 00:45 | It's the search technology.
| | 00:46 | We can also go to Wikipedia.
| | 00:49 | You can add other resources by
clicking on Dictionary and then
| | 00:52 | choosing Preferences.
| | 00:53 | For example, if I wanted the Oxford
Thesaurus of English, I select it and then
| | 00:59 | that appears here as another resource.
| | 01:01 | Down at the bottom, you can look at
pronunciation, U.S. English Diacritical
| | 01:06 | or U.S. English (IPA).
| | 01:08 | If you're in another country,
these options will be different.
| | 01:11 | Now, handy as the Dictionary is, you
don't need to open it in many cases.
| | 01:16 | So let's quit Dictionary.
| | 01:17 | I'll launch TextEdit.
| | 01:18 | I'll create a new document.
| | 01:24 | I'll select the word I want to define
and press Control+Command+D. It turns the
| | 01:31 | board yellow and up pops the definition.
| | 01:35 | Optionally, I can select the word,
TextEdit > Services, and under Searching,
| | 01:41 | choose Look Up in Dictionary.
| | 01:44 | This launches the Dictionary
application, and I get my definition.
| | 01:47 | And that's Dictionary, generally more
helpful as a service that's available to other
| | 01:52 | applications, but offered as a
separate application as well.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Keeping notes with Notes| 00:00 | Notes is yet another iOS application
that has made its way to Mountain Lion.
| | 00:04 | However, unlike the mobile version
of Notes, and Apple's long in the tooth
| | 00:08 | Stickies application, this version of Notes
is reasonably versatile. Let's take a look.
| | 00:13 | I'll launch it from Spotlight and here's Notes.
| | 00:18 | If you've used notes on an iOS
device, this looks familiar to you.
| | 00:22 | Along the left side is the list of your
Notes, and select a note, and its contents
| | 00:26 | appears to the right.
| | 00:29 | However, you can also expand it to include
any accounts that have notes attached to them.
| | 00:34 | So on this computer, I have an iCloud
account set up as well as a Gmail account
| | 00:38 | and both of them support notes.
| | 00:41 | Basically, these are the IMAP email
accounts that you set up in Mail,
| | 00:44 | Contacts & Calendars.
| | 00:46 | Unlike other Mountain Lion applications,
Notes uses IMAP to transfer notes from
| | 00:51 | device to device, rather than iCloud syncing.
| | 00:53 | Within this list, you can select an account.
| | 00:57 | So for example, I'll select my
iCloud account, and you can see what notes
| | 01:02 | that account contains.
| | 01:04 | You can additionally create folders.
| | 01:06 | So from the File menu, choose New Folder,
and then you can file your notes within
| | 01:13 | that folder, and there it is.
| | 01:16 | But you notice that it's not
in Important Notes or in Notes.
| | 01:20 | However, if I choose all iCloud, I
can see all my notes regardless of where
| | 01:24 | they're filed within that account.
| | 01:26 | I can go to my Gmail account and look
at its notes, and here's a different note.
| | 01:30 | If I choose All Notes, I can see all my notes.
| | 01:33 | If you like, you can
move notes between accounts.
| | 01:36 | So here's my Gmail account, I'll grab
this note, and I can move it into iCloud.
| | 01:41 | So I'll put that into My
Favorite Notes for iCloud.
| | 01:44 | It disappears from Gmail.
| | 01:46 | However, it is now in iCloud.
| | 01:48 | Composing a note is
pretty much what you'd expect.
| | 01:51 | All we have to do is click on the plus
button, and I have a new note off to the side.
| | 01:57 | The date and the time
appear in the top right corner.
| | 01:59 | Then you just type something.
| | 02:02 | The first few words that you add to
the note will appear as the title of the
| | 02:05 | note, and then just add to your note.
| | 02:09 | But there's more than
just text that you can add.
| | 02:12 | For instance, I'll launch Safari.
| | 02:13 | I'll go to website.
| | 02:20 | I can take that website's
icon and drag it into my note.
| | 02:23 | When I do that, that becomes a clickable link.
| | 02:28 | Also, I can drag files into my note if I like.
| | 02:33 | So I'll go to My Documents folder.
| | 02:35 | I have a PDF file here.
| | 02:37 | Let's find a place for it.
| | 02:41 | I'll drag that in, and here's the PDF file.
| | 02:45 | If I double click on it, it will
launch and it will open up in Preview.
| | 02:48 | And when this note syncs to any of my
other Macs, all those elements will
| | 02:52 | appear in the note.
| | 02:53 | However, when these notes are synced to an
iOS device, those attachments don't work.
| | 02:59 | So for instance, this PDF file, what
you'll see on an iOS device instead is a
| | 03:04 | little paperclip icon, which
is simply an illustration.
| | 03:07 | You can click on it until
doomsday and nothing will happen.
| | 03:11 | Notes, like some other Mountain Lion
applications, includes a Share button, and here it is.
| | 03:15 | So we click on Share, and it tells me
that I can share this note via email, or I
| | 03:20 | can use the Message application,
which I talk about in another movie.
| | 03:24 | Finally, if you'd like a note to appear
in a single window, simply double-click
| | 03:29 | on it, and it appears in its own
little window, which you can leave on your
| | 03:34 | desktop and add to later if you care to.
| | 03:37 | However, unlike with a Sticky,
you can't pin it to your desktop.
| | 03:41 | So if I were to quit Notes, which
I'll do now, the note disappears.
| | 03:46 | And that's Notes in a nutshell.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Working with images in Preview| 00:00 | Mountain Lion's Preview application
serves not only is a way to view graphics
| | 00:04 | and PDF files, but also as a light editor.
| | 00:07 | We'll begin our look at Preview by
examining how it works with image files.
| | 00:11 | So to do this I'm going to go to my
Documents folder, and I'll double click on an
| | 00:17 | image, and automatically that
image will open by default in Preview.
| | 00:22 | Now the Tool bar includes the kind of
tools that you want to use most commonly,
| | 00:28 | and that includes zoom tools.
| | 00:29 | So zoom in, zoom out.
| | 00:34 | If you want to share this, click on the
Share button, you can email it, you can
| | 00:38 | send it through a Message.
| | 00:39 | You can AirDrop between computers, post
it on Twitter, post it on Facebook, post
| | 00:44 | it on Flickr, or you can add it to iPhoto.
| | 00:47 | You can also rotate your images, and
you can annotate them, and here's the
| | 00:53 | annotation button, so click on that.
| | 00:55 | Once you do that you have a variety of tools.
| | 00:58 | First one is a rectangle.
| | 00:59 | So if I wanted to call something out, I
can draw a rectangle like that, and if I
| | 01:03 | choose to, I can change the
thickness of the line around it.
| | 01:07 | We're going to undo all this
to get rid of the rectangle.
| | 01:15 | I can also draw an oval.
| | 01:21 | I can create a line.
| | 01:22 | Let's make these lines a
little bit bigger so can see.
| | 01:29 | I could choose to create an arrow.
| | 01:32 | Choose the arrow style.
| | 01:39 | I can add a text box.
| | 01:46 | I can add a text bubble.
| | 01:51 | Click outside and I can get
rid of it by selecting it.
| | 01:54 | I can make a little dream bubble
if I like, and we'll get rid of that.
| | 02:06 | And then I can choose the fonts that
I use within these bubbles or within
| | 02:10 | some kind of text box.
| | 02:14 | You can also choose a
variety of selection styles.
| | 02:20 | So I can select this area, and I might
want to copy this, for example, and then I
| | 02:27 | can choose New from Clipboard, and I
have just that area that I highlighted. And
| | 02:32 | no, I don't want to save it.
| | 02:37 | You can do the same kind of
things except now you have an oval or
| | 02:42 | round selection tool.
| | 02:44 | Copy, New from Clipboard, and
you can also choose a lasso style.
| | 02:54 | So I wanted to just select this portion
of the flower, I can do that then Copy
| | 03:00 | that bit, New from
Clipboard, and there's that clip.
| | 03:06 | Now this is a pretty rough selection.
| | 03:08 | Fortunately there are some tools built in
that help you create a better selection.
| | 03:13 | So with this Outliner Tool I
can make a much broader selection.
| | 03:18 | Again I'm going to draw it very
roughly here. And when the points meet and I'd
| | 03:26 | let go, now I've got my selection.
| | 03:28 | This is much closer than what I selected with
Lasso Tool. Or you can create an alpha mask.
| | 03:34 | So I'll click somewhere I'll just start
highlighting this yellow color, and I'm
| | 03:38 | doing this by dragging a
little bit to the right.
| | 03:41 | If I continue doing that, you notice
that it selects more of the colors as it
| | 03:44 | goes outside that yellow spectrum, but I'll
drag back to the left, grab just the yellow.
| | 03:54 | Now that yellow is selected, so I'll
copy that, New from Clipboard, and you see I
| | 04:01 | have a much better outline,
just using this simple tool.
| | 04:05 | I'll get rid of that.
| | 04:06 | I can also crop if I like, so I'll
click this off, go back to the Rectangle
| | 04:11 | Selection Tool, and now I can crop the image.
| | 04:13 | I'll undo that. And if I like I can
also change the color, very much like iPhoto.
| | 04:22 | So bring in some Highlights, I can
change the Exposure, bright, darker,
| | 04:29 | change the Contrast.
| | 04:34 | Blow up the Highlights, blow up the
Shadows, change Saturation, change the
| | 04:40 | Color Temperature, Tint, make it old
fashioned-looking, kind of like that, and I can
| | 04:48 | change the Sharpness.
| | 04:50 | To get rid of that just Reset All
and you're back to your original image.
| | 04:52 | There are some helpful
things in the Tools menu as well.
| | 04:56 | First, you can show the Magnifier, and
this gives you a chance to look at the
| | 05:01 | details of your images.
| | 05:02 | We've already looked at Adjust Color, but
you can also adjust the size of your image.
| | 05:08 | So as you can see this is quite a large
image, but I can change it so, we'll make
| | 05:13 | this instead, say, 10 inches wide, and click on OK.
| | 05:20 | So if you need to quickly resize an
image you can do that with Preview. And if
| | 05:24 | you have a lot of different images
open, you can view them as a Slideshow.
| | 05:29 | I have just the one image here so I
don't need to do that, but you can if you
| | 05:32 | want, or you can choose to Enter Full Screen.
| | 05:35 | Finally, you can also use Preview to
change the image format, so choose
| | 05:42 | File and then Export.
| | 05:45 | Currently, I have a JPEG, but
I can use a different format.
| | 05:48 | So I can change this to a PDF, a PNG, a
TIFF file, or a couple of other different
| | 05:53 | file formats. And we'll cancel out.
| | 05:56 | Again, as with TextEdit, Apple packs
a reasonable amount of power into a
| | 06:01 | seemingly simple application.
| | 06:04 | You can try these tricks with your
image files as well, but we're not quite
| | 06:08 | done with Preview yet.
| | 06:09 | In another movie, I'll show
what Preview can do with PDF files.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Working with PDFs in Preview| 00:00 | Mountain Lion's Preview, like Preview
in Lion and Snow Leopard before it, can
| | 00:04 | work with PDF files as well as image files.
| | 00:07 | Now let's look at what
it can do with those PDFs.
| | 00:09 | This time I'm going to launch it from
Spotlight, and when I do you'll notice that
| | 00:15 | this is one of those
applications that is compatible with iCloud.
| | 00:19 | If I had any Preview-compatible files
they would appear in this window here.
| | 00:24 | In this case, I'm going to
grab a PDF file from my Mac.
| | 00:27 | I'll go to my Documents folder, and I
will select this PDF file here and then
| | 00:32 | open it. And here's my PDF.
| | 00:35 | In the case of PDFs, I like to show
thumbnails so that I can see thumbnails of
| | 00:40 | the pages that are part of the PDF file.
| | 00:42 | You have other View Options, you can
also look at the Table of Contents if we
| | 00:46 | had one, Highlights and Notes, I don't
have any yet, or I can look at it as a
| | 00:51 | Contact Sheet. And here are my Thumbnails.
| | 00:55 | Now just as when we were looking at
images, you some basic tools in the toolbar,
| | 01:00 | so I can zoom in and out, and I can share.
| | 01:04 | Now in this case, because I don't have
photos, I can't share them to a photo
| | 01:08 | service such as Flickr,
instead I have more limited options.
| | 01:11 | I can share it to Email, Message, or
through AirDrop. And as with the images,
| | 01:17 | you can rotate pages as well.
| | 01:19 | You can also annotate, and that's
where the real power is with PDF files.
| | 01:24 | As I showed you with images, you can
highlight things, make call outs by drawing
| | 01:28 | rectangles or circles.
| | 01:31 | You can add lines, arrows, text boxes,
little dialogue boxes, and a little
| | 01:36 | thought cloud if you want.
| | 01:38 | Choose the Text Selection Tool and you
can also select Text, at which point I
| | 01:43 | could then copy that text, open TextEdit,
and paste that text into that, or I
| | 01:49 | can paste it into a word processor.
| | 01:50 | What I can't do is create a
new Preview file using this text.
| | 01:57 | There's also the Selection Tool, so I
can select some text, I can then crop it
| | 02:03 | and see just that text on the page.
| | 02:05 | Now one of the marquee features of
Preview and PDFs is you have the ability to
| | 02:11 | capture a signature and then
append it to your document.
| | 02:14 | So for example, it may be that you've
downloaded a tax form from somewhere, or
| | 02:18 | some other kind of business form, and you need
to sign this thing with your real signature.
| | 02:22 | Well, how do you do that?
| | 02:24 | In the old days, we would scan it and
then we would sign it and then we'd scan
| | 02:28 | it again, it was a big pain.
| | 02:30 | What you can do now within Preview
is they have the Signature Option.
| | 02:33 | Now if your Mac has a camera and this
one unfortunately doesn't, you can write
| | 02:38 | out your signature, hold
it in front of the camera.
| | 02:42 | Your Mac will take a picture of that
signature and it will know what's the
| | 02:45 | signature and what's the paper, and
then it will store that signature.
| | 02:48 | Later on when you find the signature
field in a PDF file, you can attach
| | 02:53 | that signature to it.
| | 02:54 | Once you save your document, that
signature is then appended to the file ready
| | 02:59 | for you to send off.
| | 03:00 | Now let's talk about Import. If you go
to the File menu, you notice that there
| | 03:05 | is no Import command. So how exactly do you
add pages to your PDF document if you want to?
| | 03:10 | Well, let's take a look.
| | 03:11 | I'll go to the Finder, I'll
choose my Documents folder.
| | 03:15 | I have another PDF file here.
| | 03:17 | Now let's say that I'd like to add this
PDF file to the middle of the current one.
| | 03:21 | All I have to do is drag and drop, and
when I do that, the pages that are within
| | 03:27 | that PDF file are now part of this PDF file.
| | 03:31 | So it used to be four
pages, and now it's eight pages.
| | 03:35 | One other thing you can do, instead of
having multiple windows for multiple PDF
| | 03:39 | files, is you could see them all in a
single window. And to do that, I'll take the
| | 03:43 | same PDF file, just drag it above the
dividing line, and here's your PDF file.
| | 03:51 | Click the arrow and I can see its
individual pages, and I can also hide them.
| | 03:56 | So this is an easier way to see
multiple documents within a single window.
| | 04:00 | One more thing before we leave, you can
also insert a blank page between pages.
| | 04:06 | This is one way that you can separate
important pages from others. To do that, go
| | 04:10 | to the Edit menu, Insert, Blank Page.
| | 04:14 | Also, if you happen to have a scanner
nearby, you can Insert a page from a
| | 04:18 | scanner or you can add a page from another file.
| | 04:21 | So this isn't exactly Import, but
it's the same kind of idea. And that's
| | 04:25 | Preview and PDFs.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Installing fonts with Font Book| 00:00 | With Mountain Lion comes a
collection of fonts, or types faces, for both
| | 00:04 | viewing and printing.
| | 00:05 | Apple has offered an application called,
Font Book for organizing these fonts
| | 00:09 | in the last few iterations of the Mac OS.
| | 00:11 | Mountain Lion is no different.
| | 00:13 | Here's how Font Book shakes out.
| | 00:14 | We'll launch it from Spotlight,
and here is the Font Book window.
| | 00:20 | Now, fonts are stored in a
variety of locations on your Mac.
| | 00:24 | They are in the system and library
folders at the root level of your hard
| | 00:28 | drive, and within the fonts folder, inside the
library folder, which is inside your user folder.
| | 00:32 | Now in the olden days, you'd drag fonts
out of a designated fonts folder or
| | 00:37 | disable them, but you now no
longer have to, thanks to Font Book.
| | 00:41 | Here, you see all the fonts that are
available to you, and as you can see, we
| | 00:44 | have lots and lots of fonts on this Mac.
| | 00:47 | Now, let's select a font, like Academy
Engraved, and you see it have various views.
| | 00:54 | The first one is a sample, so you
can see what the font looks like.
| | 00:58 | The next is Repertoire, to show you the
characters that are within the font. And
| | 01:03 | then there's Custom.
| | 01:04 | Finally, there's an Info button that
tells you all you need to know and a whole
| | 01:09 | lot more about that font.
| | 01:11 | You can also view fonts by collections.
| | 01:13 | Mountain Lion has some collections built
in that are grouped logically together.
| | 01:17 | So for example, here are some fun fonts. There!
| | 01:21 | That's fun.
| | 01:22 | Marker Felt, that's really fun.
| | 01:26 | Papyrus is moderately fun, and
this doesn't look fun at all.
| | 01:29 | Actually it looks quite formal.
| | 01:31 | Modern, PDF, as you see, as you
choose different collections, you get a
| | 01:36 | different variety of
fonts within that collection.
| | 01:39 | Again, these are taken from all
the fonts that you have on your Mac.
| | 01:43 | You can disable fonts if you
like, something you might do
| | 01:46 | if a font appears to be a source of
problems on your Mac. To do that, select the font,
| | 01:51 | let's say American Typewriter, go to the
Edit menu, and then disable that family of fonts.
| | 02:00 | Confirm that you want to do it and
you'll see that it says Off next to it.
| | 02:04 | Now, if I want to enable a disabled family,
I select Enable and they're back on again.
| | 02:10 | Now it's possible to install duplicate fonts,
| | 02:13 | and doing so isn't always a great
idea because it can lead to conflicts.
| | 02:17 | So to find out if you have any
duplicates, go to the Edit menu and choose Look
| | 02:21 | for Enabled Duplicates.
| | 02:23 | In this case, I have none.
| | 02:26 | So, how am I supposed to show you what happens?
| | 02:28 | Well, let's duplicate some.
| | 02:29 | So, I will go into my Library folder,
into the Fonts folder, and let's duplicate
| | 02:36 | the American Typewriter.
| | 02:38 | So I'll hold on the Option key to duplicate
it, drag it, and now I have a duplicate.
| | 02:42 | And we'll close that out.
| | 02:44 | Notice, that when I do this,
a yellow triangle appears.
| | 02:48 | So this yellow triangle
indicates that I have a problem.
| | 02:51 | So I'll click on this triangle,
select the font, and I see the option that I
| | 02:56 | can resolve this automatically
or I can resolve manually.
| | 03:00 | If I resolve automatically, what
happens is that font is then turned off and
| | 03:04 | it's no longer a problem.
| | 03:06 | So I can go through and switch
these off, and no more problems.
| | 03:14 | Another way to check for font
problems is to validate fonts.
| | 03:19 | So let's select the fonts.
| | 03:20 | We'll go to the File menu and choose
Validate Fonts. And it will go through and
| | 03:26 | it will check the fonts that I have.
| | 03:30 | Once it's checked the fonts,
you'll see a report at the bottom.
| | 03:33 | In this case, I have 22 minor
problems were found, and in this case, we're
| | 03:38 | talking about things like duplicate fonts.
| | 03:42 | So I can then select those that have a
problem, and then I can Remove Checked.
| | 03:50 | It will then remove the fonts after
I enter my Administrator's password.
| | 03:56 | I have to enter my password multiple
times because I'm dealing with multiple
| | 04:00 | fonts. And then we click on the Close button.
| | 04:03 | Finally, you can create
font collections of your own.
| | 04:06 | To do that, click on the plus button,
we'll go to All Fonts, and then you just
| | 04:13 | drag the fonts you want into your collection.
| | 04:17 | I'll select my collection and
there are the fonts that I dragged in.
| | 04:20 | So, how is that reflected?
| | 04:22 | Well, let's go to TextEdit.
| | 04:23 | I'll create a new document.
| | 04:27 | Go to Font, Show Fonts, and here's my
fonts collection. And it's as easy as that.
| | 04:35 | A that's Font Book, a way to
troubleshoot font problems, as well as create
| | 04:40 | custom font collections.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Posting a note in Stickies| 00:00 | I'm not a particularly tidy person,
but the one sloppy habit I simply can't
| | 00:05 | develop, is slathering my
monitor with sticky notes.
| | 00:09 | Fortunately, thanks to Mountain
Lion's Stickies, I don't need to.
| | 00:14 | There's Stickies, and you see by default,
two sticky notes. And this is basically
| | 00:18 | Apple's way of saying, "Hey, here's how
you use Stickies," but you don't need to
| | 00:21 | read it because I'm going to tell you how to.
| | 00:23 | As its name implies, Stickies is an
application for creating virtual sticky notes.
| | 00:28 | So, let's make a new one.
| | 00:29 | I'll press Command+N, and there's my
sticky, and all I have to do is just type
| | 00:33 | into it, and there is my note.
| | 00:38 | If you like, you can change the font,
and Show Fonts, and this gives you all the
| | 00:42 | font selections that you
have in any application.
| | 00:47 | You can also add links, click
Okay, and there you have a live link.
| | 00:56 | You don't have to include just text.
| | 00:58 | You can drag image files, including
PDFs, into a sticky note, and you can also
| | 01:03 | copy and paste text into a sticky.
| | 01:06 | To keep your Stickies front and center,
choose Note, and then choose Floating Window.
| | 01:12 | Your sticky will continue to float
above other applications, even if you hide
| | 01:16 | those other applications.
| | 01:18 | So, let's launch TextEdit, and if this
is doing its job, it will now float in
| | 01:27 | front of TextEdit, even though I move
that TextEdit window around and make
| | 01:31 | that application active.
| | 01:33 | If you think it's too much trouble to
launch Stickies every time you need to
| | 01:37 | make a sticky note, you can do it from Services.
| | 01:39 | So, I'm in TextEdit now.
| | 01:41 | I've selected my text, TextEdit > Services >
Make New Sticky Note, and I've just made
| | 01:48 | a sticky note from the text within TextEdit.
| | 01:51 | Simple, efficient, and easy, that's Stickies.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding things up with Calculator| 00:00 | At one time, if you wanted to let
your geek flag fly, you packed a very
| | 00:04 | expensive scientific calculator.
| | 00:07 | Well now, if you have a Mac, there's no
need because Mountain Lion equips your
| | 00:10 | Mac with a Calculator application
that does more that meets the eye.
| | 00:15 | Let's launch it and here's what
appears to be a very simple Calculator.
| | 00:21 | On it, you can do basic math, so you can click
buttons, 89 * 63 = 5607. And I can then clear it.
| | 00:33 | So, perform basic calculations here,
using the mouse if you like, or your
| | 00:37 | trackpad, or if you have a keyboard
that has a number pad on it, you can do
| | 00:41 | your calculations there.
| | 00:45 | Now, if you don't have a number pad on
your keyboard, there's another way to do this.
| | 00:48 | Hold down the Function key, which is
marked Fn, and type in numbers using
| | 00:53 | the Alternate keys.
| | 00:55 | In this case, J, K, and L equal 1, 2,
and 3. U, I, and O equals 4, 5, and 6. And
| | 01:02 | then 7, 8, 9 are -- that's 7, 8, 9.
| | 01:06 | The question mark equals plus, the
semicolon is a minus, P equals multiply,
| | 01:12 | and 0 equals divide.
| | 01:15 | Or you can just use the number
keys at the top of your keyboard.
| | 01:19 | This is a perfectly fine little
calculator, but let's suppose you want to get a
| | 01:23 | little bit nerdier, no problem.
| | 01:25 | Go to View and choose Scientific.
| | 01:27 | Now, we're getting serious.
| | 01:30 | Now, if you don't happen to be a card
caring scientist, and not all of us are,
| | 01:35 | you can go to View and
choose instead Programmer.
| | 01:38 | Look at all those zeros.
| | 01:40 | So, you can create all the ones and zeros
you like, and before you know it, you're
| | 01:44 | a professional programmer.
| | 01:46 | Now, as it turns out, I'm neither one of
these things, so I pretty much stick with
| | 01:50 | the basic calculator.
| | 01:51 | Now, one of the calculator's less
well-known charms is its ability to
| | 01:54 | perform conversions.
| | 01:56 | So, you enter the number you want to
convert and then you choose a conversion
| | 01:59 | you want to perform.
| | 02:00 | So let's say, 100, Convert, and we'll say Length.
| | 02:07 | So, I want to convert from feet to kilometers.
| | 02:12 | So, 100 feet equals 0.03048 kilometers.
| | 02:19 | As you can see, in the Convert menu,
there are lots of conversions you can
| | 02:22 | perform, Area, Currency, Energy or
Work, Length, Power, Pressure, Speed,
| | 02:27 | Temperature, Time, Volume,
And Weights and Masses.
| | 02:30 | One of the most helpful ones
is the currency converter.
| | 02:34 | So let's say, I have a 100 US Dollars
and I want to find what that's going to
| | 02:44 | get me in Indian Rupees.
| | 02:48 | Click on Convert and
that's 3947.00012207 Rupees.
| | 02:59 | And when you choose Currency, it
will tell you when it was last updated.
| | 03:02 | Now, if this date seems out of date to
you, you can click on Update and it will
| | 03:07 | choose the most recent conversions,
and these are all coming through Yahoo!.
| | 03:12 | So, if you find yourself in a country
not your own and you want to find out
| | 03:16 | what your money buys you, and you have a
laptop with you, try using the Convert feature.
| | 03:20 | If you're connected to the internet, you
should be able to get the current rate.
| | 03:24 | Calculator has a couple of other tricks.
| | 03:26 | The first is that it can speak button
presses to you, which helps you when
| | 03:30 | you're not looking at the screen.
| | 03:32 | So go to Speech and then Speak
Button Pressed. "Speech enabled.
| | 03:38 | Clear, 78 - 21 =" but it doesn't
tell you what it actually equals.
| | 03:48 | So, what do you have to do instead,
is actually look at your computer and
| | 03:52 | say, "Oh, it equals 57."
| | 03:53 | So, it tells you the calculation, but
it won't tell you the result unless you
| | 03:57 | turn on Speak Result from the Speech menu.
| | 03:59 | Let's try that again, "Clear, 26 + 31 = 57."
| | 04:09 | Now, let's turn off Speech because
I don't really need Alex telling me
| | 04:12 | everything I'm doing with the Calculator.
| | 04:14 | The other thing you can do is Show Paper Tape.
| | 04:18 | So, if you're performing a lot of
calculations, this is a good way to keep
| | 04:22 | track to double check your work. And
if you don't want the rest of the world
| | 04:30 | knowing what you've been calculating, you can
click on Clear to get rid of those results.
| | 04:34 | Also, anything that appears in the
paper tape can be copied and pasted into
| | 04:39 | another application.
| | 04:40 | And that's Calculator, another
small, yet valuable tool bundled with
| | 04:44 | Mountain Lion.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Organizing apps with Launchpad| 00:00 | If the first Apple product you used was
an iOS device, meaning an iPad, an iPod
| | 00:06 | Touch, or an iPhone, the Mac's
interface may seem a little unfamiliar to you.
| | 00:11 | What is familiar to you is seeing apps
on a screen somewhere that you can tap
| | 00:17 | or click and they automatically launch.
| | 00:18 | Well, with Lion before and now with
Mountain Lion, Apple offers a similar
| | 00:23 | interface, and that's called, Launchpad.
| | 00:26 | There are a couple of ways to launch Launchpad.
| | 00:28 | One is to bring your cursor down to
the Dock and click on Launchpad, or if you
| | 00:33 | have a trackpad, pinch with thumb and
three fingers and you expose the Launchpad
| | 00:39 | interface. And this works very
much as it does on an iOS device.
| | 00:44 | If you want to launch an application,
all you have to do is click on it.
| | 00:47 | So for example, if I wanted to launch
Calculator, click once, and here's Calculator.
| | 00:55 | When I launch an application,
Launchpad disappears, so let's bring it back.
| | 01:00 | So, that's pretty simple.
| | 01:03 | There are few other things you can do in here.
| | 01:05 | You can drag applications to new places,
and notice that the other applications
| | 01:11 | will get out of the way.
| | 01:12 | So, you can organize your
applications in a way that best suits you.
| | 01:15 | You can also create a
folder full of applications.
| | 01:18 | So, let's say we wanted to put
together the iLife applications.
| | 01:23 | I'll grab iDVD and I'll
drag it on top of iPhoto.
| | 01:27 | When I do that, this interface appears.
| | 01:30 | So I can click on Photography to
rename it, and I'm going to call this "iLife."
| | 01:35 | Press Return, and now I have an iLife folder.
| | 01:39 | So, let's also put GarageBand in there.
| | 01:42 | We can put iMovie in
there, and we'll put in iWeb.
| | 01:47 | Now, when I want to access one of
those applications, I simply click on the
| | 01:51 | iLife icon and then I can launch these
applications. To get out of there, click.
| | 01:57 | Now, if it turns out that I have page
after page, after page of applications,
| | 02:01 | I could move from one page to another, but an
easier way to do that is to use the Search field.
| | 02:07 | It narrows down the application I'm looking for.
| | 02:10 | I can press Return, and that
launches the application. And that's it.
| | 02:16 | Launchpad is not for everybody.
| | 02:18 | Some longtime Mac users think it's a
little too simple, but if you're coming
| | 02:22 | to the Mac from an iOS device, this
is not a bad way to launch your apps.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
8. SafariNavigating the web| 00:00 | Safari is Apple's web browser, which has
been bundled with the Mac OS for several
| | 00:04 | generations of that OS.
| | 00:06 | In this movie, we'll start by looking at how
you can navigate around the web with Safari.
| | 00:10 | Now by default, when you launch Safari
for the first time, you will see Apple's
| | 00:14 | Start page, because obviously, they'd
like you to buy some Apple stuff, but you
| | 00:18 | don't have to go to this
page if you don't want to.
| | 00:21 | So, go to Safari, go to Preferences,
and look in this area in the General tab
| | 00:25 | that reads New windows open with.
| | 00:28 | They will open with Homepage by
default and currently, Apple has defined the
| | 00:33 | homepage as their website,
but you don't have to do that.
| | 00:37 | If you like, you can navigate to another
website and then click on Set to Current Page.
| | 00:42 | And then as for these other settings,
New windows open with Homepage, you can
| | 00:46 | use something called Top Sites,
which are websites that Apple pushes to you
| | 00:50 | or ones that you visited.
| | 00:51 | So if you visit a site a lot of times,
it will appear among your top sites.
| | 00:56 | You can choose Empty Page, the Same Page
that you're on currently, or you can go
| | 01:01 | to your Bookmarks window.
| | 01:03 | For the time being,
we'll leave it as we have it.
| | 01:06 | Now, the main way to go to a website is
to use the Address bar, which is here
| | 01:12 | at the top of the window,
and just start typing a URL.
| | 01:15 | You don't have to type
http://www.
| | 01:20 | Instead, you can just type the name of the site.
| | 01:22 | So, if I type lynda.com and press Return,
I'll be taken to the lynda.com website.
| | 01:31 | With Safari 6, which is bundled with
Mountain Lion, the Address bar and Search
| | 01:35 | field are now the same thing.
| | 01:38 | So for example, let's enter Macworld,
and you see when I do that, the first list
| | 01:44 | of results is from Google Search.
| | 01:46 | So, if I were to press the Return key,
I would be taken to a Google Search page,
| | 01:51 | which would then provide me with a link
to Macworld. But what I can do instead
| | 01:55 | is choose Go to Site macworld, and
when I do that, I'm taken to macworld.com.
| | 02:04 | Now, if you like to navigate between
pages, if you have a trackpad, you just
| | 02:08 | swipe with two fingers.
| | 02:10 | So, I'll go down here to the main part
of the page, and I swipe to the right and
| | 02:14 | I go forward one page.
| | 02:16 | I'll swipe two fingers to
the left and I go back a page.
| | 02:20 | Swipe to the left again, and
once again, I go back a page.
| | 02:24 | You can also use the arrows at the top
of the window, forward, forward, back
| | 02:30 | and back, or you can use arrow keys,
that would be Command+right arrow and
| | 02:36 | Command+left arrow.
| | 02:37 | Let's go to our last page.
| | 02:39 | If you like to see where you've been
within that window, click and hold on the
| | 02:43 | back arrow, and you can navigate that way.
| | 02:46 | So, go back to that Apple Start page.
| | 02:48 | Now you're not stuck viewing one page
per window. Instead, choose View > Show Tab
| | 02:56 | Bar, and now you can start using tabs.
| | 02:59 | To add a tab, click on the plus button, and
here are Top Sites that I mentioned earlier.
| | 03:04 | So, let's go back to Macworld.
| | 03:05 | Now it's in my history once I've
been there so it automatically fills in.
| | 03:10 | I click on Macworld and I can go
between Apple's Start page and Macworld, simply
| | 03:14 | by clicking on tabs.
| | 03:15 | One other way to navigate
is to look at your history.
| | 03:21 | So go to the History menu, and near
the bottom, you can see the various sites
| | 03:26 | that you visited.
| | 03:28 | Select the one you want to visit that site.
| | 03:31 | And those are the basics of
moving around the web with Safari.
| | 03:34 | In subsequent movies, we'll look
at some of Safari's other features.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Working with bookmarks| 00:00 | Now let's look at adding and
organizing Safari's bookmark.
| | 00:03 | You don't want to have to type in the
address of a website every time you visit it.
| | 00:07 | So instead, you create a bookmark for it.
| | 00:10 | So for example, let's say we visit Google
all the time because, well, people do.
| | 00:15 | We'll go to Google.com, and I will
choose Bookmarks and then Add Bookmark.
| | 00:22 | Otherwise, I can simply type Command+D. When I
do that, I'm asked where I'd like to save it.
| | 00:29 | I have three options.
| | 00:30 | I can save it as a Top Site, I can put
it in the Bookmarks Bar, or I can put it
| | 00:35 | in the Bookmarks Menu.
| | 00:36 | I'm going to leave it as Bookmarks Bar.
| | 00:38 | If I wanted to alter the name, I could, but I
don't need to in this case so I'll click on Add.
| | 00:43 | All right, great!
| | 00:44 | So it's in the Bookmarks Bar,
but where is the Bookmarks Bar?
| | 00:48 | Well, you have to go to the View Menu and
choose Show Bookmarks Bar, and here it is.
| | 00:53 | Here's Google.
| | 00:54 | Let's see how this works.
| | 00:55 | So I'll click on Google Maps
and I'm taken to the Map site.
| | 01:00 | Let's say that I close Safari and I
later want to come back to Google.
| | 01:04 | All I have to do is click on Google in
the Bookmarks Bar and I'm taken there.
| | 01:09 | Let's go back to Maps again.
| | 01:11 | Now suppose I want to add Maps to
Bookmarks Bar, well I could do Bookmarks > Add
| | 01:16 | Bookmark, or I can simply grab the
icon and drag it into the Bookmarks Bar.
| | 01:22 | You see the plus sign indicating it will be
added, and sure enough, Google Maps is here now.
| | 01:28 | So, when I want to visit it, I just click
on Google Maps and I'm taken directly to it.
| | 01:33 | Now let's take a look at the Bookmark's window.
| | 01:36 | This is where you can see not only your
history, but also the contents of your
| | 01:40 | Bookmarks Bar and your Bookmarks Menu.
| | 01:43 | So if I click on History, I can
see the sites that I visited today.
| | 01:49 | Bookmarks Bar shows me both Google and
Google Maps, which I just added. And then my
| | 01:54 | Bookmarks Menu, I've
populated with some popular websites.
| | 01:57 | Well lets suppose I'd like to add some of
these to the Bookmarks Bar, no problem.
| | 02:02 | For example, Daring Fireball, I could
grab that, drag it to the Bookmarks Bar
| | 02:08 | folder, and it's
automatically entered in Bookmarks Bar.
| | 02:12 | But look, it's gone from Bookmarks Menu.
| | 02:15 | What if I'd like it in both places? No problem.
| | 02:18 | Choose Bookmarks Bar, hold down the
Option key, click and drag on Daring
| | 02:23 | Fireball and take it to
Bookmarks Menu. And there it is.
| | 02:30 | So now, it's also available from my menu,
as well as being in the Bookmarks Bar.
| | 02:35 | You can also organize your
Bookmarks into collections.
| | 02:38 | To do that, click on the plus button.
| | 02:40 | I'll call it My Faves, go to my
Bookmarks Menu and Lynda is my fave, and
| | 02:48 | Macworld is my fave, and the BBC is my fave,
and I'll Option-drag those into My Faves folder.
| | 02:55 | And there they are.
| | 02:56 | Well, that's reasonably handy, but I
don't really want to have to go to the
| | 03:00 | Bookmark's window just to look at a
collection of my favorite bookmarks.
| | 03:04 | So better yet, let's drag it into
the Bookmarks Bar. Grab the folder.
| | 03:08 | Drag it up to the Bookmarks Bar.
| | 03:11 | And now, My Faves are there.
| | 03:13 | The little triangle indicates that
there are websites attached to it and I can
| | 03:18 | choose the one I want.
| | 03:19 | When I do that, I'm taken to
that site. So, that's good.
| | 03:23 | Now let's click on that My Faves folder again.
| | 03:26 | Notice the Open in Tabs command.
| | 03:28 | Let's give that a go.
| | 03:30 | I select that and all
three sides open up in tabs.
| | 03:34 | But I can make it even easier.
| | 03:35 | So I close two of those tabs.
| | 03:38 | We'll go back to the Bookmark's window.
| | 03:41 | I'll choose Bookmarks Bar.
| | 03:43 | I'll select My Faves folder, and then
I select Auto-Click and turn it on.
| | 03:48 | Now, let's see how that works.
| | 03:49 | I'll go to Google for now.
| | 03:52 | Now I'll click on My Faves and when I
do that, because I have Auto-Click turned
| | 03:56 | on, it opens up any website
that's part of that collection.
| | 04:00 | So it's a quick and easy way to get all
your favorite websites up with one click.
| | 04:05 | Here's one more trick.
| | 04:06 | Go to one of your favorite websites.
| | 04:08 | Click and drag on the icon in the
address bar and drag it to the desktop.
| | 04:14 | When you do that, it turns into
something called a web location file, and I'll
| | 04:19 | show you how that works.
| | 04:20 | So I'll quit Safari.
| | 04:21 | I'll double click on that web location
file, and when I do, Safari will launch
| | 04:27 | and it will take me to that website.
| | 04:29 | So this is a very convenient way
to share websites with your friends.
| | 04:34 | Just email that or message it or send
it through some other service, so that
| | 04:38 | when they receive it, they double-click on
it and they're taken directly to that website.
| | 04:43 | And that's the wonderful world of
Bookmarks, another way to quickly navigate to
| | 04:47 | your favorite websites.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using Reading List| 00:00 | And then there's Reading List, a
feature introduced with Lion that lets you
| | 00:04 | bookmark stories for later reading.
| | 00:05 | Wait, wait, wait, bookmark?
| | 00:07 | But why not just use a Bookmark?
| | 00:09 | Well, let's take a look.
| | 00:15 | So I'm going to go to one
of my favorite websites.
| | 00:17 | Say we'll go to Macworld.
| | 00:19 | Now because I'm that kind of guy, I'm
going to select one of my own stories, and
| | 00:28 | then I'll choose Bookmarks > Add to
Reading List, and you see the little icon go
| | 00:36 | over and it appears where these glasses are.
| | 00:40 | That's Reading List.
| | 00:41 | Now if I click on those
glasses, I see my reading list.
| | 00:46 | Alternatively, you can drag a URL to that same
area and it will be added to your reading list.
| | 00:56 | Now under Lion, these entries served
only as Bookmarks, which means you could
| | 01:00 | only view their contents if
you were connected to the Internet.
| | 01:03 | Now that's not the case with
Mountain Lion's Reading List.
| | 01:06 | You can read these things
even when you're offline.
| | 01:09 | So it makes a cached copy
and it stores it on your Mac.
| | 01:13 | Plus, if you've turned on Safari's
syncing in iCloud, these pages are shared to
| | 01:17 | your other iCloud-compatible devices.
| | 01:20 | So later on, if I want to read this story,
all I have to do is click on it and it
| | 01:25 | will appear in Safari, ready for me to read.
| | 01:31 | Plus you can keep track of
what you have and haven't read.
| | 01:33 | So you can choose All, and that shows
all the stories you have, or you can
| | 01:38 | click on Unread, and that shows you
just those stories that you haven't read
| | 01:43 | all the way through.
| | 01:44 | If you like, you can clear your
stories by clicking on Clear All, or you can
| | 01:48 | delete individual stories simply by
clicking on the X. And that's pretty much all
| | 01:53 | the risk to Reading List.
| | 01:54 | It's now more helpful now that it
stores sites for offline reading, and unlike
| | 01:59 | with a Bookmark, you can get a better
idea of what you have and haven't read.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Saving web pages and creating web clips| 00:00 | Web clips are portions of web pages that
you can store in Dashboard for later browsing.
| | 00:05 | Unlike something like a picture clipping,
for example, these clips are updated
| | 00:09 | as the web page is updated.
| | 00:11 | Let's see how that works.
| | 00:12 | So we're in Safari, I
choose File > Open in Dashboard.
| | 00:16 | Now I'm provided with a selection rectangle.
| | 00:18 | I can drag my cursor over
elements that I can grab.
| | 00:23 | In this case, I'd like to grab
the hot news headlines from Apple.
| | 00:27 | To do that, I click on that area,
and you see that it's now selected.
| | 00:31 | I then click on Add, Dashboard opens, and
that content is brought into Dashboard.
| | 00:39 | Wherever is I see a live link, I can
click on it and that will open that web page.
| | 00:47 | Let's go back to Dashboard.
| | 00:49 | You can also change the theme of these things.
| | 00:51 | So, I can click on this Info button.
| | 00:54 | I can choose vintage corners, click on
Done, and now I have this very classy look.
| | 00:59 | Now, the issue you may have with some
of these things is that sometimes the
| | 01:03 | edges will obscure the
content, which isn't a great thing.
| | 01:06 | So in this case, I'm going to go back to
Glass because I could see all the content then.
| | 01:12 | If I want to get rid of this clipping,
all I have to do is hold down the Option
| | 01:15 | key, and then click on the X, and it's gone.
| | 01:19 | Again, you're going to gain the
greatest benefit from web clips by using them
| | 01:23 | with portions of web pages
that are updated fairly regularly.
| | 01:27 | So for example, you want some kind of
news site, something where information is
| | 01:31 | updated on a fairly regular basis.
| | 01:34 | This allows you to view updated
information without all the other clutter that
| | 01:37 | may fill a web page.
| | 01:39 | It's an often overlooked Safari
feature, but one that can be quite useful.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Viewing and saving PDFs| 00:00 | Safari can also open and read PDF files.
| | 00:03 | Though it's no Preview in this
regard, it natively has a few talents worth
| | 00:07 | examining, and you can add to those
talents with a simple download.
| | 00:10 | First of all, let's find a PDF file on the web.
| | 00:13 | One way to do that is to search for W-2 form.
| | 00:19 |
| | 00:22 | Here we have one from the IRS.
| | 00:24 | Now, I'll select Form W-2, and that
comes to me as a PDF file, as you can tell by
| | 00:30 | the name and of file.
| | 00:33 | And there's our form.
| | 00:35 | So if you place your cursor at the bottom
of the page, you can see some tools pop up.
| | 00:39 | First, you have zoom tools.
| | 00:40 | So, zoom in and you can zoom out.
| | 00:44 | You can also open it in Preview.
| | 00:51 | And then once in Preview,
I could print this out.
| | 00:55 | And also, there's the
option to download the form.
| | 00:58 | You can also drag PDF files
into a Safari window to open them.
| | 01:02 | So I can do that by
going to my Documents folder.
| | 01:08 | I'll select a PDF file, drag
it into Safari, and here it is.
| | 01:17 | Again, if you go to the bottom of
the window you have these same options.
| | 01:23 | So you have your zoom controls,
Preview, and then Download.
| | 01:27 | In this case, of course you don't need to
download it because you already have a copy.
| | 01:31 | If you're saying to yourself, "Gee,
that all seems kind of limited,"
| | 01:34 | you're right, it is.
| | 01:35 | But there are some other tools you
can use to enhance the PDF experience.
| | 01:39 | So for example, if you install a copy
of Adobe's free Acrobat Reader, you can
| | 01:43 | then access a PDF file in Safari
and you'll have a lot more controls.
| | 01:48 | So I'll go ahead a grab a copy now.
| | 01:50 | I'll click on my Downloads folder, open that,
I'll run the installer, and it's installed.
| | 02:04 | To be on the safe side, I'll
quit Safari, launch it again.
| | 02:13 | Let's look again for our W-2 file. Open it.
| | 02:22 | Now that the Adobe Reader is installed,
I need to agree to its terms, because
| | 02:27 | we're going to be using its inline
reader within Safari. And open it up.
| | 02:32 | Now as you see, once I've installed
Adobe Reader, I don't have those limited
| | 02:36 | tools that I had in Safari.
Instead, I have a series of other tools.
| | 02:43 | So I can expose a side bar
for exporting my PDF file.
| | 02:46 | I can also convert it to
Microsoft Word, Excel, or Rich Text Format.
| | 02:54 | I can use Adobe's Create PDF Format.
| | 03:00 | In some cases, I can sign a form electronically.
| | 03:04 | I can save it to my computer. I can print it.
| | 03:07 | I can email it.
| | 03:08 | I can navigate using these navigation controls.
| | 03:11 | I can zoom in and out, and so on.
| | 03:13 | Again, Safari's no Preview or even
Acrobat Reader, but it does provide you
| | 03:19 | with a way to view and, at the
very least, download your PDF files.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using Safari to search the web| 00:00 | In another movie we looked at the
basics of searching the web with Safari, but
| | 00:04 | there are a couple of other tricks
you can use with almost any browser.
| | 00:08 | For example, I'll go into the
combined search address field and I'll enter
| | 00:13 | Screencasting with the Mac.
| | 00:17 | I'll then press return to show Google's search
page. And you see a lot of different results.
| | 00:26 | Now I'm going to put that same search
in quotes and we'll do that search again.
| | 00:35 | This time it pulls up my very own
Screencasting with the Mac course here at lynda.com.
| | 00:40 | So what these quotes do is it forces
the search to look for the exact phase
| | 00:45 | that you've created instead of just
looking through the various words in the
| | 00:48 | phrase and then pulling up a variety of results.
| | 00:51 | You can also force a search to
include a specific word and thus narrow your
| | 00:56 | results by adding a plus to the word.
| | 00:58 | So let's go back and do Screencasting + Breen.
| | 01:07 | So note that the results include both
Screencasting and Breen, so they must
| | 01:11 | include Breen as part of the results.
| | 01:15 | You can also exclude words.
| | 01:18 | So I could have Screencast without
Breen, and see we get a bunch of different
| | 01:25 | results, and none of them include Breen.
| | 01:28 | You could also search specific sites, and to do
that, you form your search this way.
| | 01:33 | "Site:" the name of the site -- and
that would be lynda.com -- space, and then
| | 01:41 | what you're looking for.
| | 01:42 | So you notice that all
the links are to lynda.com.
| | 01:48 | So I've narrowed my search, so only the site
for lynda.com is searched for these results.
| | 01:54 | Safari also keeps track of
searches that you've recently conducted.
| | 01:57 | So to see them, remove all the text from
the address field and then click on the
| | 02:02 | magnifying glass icon, and
you'll see Recent Searches.
| | 02:04 | Again, many of these are tricks that you
can use with the browser of your choice,
| | 02:11 | and that could be Safari, or Firefox, or Chrome.
| | 02:15 | Keep them in mind, and you'll find
what you want on the web faster and
| | 02:18 | more effectively.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Opening local files in Safari| 00:00 | We know that Safari is a solid web browser,
but you can use it to open more than web pages.
| | 00:05 | You can also open some of
the local files on your Mac.
| | 00:08 | And some of this is possible because of
the plug-ins installed by default with
| | 00:12 | Safari, and you could see list of
those by going to the Help menu and then
| | 00:16 | choosing Installed Plug-ins.
| | 00:19 | So you see a variety of things that
allow you play media within Safari.
| | 00:25 | So let's try a few of those things.
| | 00:26 | I'll go to my Documents folder and I'll
grab an image and I'll drag it into Safari.
| | 00:34 | So it's an image viewer.
| | 00:35 | How about taking an audio file?
| | 00:49 | How about a video file?
| | 01:05 | So as you can see, Safari can open a
variety of media files, but it won't always
| | 01:09 | do it using the Open File command.
| | 01:13 | You can try, but as you can see, some
of them are grayed out, meaning you
| | 01:21 | can't open them up.
| | 01:22 | I've already shown you that you can
open up PDF files and in some cases you can
| | 01:26 | open text files as well.
| | 01:27 | If dragging to a page won't work, you
can also try dragging into the address bar.
| | 01:33 | That sometimes will open a file when
dragging to the main window doesn't. And
| | 01:37 | note that you cannot drag in multiple
files, so only one file per web page.
| | 01:41 | So, what good is this when you likely have
perfectly good applications to open these files?
| | 01:46 | Well, sometimes it's easier to just
drag in a file that you want to preview in
| | 01:50 | Safari, rather than going to the trouble
to open it in a separate application or
| | 01:54 | even to use Quicklook. And
that's media files within Safari.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Working with preferences in Safari| 00:00 | There's a lot of action in Safari's
preferences, and some of it can alter
| | 00:04 | your browser experience.
| | 00:06 | Let's march through preferences now.
| | 00:08 | So go to Safari and choose
Preferences. And here's the general preference.
| | 00:12 | First Safari does not have to
be your default web browser.
| | 00:16 | If you have another web browser
installed, such as Firefox, you can simply choose
| | 00:22 | that, and then when you click on a link
in another application that browser will
| | 00:26 | open instead of Safari.
| | 00:28 | I like Safari so I'll leave it as it is.
| | 00:30 | You can also choose a
different default search engine.
| | 00:33 | Google is the default but you
can also choose Yahoo! or Bing.
| | 00:37 | We've already looked at how new
windows will open, we can skip that.
| | 00:42 | You can choose when to remove your
history items. By default, it's after one year,
| | 00:47 | but you could decrease that.
| | 00:48 | So, if you're concerned about people
going through your history, you make that
| | 00:52 | after one day, after a week, two weeks,
one month, or you can do it manually.
| | 00:58 | By default, files that you download
will go to your Downloads folder, which is
| | 01:02 | in your user folder, but you can
choose a different folder if you like.
| | 01:06 | And you can also choose how to remove
downloaded items from the download list.
| | 01:12 | The default is manually, but it can be
cleared when you quit Safari, or once
| | 01:17 | something has been successfully downloaded
it can be removed from that list as well.
| | 01:25 | We looked at bookmarks earlier, so now we
can see what appears in the bookmarks bar.
| | 01:30 | By default it includes the
Reading List, which we looked at.
| | 01:33 | It also can include Top Sites.
| | 01:35 | It can include your contacts,
and it can include Bonjour.
| | 01:40 | So how does this contacts thing work?
| | 01:42 | Well, if there's anyone within the
Contacts application who has a website as
| | 01:46 | part of their contact card, when you
enable this, their website will appear in
| | 01:51 | the bookmarks bar.
| | 01:52 | And Bonjour is the zero configuration
setup, so that you can see other Macs that
| | 01:58 | are on your network.
| | 01:59 | So if you'd like to see the Bookmarks
on another Mac that happens to be on the
| | 02:02 | network, include Bonjour and
you'll be able to access that.
| | 02:06 | Bookmarks menu, by default it
includes the bookmarks bar, but it can also
| | 02:10 | include contacts and Bonjour, as I
outlined earlier, and also within your
| | 02:14 | collections in the Bookmarks window
| | 02:16 | you can include contacts and Bonjour.
| | 02:20 | When you open a new page you can
decide how it will be configured.
| | 02:23 | Will it appear in a new window, or will it
appear in a bar, or will it appear in a tab?
| | 02:29 | Automatically, if you have the tab bar
exposed it will appear in a tab, but you
| | 02:34 | can choose other options.
| | 02:36 | So it can always open in a new tab or
never open a new tab. And if you choose
| | 02:40 | never that means it will open in a new window.
| | 02:43 | By default, if you Control-click on
a link it will open in a new tab.
| | 02:48 | And if you like, When a new tab or window opens,
it will become active. That's off by default.
| | 02:55 | There's an Autofill section.
| | 02:57 | So as you start to type something,
Safari will look for information that it can
| | 03:01 | fill in for you automatically, and that
can include information from your contacts
| | 03:05 | card, your username and passwords, and
also from other forms, and we're going to
| | 03:10 | look at the passwords next.
| | 03:13 | Now in passwords, and this is new with
Safari 6, you will see websites, your
| | 03:19 | user name, and passwords that have been saved, or
you've granted permission to save, in Safari.
| | 03:25 | So for example, if you were to go to
Gmail or to Amazon, you type in your user
| | 03:29 | name, you type in your password, and
Safari will offer a little window saying,
| | 03:33 | "Would you like to save this?"
| | 03:34 | Yes I would. This is
where that information appears.
| | 03:38 | So there are couple of things you can do here.
| | 03:40 | One is you can choose to delete a
website that has been memorized, and to do that
| | 03:45 | you select it and click on remove.
| | 03:48 | It's likely you're going to
accumulate a lot of these things.
| | 03:50 | If you have multiple websites you can
remove them all, and this is one way of
| | 03:54 | cleaning saved passwords out of your Mac.
| | 03:57 | One other option, and I'm not actually going
to show you what happens but I'll tell you
| | 04:01 | what happens, is I can click show
passwords, up pops this dialogue box asking for
| | 04:07 | username and my password.
| | 04:09 | Once I enter that, and I won't but if I
did, the password would be revealed here.
| | 04:15 | So instead of these dots
I would see that password.
| | 04:19 | So if you've forgotten your password for a
memorized website this is one way to retrieve it.
| | 04:25 | Just click on Show Passwords, enter your
password for your administrator's account,
| | 04:29 | and then you'd be able to
see your password in the clear.
| | 04:33 | There's security, all these things are on.
| | 04:36 | Apple keeps a list of fraudulent websites.
| | 04:40 | So if you happen to visit one of these
websites, not on purpose of course, but
| | 04:45 | maybe were directed to one by another
website, you will see a warning that says,
| | 04:49 | "By the way we are not
sure we trust this website.
| | 04:51 | Are you sure you want to go here?"
| | 04:53 | Most of the time you should take that
warning to heart and say, "No, I can do
| | 04:57 | this somewhere else."
| | 04:58 | You can also select from some
things that are going on the background.
| | 05:02 | For example, by default, plug-ins are enabled.
| | 05:05 | So in another movie I showed you that
you could play media files within Safari.
| | 05:09 | If you don't want that to happen you
can disable plug-ins and then that stuff
| | 05:13 | won't be able to play.
| | 05:15 | There's also Java, which is a way of
automating things within a web browser.
| | 05:19 | You can disable that if you like.
| | 05:21 | JavaScript, kind of the
same idea, you can disable that.
| | 05:25 | You can also choose to block pop-up windows.
| | 05:27 | So a lot of nefarious advertising will
throw a huge pop-up window in front of you.
| | 05:32 | Safari will do its best to try to block that.
| | 05:34 | If you really like that stuff, no
problem, just disable this option and you can
| | 05:38 | see all the pop-ups you like.
| | 05:42 | And then there's privacy.
| | 05:43 | If you want to clear out a bunch of
stuff that has been memorized by Safari, and
| | 05:47 | these are things like cookies,
| | 05:48 | so this is a little tiny bits of
information that a website will plant.
| | 05:53 | Now this isn't nefarious or dangerous stuff.
| | 05:56 | In a lot of cases, maybe this is website
you visited before and you've configured
| | 06:00 | it to look a certain way, or you
saved some password on there, for example.
| | 06:05 | This information is stored
in something called cookies.
| | 06:08 | You can get rid of all that stuff simply
by clicking on Remove All Website Data.
| | 06:14 | When you do that you'll be asked,
"Are you sure you want to do that?"
| | 06:17 | If you're sure go ahead and
Remove Now and that stuff will be gone.
| | 06:22 | If you'd like to find out a little bit
more about what that stuff is, click on Details
| | 06:25 | and you can see the cookies and
who has planted them on the Mac.
| | 06:30 | As far as cookies go, the default setting
is to block them from third parties and
| | 06:34 | advertising, and so that means that you
visited a particular website and you're
| | 06:38 | happy to accept the cookies from that
website but not from advertisers for that
| | 06:42 | website or third parties that have
planted their cookies on the site.
| | 06:46 | You can block cookies all
the time by clicking on Always.
| | 06:50 | When you do that it's very likely that
you're going to have to go in and enter
| | 06:54 | passwords again or sign into sites
because a cookie hasn't stored that
| | 06:57 | kind of information. Or you can choose
to never block cookies and then you'll
| | 07:02 | get cookies galore.
| | 07:04 | Also new in Safari 6 is the ability
to limit websites to location services.
| | 07:09 | So if a website is asking for location
you will prompt about it saying, "Such
| | 07:14 | and such a site wants to use
your location. Is that okay for you?"
| | 07:18 | At which point you can say yes, but
maybe the next day you don't want that site
| | 07:22 | to have access to this kind of information.
| | 07:24 | So, you'll be prompted for each
website once each day by default, or if
| | 07:30 | you're not so concerned about it, it can prompt
just one time or it can deny without prompting.
| | 07:35 | I never want anybody to use
location so don't bug me ever.
| | 07:39 | Website tracking is a very interesting
option, and it's more or less effective.
| | 07:45 | And what I mean by that is that there
is this movement, as far as websites go,
| | 07:51 | that you can set this little flag that
says, "I do not want you to track me."
| | 07:56 | And some websites will
actually honor that request.
| | 07:59 | So you've gone to website, you do not
want them to have any idea where you've
| | 08:03 | been or where you're going, and so you
can enable this option in the hope
| | 08:07 | that they won't do it.
| | 08:08 | Again, not every website will honor
this but I think it's worth turning on and
| | 08:12 | hope in the future that more of them will.
| | 08:15 | And you can also choose to not have a
search engine provide you with suggestions.
| | 08:20 | A lot of times these suggestions
are helpful but sometimes they're not.
| | 08:23 | They're pushing advertising at you.
| | 08:25 | So you can also switch that on.
| | 08:29 | If a website has asked to show
alerts and Notification Center, they will
| | 08:32 | appear in this list.
| | 08:34 | Very much like passwords, you can
select one and choose to remove it, or you
| | 08:37 | can remove them all.
| | 08:40 | You can enhance Safari with
something called Extensions.
| | 08:44 | So for example, if you want to be
able to block Flash video, you can get an
| | 08:48 | extension that will do that.
| | 08:51 | One way to get extensions is to click
on Get Extensions. You'll be taken to
| | 08:55 | Apple's website and they have
a series of extensions here.
| | 08:59 | For instance, here's an ad blocker, or you
can incorporate Twitter into Safari, or
| | 09:06 | you can add Weather.
| | 09:07 | So lots of things that you can do
with it extensions. Certainly something
| | 09:11 | you want to check out.
| | 09:12 | And once some extensions appear here, you
can turn them on or off individually or
| | 09:17 | you can turn them all off simply
by clicking this switch to off.
| | 09:21 | And then we have Advanced.
| | 09:24 | There's an accessibility setting here,
so that a website will never use font
| | 09:28 | sizes smaller than, say, 9-point.
| | 09:30 | This is for people who have some kind
of visual disability so that they have a
| | 09:33 | hard time reading small text.
| | 09:36 | The other accessibility option is to
press Tab to highlight objects on a web page.
| | 09:41 | It may highlight, for
example, certain columns of text.
| | 09:45 | Style sheets are something you don't need to
worry about, nor default encoding, or proxies.
| | 09:49 | Again, this is for advanced users and
something most likely you don't need to know about.
| | 09:54 | However, show the Develop menu,
I think it's interesting.
| | 09:58 | This isn't necessarily for geeks, but there
are couple of things in here that are useful.
| | 10:02 | For example, if you want to empty the
cache in Safari, it used to be that you
| | 10:07 | could do that from the Safari menu.
| | 10:09 | You can't do that anymore
unless you go to the Develop menu.
| | 10:12 | So Empty Caches is where you find that here.
| | 10:15 | You can also choose a User Agent.
| | 10:17 | So what possible good is this?
| | 10:20 | Well, basically what you can do is
you can tell Safari to pretend it's a
| | 10:24 | different web browser.
| | 10:26 | So for instance, there are certain
websites that work best with Internet Explorer.
| | 10:30 | Now there are very few of them
anymore that will say, "I'm sorry, you don't
| | 10:34 | have Internet Explorer, so
you can't get here at all."
| | 10:37 | If you happen to encounter one of
these things however, switch on the Develop
| | 10:41 | menu, choose user agent, and then once
the page is active, these commands will be
| | 10:46 | active as well, then you can pretend to
be a different web browser and you may be
| | 10:50 | able to access the site. But for now
we're going to turn it back off because we
| | 10:55 | don't need to use it right now. And that is the
long and short of Safari's preferences.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Managing your Internet footprint| 00:00 | Look, I'm the last one to suggest that
you have something to hide, but there are
| | 00:04 | definitely times when you don't want
Safari keeping track of your every web
| | 00:08 | movement. When you're working on a
sensitive project at work, for example.
| | 00:12 | In this movie we'll examine how to
better maintain your privacy on the web.
| | 00:17 | Now before we talk about of erasing
your tracks let's look at how you can avoid
| | 00:21 | creating those tracks in the first place,
and that is by going to the Safari menu
| | 00:26 | and turning on Private Browsing. Simple enough.
| | 00:29 | Do want to turn on Private Browsing?
| | 00:31 | OK does it, and Cancel doesn't do it.
| | 00:35 | So what exactly does this do?
| | 00:36 | Well, when you turn on Private Browsing
Safari doesn't keep track of pages you
| | 00:41 | visit, your search results,
or any autofill entries.
| | 00:45 | When you do turn it on, a PRIVATE icon
appears in the address bar, indicating that
| | 00:51 | you are now Private Browsing.
| | 00:53 | To turn that off, you can just click
on private, click OK, and it's off.
| | 01:01 | Note that this is setting that you have
to turn on every time you launch Safari.
| | 01:05 | It won't stick across sessions.
| | 01:07 | Okay, so now you know how to keep from
leaving tracks, but what about the tracks
| | 01:11 | you've already left?
| | 01:12 | To do that, go to Safari and turn
on reset and select Reset Safari.
| | 01:19 | This gives you a load of options.
| | 01:22 | If you leave them all on you pretty
much wipe out anything in Safari, but you
| | 01:26 | can choose what to wipe out.
| | 01:28 | So first, clear your history. That way if you
to the history menu, nothing will appear there.
| | 01:33 | Reset Top Sites. As I mentioned, as you
go to different places around the web
| | 01:38 | Safari will assemble a group of top
sites based on your browsing history.
| | 01:42 | So you can erase that.
| | 01:44 | Any preview images that you've accumulated,
| | 01:47 | you can get rid of those.
| | 01:48 | You can reset all your location
warnings, notification warnings, remove all
| | 01:53 | website data, and this is
again things like cookies.
| | 01:57 | You can remove your saved names and passwords.
| | 02:00 | You can get rid of any text
that is inserted with AutoFill.
| | 02:03 | You can also clear the Downloads list,
and you can close all your Safari windows.
| | 02:07 | In most cases you're not going to have all
these options turned on and then reset Safari.
| | 02:13 | However, if you happen to be using
somebody else's computer and are using
| | 02:17 | Safari there, it's only polite to
erase everything you've done in Safari so
| | 02:21 | they don't end up with weird autofill
settings, or they have stuff in their
| | 02:25 | history that they don't care to see.
| | 02:27 | So to invoke all of these things
simply click on Reset, and you're done.
| | 02:32 | I don't need to reset anything so I
will on Cancel. And by way of reminder, in
| | 02:38 | Preferences you can muck around
with your privacy settings there.
| | 02:43 | You can erase your passwords, and you can
remove sites that you've granted access
| | 02:49 | to Notification Center.
| | 02:50 | How vigilant you are about
these settings is up to you.
| | 02:54 | I don't worry all that much about
privacy except when it comes to my family, but
| | 02:59 | it's personal decision.
| | 03:00 | Now that you know all about these
options, you can make surfing with Safari a
| | 03:04 | more private experience.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
9. Key Media AppsPlaying media in QuickTime| 00:00 | Currently, there are few applications
bundled with Mountain Lion that can play media.
| | 00:04 | iTunes and QuickTime player are two of them.
| | 00:07 | In this movie we'll look at
working with media in QuickTime Player.
| | 00:11 | So first we need to launch it.
| | 00:12 | There it is, and now I need to open a media file.
| | 00:18 | So Open File, look at my
Documents folder, and here is a movie.
| | 00:24 | I'll click on Open, and there's our movie.
| | 00:27 | When you drag your cursor into the movie
window, you see controls. Drag it out
| | 00:30 | and the controls disappear so you can
focus on the video. I'll drag it in.
| | 00:35 | Notice we have a few controls here.
| | 00:37 | One is for adjusting the volume down
and up, you can go back, play, forward,
| | 00:44 | here's a share button
that we'll look at in a bit.
| | 00:46 | There's also a timeline so that you
can scrub through your movie and see where
| | 00:50 | you are, and then there are
time indications on either side.
| | 00:53 | If you like you can also go full
screen. And in a case where the movie isn't
| | 01:03 | widescreen, you can have it
stretch to fill the screen, or bring it back to
| | 01:08 | its normal aspect ratio.
| | 01:09 | Let's get out of full screen,
and here again is our movie.
| | 01:15 | So you start playing, and as
I said you can scrub through.
| | 01:22 | Now there are some keyboard commands
you can use that are really useful.
| | 01:26 | So go back to the beginning.
| | 01:28 | I'll now press the spacebar to start playing.
| | 01:37 | If I want to go to the end of the movie,
I hold on the Option key and press the right
| | 01:41 | arrow. That takes me to the end.
| | 01:43 | Option+left arrow takes me to the beginning.
| | 01:46 | I can fast forward it as I'm playing.
| | 01:49 | So I start playing.
| | 01:51 | Press the command key, right
arrow, that's 2X, 4x, and 8x.
| | 02:02 | So I'll press the spacebar, and
now we're back to normal speed.
| | 02:07 | I can do this rewinding, so I can
scrub back by pressing Command+left arrow,
| | 02:13 | that's 2x back, press again it's 4x
back, and press one more time and that's 8x
| | 02:19 | back, press spacebar and we start
playing back at normal speed again.
| | 02:24 | You can also trim movies
within QuickTime Players.
| | 02:27 | So to do that go to the Edit menu, choose
Trim, and you see this little Trim bar here.
| | 02:33 | So drag either side of that bar,
click on Trim, and the movie is reduced to
| | 02:42 | that shorter length.
| | 02:45 | In this case, I don't want to leave it
trimmed, so I will choose Edit > Undo trim.
| | 02:49 | Now I mentioned the share button, so
we'll move the cursor around to make
| | 02:53 | the controls appear, click on share, and
you can share this movie out in various ways.
| | 02:58 | You can send it As email message, via
Message, you could AirDrop it, post it
| | 03:03 | to Facebook, post it to YouTube, post it to
Vimeo, and you can also post it to Flickr.
| | 03:09 | All of these require that you set up
an account for these last services.
| | 03:14 | Note that when you export some of these
things, if the movie is huge and you've
| | 03:18 | chosen to export as an email message,
it will automatically be compressed so it
| | 03:22 | isn't such a large file.
| | 03:24 | So if you started out with, say, 100
megabyte movie, it will be compressed down
| | 03:29 | quite a bit so that it will fit
through your typical email gateway.
| | 03:33 | So maybe it's sent out at
seven megabytes, for example.
| | 03:35 | At that quality it's going to be very
small and the video isn't going to look
| | 03:40 | great, but for something like this, which
happens to be taken from YouTube, that's
| | 03:44 | okay because the quality
wasn't terrific to begin with.
| | 03:46 | In a lot of cases you just want to share
these things with your friends and they
| | 03:50 | don't have to be high quality.
| | 03:53 | And that's media playback in QuickTime.
| | 03:54 | Old-time Mac users who miss some of
the more extensive editing features of
| | 03:59 | QuickTime 7 Pro should know that Apple
still sells this version of QuickTime on
| | 04:03 | its website for just $29.
| | 04:06 | Also, if you have a version of QuickTime
Pro 7 it will still run under Mountain Lion.
| | 04:11 | And that's QuickTime player as a media player.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Recording videos with QuickTime| 00:00 | You can record video, audio, and
screen capture with QuickTime player.
| | 00:05 | Let's see how that works. Launch QuickTime.
| | 00:10 | I go to the File menu, and I choose New
Movie Recording, and here I am. Hello.
| | 00:15 | So I'll move the window over and you can
see me because if you have iSight camera
| | 00:21 | or another camera that's attached to
your Mac you can record your video.
| | 00:26 | If you have some kind of audio input
device, a microphone for example, you can
| | 00:30 | also record your audio.
| | 00:31 | So let's take a look in the
window and see what's going on here.
| | 00:34 | You see the red record button, if you
click that you record both your audio and
| | 00:39 | your video. And below that you see
this meter that's kind of doing this as I
| | 00:42 | speak, that's your audio level.
| | 00:44 | That indicates that not only is sound
going in, but you can see what the level is.
| | 00:49 | We'll look at the triangle menu here, and
that allows me to choose a different
| | 00:53 | microphone input if I want, for
example, I could use my iSight built-in
| | 00:58 | microphone, quality is not that great so
I'm going to continue to use this microphone.
| | 01:02 | You could also choose the quality, and
this is the video quality of your movies.
| | 01:06 | So it can be medium, high, or maximum.
| | 01:09 | So let's record something.
| | 01:12 | Hi! Its Chris Breen, welcome to
Mac OS X Lion Essential Training.
| | 01:17 | I'm so glad that you've joined me,
particularly to learn about QuickTime.
| | 01:22 | Then I click the stop button,
| | 01:26 |
and here's my movie. So I can play it.
| | 01:28 |
(Video playing)
| | 01:41 |
And indeed, I have stopped.
| | 01:43 | If I wanted to I, again, could play this
at full screen, it's a little grainy, I'm
| | 01:48 | not sure why I'd want to do that, but I could.
| | 01:50 | And just like with playing media files
and editing media files in QuickTime you
| | 01:55 | can share just as you could otherwise.
| | 01:58 | There are other ways you can do
recordings, I'll close this window.
| | 02:03 | You can also record audio.
| | 02:05 | File menu, New Audio Recording, here
is the window, and again you can see the
| | 02:10 | meters so you can see that I'm talking.
| | 02:12 | If I want to record something all I have to do
is click on the record button, I speak here.
| | 02:17 | You notice that it's recording.
| | 02:23 | Yes, and then I click stop.
| | 02:25 | And if I really wanted to
listen to it, it sounds like this.
| | 02:29 |
(Audio)
| | 02:36 | That's right, I'm a trained musician. So
we click the close button and that's it.
| | 02:39 | Now, one other kind of recording
we can do is a screen recording.
| | 02:44 | So I choose New Screen Recording.
| | 02:47 | This allows me to capture
the action on my Mac's screen.
| | 02:51 | I will click on the record button.
| | 02:54 | All I have to do now is click
on the desktop, and I'm recording.
| | 02:58 | Open a few things drag, the window
around, close the window, and click stop.
| | 03:07 | Now I play it back.
| | 03:19 | Now you'll notice in my recording that
when I was doing a screen recording you
| | 03:24 | could see a little circle that
indicated where the mouse was.
| | 03:28 | The reason is because I'd switched on in
options Show Mouse Clicks in recording.
| | 03:34 | This is not on by default but I think
it's very helpful if you're trying to show
| | 03:37 | people something that's
happening on your screen.
| | 03:40 | So if you're trying to train somebody
to do something, that's the way you do it.
| | 03:44 | There's one other option for a
screen recording. I click record.
| | 03:48 | Now I can record just a portion of the
screen. To do that, I click and I drag
| | 03:54 | to create a selection.
| | 03:55 | I let go, click on Start Recording.
| | 03:59 | I can move things into this window,
move them around, back up again, and click
| | 04:10 | stop screen recording.
| | 04:15 | It finishes, shows me the
preview window, click to play.
| | 04:27 | And there's my screen capture.
| | 04:30 | I think these are cool capabilities,
and I think you're going to like them.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
10. Apps for Working with Cameras and ImagesVideo conferencing with FaceTime| 00:00 | Once upon a time, video calls were
considered science fiction. But today, thanks
| | 00:05 | in part to Apple technology,
they're increasingly commonplace.
| | 00:09 | We're going to look at one of those
technologies now and it's called FaceTime.
| | 00:12 | Now, FaceTime was originally used with
the Apple's iPhone, but it's now bundled
| | 00:16 | with the Mac OS, and you need to be
connected to the internet to use it.
| | 00:19 | Let's give it a try.
| | 00:21 | So I will launch it from Spotlight.
| | 00:24 | There it is, and my camera turns
on, and here I am back on screen.
| | 00:31 | So what's your seeing now
is the FaceTime interface.
| | 00:34 | You'll see a list of my contacts
along the right side of the screen.
| | 00:37 | If you look below, I can add Favorite contacts.
| | 00:40 | You can recent calls I've
made, and then my Contacts.
| | 00:44 | So, let's suppose I want to
add somebody to my Favorites.
| | 00:48 | I'll click on their name and you
see this Add to Favorites button.
| | 00:51 | Click there, let's take a look at
Favorites, and they're indeed is John Doe.
| | 00:58 | If I want to get rid of that contact,
all I have to do is click on minus, and
| | 01:03 | they're out of there.
| | 01:04 | So, let's make a call.
| | 01:05 | Go back to All Contacts.
| | 01:08 | Let's see who should I call?
| | 01:12 | I think I'll give Ian a call. So here is Ian.
| | 01:15 | I can contact him via his email address.
| | 01:18 | So I click on that address, and we make the call.
| | 01:26 | Hey Ian! How are you doing?
| | 01:27 | Hi Chris.
| | 01:29 | Okay. Well, Ian is a man of few words as you can tell.
| | 01:32 | Couple of things that we can look at
while we're in this window. One, very
| | 01:36 | important is the mute microphone button.
| | 01:39 | Now at this point, Ian can't here a
thing I am saying. What's really important
| | 01:45 | when using this view is that you want
to be able to talk but keep a smile on
| | 01:50 | your face because you can say
terrible, terrible things about people.
| | 01:53 | I could something about, well Ian's
personal grooming habits, for example, and he
| | 01:57 | can't hear anything I'm saying as long
as I keep smiling, everything is cool.
| | 02:02 | So, let me turn the mic back on.
| | 02:04 | Ian I was just telling how
awesome you are to our audience.
| | 02:07 | So, that was great.
| | 02:08 | One other thing I can do in here.
| | 02:10 | I can flip it into full screen so I
can really get a good look at him.
| | 02:15 | Take that back down.
| | 02:16 | I can also move my preview window
around if I want to. And I can end the call.
| | 02:23 | So, that was the end of our call with Ian.
| | 02:26 | Now, I'm going to ask Ian to call me
so you can see what it looks like when I
| | 02:31 | receive a FaceTime call.
| | 02:32 | So we'll just wait for Ian to
give me a buzz. There he is.
| | 02:40 | Now I can Accept his call or I can Decline it.
| | 02:42 | I will go ahead and accept. Hey!
| | 02:47 | Hey how are you? How are you doing?
| | 02:49 | Hi Chris.
| | 02:51 | See, again, a man with a limited
amount of dialogue, but he gets the job done.
| | 02:56 | So I will end that call.
| | 02:58 | Now let's take a look at Recents, and
you can see here is Ian and it shows that
| | 03:03 | we've recently spoken. And
that's generally the idea of FaceTime.
| | 03:11 | Couple of other things, if you want to
add a contact click on the plus button.
| | 03:15 | You can add your contacts there. And again, you
could contact people a couple of different ways.
| | 03:20 | One is if they have an iPhone,
you can enter their phone number.
| | 03:25 | You could contact them that way, or
again, any email address, enter that, you can
| | 03:30 | make a FaceTime call that way.
| | 03:32 | This is a very cool technology and it's
great now that we can talk face to face,
| | 03:36 | and that's FaceTime.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Taking pictures in Photo Booth| 00:00 | Now, as you well know, the Mac
is a popular productivity tool.
| | 00:03 | You can get lots and lots of work done.
But you know, it' also a great way to
| | 00:07 | entertain small children. And one of the
best ways to do that is to use a program
| | 00:12 | called Photo Booth, and I'm going to
show you how to use that now.
| | 00:15 | So, I'm going to launch this from Spotlight.
| | 00:17 | So Command+space, and
there's Photo Booth, and here I am.
| | 00:24 | Welcome to my studio.
| | 00:26 | Let's put this in full screen so you
get the full effect. And see, its just like
| | 00:31 | we're at the movie theater
and I'm the star of this movie.
| | 00:35 | So, Photo Booth, you can do
a few simple things with it.
| | 00:38 | For example, you can take a picture of yourself.
| | 00:41 | Click on the camera icon, you see the
little countdown and -- and there I am.
| | 00:48 | So, if I'd like to take a look at that
picture, I simply click on i, and I look
| | 00:53 | like I'm mugging and I'm going to get rid of
it, so I will click on the X, and it's gone.
| | 00:57 | Now, you could also do a photo booth-style
photograph, thus the name. And it works this way.
| | 01:04 | Click on the camera button, get my
countdown, and just like at the state fair, there
| | 01:16 | you have your four images. And
again, if you want, you can get rid of those.
| | 01:20 | I'm going to keep them for and
while and maybe they'll grow on me.
| | 01:23 | You can also take a movie of
yourself, and in order to do that, you switch
| | 01:27 | over this far icon here.
| | 01:31 | Click and wait for the countdown.
| | 01:34 | Hi! I'm Chris Breen and I'm showing you
everything there is to know about Photo Booth.
| | 01:40 | Click on stop, and just like with
the still image, here is my movie.
| | 01:49 | We don't actually have to listen to
that, actually I'm going to delete it.
| | 01:52 | Okay, so where is the real fun of this?
| | 01:55 | Well the real fun is in the effects,
so let's go back to a still image.
| | 01:59 | Click on Effects, and you
see a variety of effects here.
| | 02:02 | So for example, I could tell you how
much I love doing these courses for
| | 02:08 | lynda.com. And we'll move on through.
| | 02:15 | You can do things like pop art, thermal
camera, here's kind of a comic book effect.
| | 02:29 | So as you could see, kids are going to love
this, and they'll love this section even more.
| | 02:37 | Hi, they're two of me, and now I'm
going to disappear into my neck.
| | 02:45 | There, that's kind of creepy, but the kids love it.
| | 02:50 | Effects one more time, you can do
other things like -- you know if your
| | 02:54 | hair just isn't big enough, here you go, you
got the really big hair, down little face here.
| | 03:01 | I want to show you one other effect.
| | 03:03 | This is a blue screen effect. The idea
here is that you're on camera and you
| | 03:08 | will select one these things, for
example, let me select Clouds, and you'll see
| | 03:13 | how it asks you to do this.
| | 03:14 | So get out of the picture.
| | 03:15 | So I'll get out of here, then
you get your background.
| | 03:20 | Step back in, and look,
you're a sort of in the picture.
| | 03:25 | As you can see, this
doesn't work incredibly well.
| | 03:28 | What you really have to do is a nicely-lit
environment, particularly where the
| | 03:31 | background is lit pretty well, and then this
works much better than you see right here.
| | 03:38 | Whenever you want to go back to the
normal view just click on Normal. And
| | 03:42 | there you have Photo Booth. It's a
ton of fun for kids and it's going to be
| | 03:45 | fun for you too.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| The great utility of Image Capture| 00:00 | As you're likely aware, when you plug
in an iOS device or a camera to your Mac,
| | 00:05 | this is what happens.
| | 00:08 | So plugged in my iPod Touch. Not only
does iTunes launch, but also iPhoto.
| | 00:13 | If I want to import an image, I
select it in iPhoto and I choose Import Selected,
| | 00:18 | or I can choose Import X Number of Photos.
| | 00:21 | So I'll import that one image.
| | 00:23 | I'll choose to Keep Photo and there's my image.
| | 00:25 | Now that's great if you want to store all
your photos in iPhoto, but what if you don't?
| | 00:30 | What if you want to put them somewhere else?
| | 00:31 | Well there's another tool for doing that.
| | 00:33 | So we're going to quit iPhoto and
I'll quit iTunes because that launched
| | 00:36 | because of the iPod, and now I'm going to open
something called Image Capture, and here it is.
| | 00:43 | Now here is Image Capture.
| | 00:45 | It lists my device, which is my iPod
Touch, and it includes all the images on it.
| | 00:50 | In this case, to import an image, I
simply select it, and now I can choose
| | 00:56 | where to import it to.
| | 00:58 | So, it could go to my Picture's folder,
Desktop, Documents, various applications,
| | 01:03 | or if I choose other, I could
select a folder to bring it into.
| | 01:06 | In this case let's put it on the desktop so
you'll see how this works. I click on import.
| | 01:11 | There is my image, and there we are.
| | 01:14 | So now I'm going to plug my camera in.
| | 01:18 | Once again iPhoto
launches, and there are my images.
| | 01:21 | Well, what if I don't want
iPhoto to launch? No problem.
| | 01:24 | We'll go to iPhoto, choose Preferences,
Connecting camera opens, Image Capture.
| | 01:32 | Now I will quit iPhoto, and here's my
camera card, and here are all the images
| | 01:40 | that are on that camera.
| | 01:43 | I can import all of them or I can
select a few, and I can click Import and it
| | 01:49 | will import just those images.
| | 01:52 | By the way, if you didn't want to
change that setting in iPhoto to have iPhoto
| | 01:55 | launch when you plugged in a camera or
something like an iPod, you can change it
| | 01:59 | here, and instead choose to have Image
Capture launch when you plug in a camera
| | 02:03 | or something like an iPod.
| | 02:05 | One of the other advantages of the
Image Capture is you get to see more
| | 02:09 | information about your images.
| | 02:10 | So you can see their file size, the
date they were taken, their aperture, depth,
| | 02:15 | color space, and width, for example.
| | 02:18 | Also, if you have a scanner, this is the
application that you'll use to use your scanner.
| | 02:23 | So if you're ready to make a scan,
put your document into the scanner.
| | 02:27 | If there's a button that initiates Scan,
Image Capture will automatically open
| | 02:32 | and show you a preview of the
document that you're going to scan.
| | 02:35 | At that point, resize the selection
rectangle to get just the stuff you want,
| | 02:40 | choose Import, and then your image will
be scanned. And that's Image Capture,
| | 02:45 | another way to bring images into your Mac.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
11. AutomatorWriting a simple Automator workflow| 00:00 | In the few movies, I'm going to
walk you through something called Automator.
| | 00:04 | An Automator is an application that, as
its name implies, helps you automate tasks
| | 00:09 | on your Mac. And let's see
how it works. I'll launch it.
| | 00:14 | You can find this in the Utilities folder,
by the way. And here is our Workflow window.
| | 00:20 | When you first launch Automator,
you'll see a template chooser and this shows
| | 00:23 | you the kind of items that
you can create with Automator.
| | 00:25 | The simplest is a Workflow, you can
also create Applications, Services, Print
| | 00:30 | Plugins, Folder Action, Calendar Alarm,
and Image Capture Plugin, and I'll show you
| | 00:35 | a few of these as we go
through this in the next few movies.
| | 00:38 | So I'm going to start with
the simplest, which is Workflow.
| | 00:41 | So I'll click on Choose.
| | 00:43 | Now this is how it's set up.
| | 00:45 | Along the left side you see a library
entry, and this includes items that have
| | 00:50 | actions, which are on the
second pane, attached to them.
| | 00:54 | So for example if I choose Calendar,
you see all the actions that are
| | 00:59 | connected to Calendar.
| | 01:01 | If I choose Contacts, these are the actions
that go with Contacts, and so on and so forth.
| | 01:07 | If I want to see all of the actions, I
click on Library, and then here they all are.
| | 01:12 | If I'm looking for a particular action
and I know its name, I can just type in
| | 01:16 | that keyword and I see any action that
matches that keyword. And over here to
| | 01:22 | the right is the Workflow area.
| | 01:25 | This is where you string together
actions to create your automation.
| | 01:30 | So let's make something.
| | 01:32 | Let's go to the desktop and I'm
going to create a couple of folders.
| | 01:35 | I'll call the first, Source, and
I'll call the second one, Destination.
| | 01:40 | I'm going to take the Source folder
and drag it into my Workflow area.
| | 01:47 | This tells Automator to look at this
item and then do something with it.
| | 01:52 | So it knows where to look.
| | 01:54 | Let's go to Files and folders.
| | 01:57 | I want to get the folder contents.
| | 02:00 | I'll drag that in here, and finally, now
that I've got the contents of whatever this
| | 02:05 | folder is, I want to do something with it.
| | 02:09 | So I would like to copy the
contents to a particular folder.
| | 02:14 | In this case, I'd like to copy
it to my Destination folder.
| | 02:19 | Now if I wanted to, I could navigate
to it, but it's much easier if you have
| | 02:24 | access to that item to simply drag it on top
of the pop-up menu, and then it will appear.
| | 02:29 | So, let's see if this thing works.
And what exactly am I trying to do?
| | 02:35 | Well the point of this Workflow is,
anything that I put within this Source folder
| | 02:39 | will copied to the Destination folder.
| | 02:42 | So it's a cheap sort of backup.
| | 02:44 | So let me create one more
folder, and I'll call this Test.
| | 02:47 | I'll now I open my Source folder and
I'm going to make it small enough so
| | 02:54 | that we can see Automator, as well as this
folder, and I'll put Test into my Source folder.
| | 02:59 | Let's open the Destination folder, we'll make
that small as well, and we'll put it down here.
| | 03:07 | Now keep your eye on the
folders and I'll click on Run.
| | 03:12 | These check marks indicate, Hey,
everything went well, and the bottom check
| | 03:16 | mark indicates the whole Workflow
completed. And if you kept your eyes on
| | 03:21 | those folders, you notice that my
Test folder has been copied to my
| | 03:26 | Destination folder.
| | 03:28 | Big picture here, you're thinking, "Well
you know I could have just dragged it from
| | 03:32 | one folder to the other," and that's
true enough, but suppose that you this
| | 03:36 | Source folder was where you put your daily work.
| | 03:39 | So at the end of the day you put all
the work from that day into that Source
| | 03:44 | folder, and this Destination folder
doesn't live on this hard drive, but instead it
| | 03:48 | lives on an external hard drive
or some kind of online server.
| | 03:53 | So, put your stuff in your Source
folder, run that Workflow, and it will be
| | 03:58 | automatically copied to your backup folder.
| | 04:02 | So as I said, its kind of a cheap way to
do a backup, but its very quick and very
| | 04:07 | efficient. And that shows you the
simplest kind of Workflow. As we proceed, I'll
| | 04:13 | show you different kinds of workflows.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating an Automator application| 00:00 | So, we've seen how to create a simple Workflow.
| | 00:02 | Let's do something else with Automator.
| | 00:05 | I'll launch it one more time, and
here again is our template chooser.
| | 00:09 | This time we're going to create an
Application. And what an Application does, it
| | 00:14 | allows you to trigger the Workflow just
by double-clicking on the Application, or
| | 00:19 | if the Application is configured this
way, you can drop things on it and then
| | 00:22 | the Application will kick in and run.
| | 00:25 | The obvious advantage is you don't have
to open up Automator every time you want to
| | 00:29 | run an Automation and then click on Run.
| | 00:31 | Instead you can simply launch the Application.
| | 00:33 | So I've chosen the
Application, I'll click on Choose.
| | 00:37 | So, let's string together
something we can do with an Application.
| | 00:40 | I'll start with Calendar, and let's say
we're going to Get Specified Calendar Items.
| | 00:46 | I'll click on Add, and I'm going to
look for a particular calendar I can do
| | 00:50 | something with, and we'll make that
our Fun Times! Calendar, and click on Add.
| | 00:54 | Now I'm going to drag in
an Event Summary action.
| | 00:58 | So, what this is going to do is take
the information from my Fun Times! Calendar
| | 01:04 | and generate a summary of it, but
I've got to put that summary somewhere.
| | 01:08 | I have to see it in some way.
| | 01:10 | So let's make a text file out of it.
| | 01:12 | So I go to Text, and we'll make that
New Text File. And I'm going to have it
| | 01:17 | appear on the desktop.
| | 01:19 | Now I will save my Automator workflow.
| | 01:23 | I'll put it on the desktop.
| | 01:25 | I'll call this Summary.
| | 01:28 | The file format is correct, it's going
to be an Application, and I click on Save.
| | 01:34 | So we'll go to the desktop.
| | 01:36 | I'll Hide Others, and now I'll
double-click on my summary workflow.
| | 01:42 | It runs the Workflow, and look, I've got
an untitled document on my desktop.
| | 01:46 | I wonder what's in it.
| | 01:47 | I'll press the spacebar to bring
up the Quick Look, and here it is.
| | 01:51 | So, here is my summary of calendar
events from my Fun Times! Calendar, and again, I
| | 01:57 | didn't have to run Automator and then
click on the Run button, instead I simply
| | 02:01 | had to double-click on my Summary
Application, and that created this text file,
| | 02:08 | And here we are back in Automator, and
so I'll close this Automator workflow.
| | 02:13 | I can get rid of that Quick Look
window, and I can dispose of these.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Setting up an Automator calendar workflow| 00:00 | So we have seen a simple workflow as well
as one that we trigger with an application.
| | 00:05 | So let's see one that's timed.
| | 00:07 | I'll choose New, and to create a
timed workflow, I'll choose Calendar Alarm.
| | 00:14 | And click on Choose.
| | 00:15 | I've already created a workflow that
allows me to backup files and I'm going to
| | 00:20 | do the same kind of thing again.
| | 00:22 | So, I'll move this over a bit, go to the Finder.
| | 00:25 | Here's our Source folder once again.
| | 00:27 | I'll create a backup folder, and
very much like our first workflow,
| | 00:34 | I'll drag in the Source folder.
| | 00:36 | I'll go to Files & Folders.
| | 00:38 | I'll Get Folder Contents.
| | 00:41 | Copy Finder Items, and I'll have
the destination be my Backup Folder.
| | 00:48 | So, we know how this works.
| | 00:49 | I put something in the Source folder, run the
workflow, and it ends up in my Backup folder.
| | 00:54 | And that's fine, but I
don't want to do this manually.
| | 00:57 | I'd like to have this actually
happen at a certain time everyday.
| | 01:00 | So how does that happen?
| | 01:02 | Well, this is a calendar alarm
workflow so I choose Save, I'll call it My
| | 01:08 | Backup, and then click on Save.
| | 01:12 | When I do that, the Calendar
application opens, and it creates a new event.
| | 01:16 | So I'll call that Backup.
| | 01:21 | I don't need any invitees, so there are none.
| | 01:23 | I'll make this part of the Automator
Calendar, and I don't need this to be part
| | 01:27 | of my iCloud Calendar, because I'm
not syncing it to other devices.
| | 01:30 | I'll move it there.
| | 01:32 | I don't want this to happen all
day, but rather at a certain time.
| | 01:34 | So I'll have it go off at 8 p.m.
And I want it to happen everyday.
| | 01:40 | Now when I do that, notice how it
populates the calendar, so it's all over the place.
| | 01:45 | I'll then click on Update.
| | 01:47 | So now my calendar is littered with these
Backup entries, and I don't really want to see those.
| | 01:52 | So I can make them go away.
| | 01:54 | They're still going to occur, it's just
that I don't have to see them now. And I
| | 01:58 | will quit out of Calendar.
| | 01:59 | So, what's going to happen?
| | 02:00 | Well, what will happen is at
8 o'clock, every single day.
| | 02:04 | Anything that I have placed in this Source
folder will be copied to my Backup folder.
| | 02:10 | So, I don't have to click a Run button,
I don't have to double-click on an application.
| | 02:14 | It will just automatically happen when
that calendar alarm goes off, and that
| | 02:19 | makes this a very powerful workflow.
| | 02:22 | So, if you have jobs that you want to
execute at certain times a day, and on
| | 02:26 | multiple days through the year,
try a calendar alarm workflow.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating an Automator service| 00:00 | Finally, I'd like to show you
how to create an Automator service.
| | 00:05 | The advantage of using a service is
that it's accessible to you from a menu or
| | 00:10 | using a keyboard shortcut.
| | 00:13 | Create a new workflow.
| | 00:15 | This time I'm going to choose
Service, and click on Choose.
| | 00:18 | I'll go to my Search Menu and
type in the beginning of reminder.
| | 00:24 | So what we're going to do is we're
going to create a new reminders item.
| | 00:28 | So using this workflow, I
won't have to launch reminders.
| | 00:31 | I can just create one by going to a services
menu anywhere or using a keyboard shortcut.
| | 00:36 | So this is how that's done.
| | 00:38 | So service receives input from no
input, and it happens in any application.
| | 00:45 | So here is our new reminders item.
| | 00:47 | So if I were to run this now, it would
create a new reminder item, but what I
| | 00:52 | would like you to do is show
up when I initiate the service.
| | 00:56 | So I click on Options and then I choose
Show this action when the workflow runs.
| | 01:02 | I can configure this item if I like.
| | 01:04 | I could add it to an existing
list, or I can choose New list.
| | 01:08 | I can decide if I'm using in the
existing list which one to add it to, and we'll
| | 01:12 | leave it Reminders.
| | 01:14 | I can choose a priority, and
I can also choose the dates.
| | 01:17 | So, I preset these items but I don't have to.
| | 01:20 | So let's see what happens when I run this.
| | 01:22 | So I click on Run, and here is
my New Reminders Item window.
| | 01:27 | At this point, I can type in the
reminder and click on Continue and it will
| | 01:30 | create a new reminder.
| | 01:32 | So swell. But I don't
want it to work it that way.
| | 01:35 | So let's click on Save.
| | 01:39 | I will now name my service, and I'll
call it New Reminder, and click save.
| | 01:46 | Let's quit Automator.
| | 01:48 | So, let's go to Finder, choose Services, and
look what's there, New Reminder. I select it.
| | 01:53 | There is my New Reminders window.
| | 01:55 | So I'll type in my reminder.
| | 02:00 | We'll make this high priority because that
fish is really hungry, and click on Continue.
| | 02:04 | Let's see if it's there.
| | 02:06 | Go to reminders.
| | 02:09 | Click on reminders. Feed the fish!
| | 02:12 | There is my reminder. Great!
| | 02:15 | So regardless of which application I'm
in, I can always go to the Services menu
| | 02:20 | and choose New Reminder.
| | 02:22 | Now let's make it even better.
| | 02:24 | Go to System Preferences, click on
Keyboard, choose Keyboard Shortcuts, and
| | 02:29 | then choose Services.
| | 02:31 | What we're going to look for is our
New Reminder, and then click add shortcut.
| | 02:37 | I'm going to use Command+Option+R.
That's my shortcut.
| | 02:43 | Quit System Preferences.
| | 02:45 | Let's take a look at services.
| | 02:48 | Look, keyboard shortcut, Command+Option+R.
Let's see if it works.
| | 02:53 | I press Command+Option+R, and there's
my New Reminders Item window, and
| | 02:58 | it's going to work.
| | 02:58 | So again, I just type in my reminder,
click on Continue, and now I've got a reminder.
| | 03:04 | So the beauty of this is, again, with
the press of a few keys I can easily
| | 03:09 | create a new reminder without ever
going to the Reminders application. And just
| | 03:14 | so you know, this little spinning gear
icon up here? That indicates that the
| | 03:18 | workflow is running.
| | 03:20 | Once I enter something and click
Continue, that icon disappears because the
| | 03:29 | workflow is complete. And that's
creating a service workflow with Automator.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
12. Key Utilities AppsManaging processes in Activity Monitor| 00:00 | Let's take a short tour of the
important elements of Activity Monitor.
| | 00:04 | Activity Monitor, as its name implies,
is a utility that allows you to peak into
| | 00:08 | what your Mac is doing in the background.
| | 00:10 | Let's see how that works.
| | 00:11 | We'll launch it some other way.
| | 00:13 | Let's go to the Go Menu, we'll go to
Utilities, and there's Activity Monitor.
| | 00:18 | What we see in this window is a
series of things called Processes.
| | 00:23 | These are the things that your
computer is doing, and some of them you're
| | 00:27 | going to recognize.
| | 00:28 | So let's look through the list of
Processes and see if we find something. There!
| | 00:31 | Mail, we know what Mail is.
| | 00:34 | There's the Finder.
| | 00:35 | We're aware of what the Finder is.
| | 00:37 | There's Dashboard, and
here's Activity Monitor itself.
| | 00:42 | So great, we understand what those
things are, but what's all this other stuff?
| | 00:47 | Well, these are background processes,
things that your computer is doing that
| | 00:52 | aren't necessarily tied to a specific
application, but are nonetheless important
| | 00:56 | to your computer running.
| | 00:58 | Now we know what's happening in the background.
| | 01:00 | What use is this to us?
| | 01:02 | For our purposes, the real benefit
of Activity Monitor is to see what's
| | 01:06 | taking up your Mac's time.
| | 01:08 | So, if you find that your Mac is
running slowly, it's possible that there's
| | 01:11 | something going on that's slowing it down. And
we can use Activity Monitor to see what that is.
| | 01:18 | So first of all we'll go to the All
Processes pop-up menu, and I'm going to
| | 01:22 | choose just My Processes.
| | 01:23 | These are the ones that are happening
within my account. Then I'll click on
| | 01:28 | Percentage CPU, and that tells us the
percentage of CPU being used by various
| | 01:35 | things, and the one with the
greatest appetite appears at the top.
| | 01:38 | So, right now we've got this thing
called Screenflick going that's about 15% to
| | 01:43 | 16%, which isn't a lot.
| | 01:45 | Let me plug in a camera
card and see what that does.
| | 01:51 | So it opens iPhoto.
| | 01:53 | Look, iPhoto is taking 85%.
At least it was for a second.
| | 01:57 | Now it's down to about 19.3, 17.1. So
what it's doing now is cataloging my
| | 02:03 | camera card and as it does so, it's using more
CPU. But notice it settles down pretty quickly.
| | 02:11 | There are other things you can learn
about it, for example, the number of threads,
| | 02:15 | which is really something
you don't need to worry about.
| | 02:17 | However, you may want to
look at the RAM that it's using.
| | 02:20 | If there's something that's using a ton
of RAM, that makes less RAM available or
| | 02:25 | less short-term memory available to
your Mac. So if something's hogging that,
| | 02:29 | you may want to look at that process and
see if it's something that you really need.
| | 02:33 | Now, in most cases when you see things
here that you have no idea what the name
| | 02:38 | is for, just leave it alone.
| | 02:38 | However, if you see an application
that's running, say, GarageBand.
| | 02:42 | GarageBand, for example, is a big memory
hog, and it really taxes your processor.
| | 02:48 | So if you're working on a GarageBand
project and then you leave it, and you find
| | 02:53 | that GarageBand is still churning away
and taking up a bunch of CPU cycles, it's
| | 02:57 | not a bad idea to quit it.
| | 02:58 | When you do that, you may find that
your Mac works a little bit better.
| | 03:03 | Now, let's take a for-instance scenario.
| | 03:05 | I'm going to launch Safari.
| | 03:06 | So I've launched Safari.
| | 03:13 | Now, what's Safari doing?
| | 03:14 | Let's look in Process Name and
we can look at it alphabetically.
| | 03:17 | And here's Safari, and it's behaving itself.
| | 03:19 | It's hardly taking up any CPU. However,
what if it was, and what if it was taking
| | 03:25 | up a bunch of CPUs, using a
bunch of RAM, how can you stop?
| | 03:28 | Well, of course you could quit it and
that wouldn't be a problem, so off it goes
| | 03:31 | and it wouldn't do this anymore. But
what if it's some kind of a background
| | 03:36 | process that you recognize
and you'd like to get rid of it?
| | 03:39 | Well, you can't go to an application
to quit it because you don't have access to
| | 03:43 | that application. But what you
can do is choose Quit Process.
| | 03:46 | You'll be asked if you'd like to quit.
| | 03:48 | Try that first, if it quits, great.
| | 03:52 | If it doesn't quit -- let's
look at Photo Stream, for example.
| | 03:55 | I could choose Quit Process.
| | 03:57 | If it doesn't get out of the way,
you can force quit it, and essentially
| | 04:01 | that means "I'm going to quit you whether
you like it or not." And indeed it will quit.
| | 04:06 | Now, there are a few processes that
will come back because your Mac needs them.
| | 04:10 | So they'll quit, your Mac will
think "Uh-oh, I need that thing."
| | 04:13 | It will start up again.
| | 04:14 | Hopefully, when it does, it
doesn't start hogging your CPU.
| | 04:18 | There are few other things that
you can do within Activity Monitor.
| | 04:21 | You can check your System Memory.
| | 04:23 | So in this case we've got a lot of free memory.
| | 04:26 | You can look at Disk Activity.
| | 04:27 | So what's going on with your hard drive?
| | 04:29 | Do you see a lot of peaks like these?
| | 04:31 | Do they make sense?
| | 04:33 | If you're doing something like
backing up to another drive, for example, yes
| | 04:36 | you're going to see data moved back and
forth and you're going to see peaks like these.
| | 04:40 | But if your Mac seems to be idle and
it's doing something like this, you may
| | 04:43 | want to investigate.
| | 04:45 | Disk Usage, how much free space do you have?
| | 04:48 | And then you can also
look at the Network Activity.
| | 04:51 | Does your network
connection seem to be slowing down?
| | 04:54 | Well, let's take a look.
| | 04:55 | Gee, it seems to be doing an awful lot here.
| | 04:57 | I wonder why that is?
| | 04:59 | At that point, start your
investigation and see if you can track down what's
| | 05:03 | using your network. But again, most
important of all for our purposes is
| | 05:07 | looking at the CPU.
| | 05:09 | And that's the ups and
downs of Activity Monitor.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Formatting, partitioning, and repairing storage devices| 00:00 | One of the most versatile and powerful tools
included with Mountain Lion is Disk Utility.
| | 00:05 | You can use it to create and partition
hard drives as well as diagnose a funky
| | 00:09 | drive and repair its disk permissions.
| | 00:12 | You'll find this utility in the
Utilities folder, and that's how we'll get to it.
| | 00:16 | So go to Utilities and there's Disk Utility.
| | 00:20 | Along the left side, you see any hard
drives and volumes that are attached to
| | 00:24 | your Mac, and currently I have two.
| | 00:27 | Those volumes that are grayed out,
for example, this one, are unmounted. Now, I
| | 00:31 | can mount that drive simply by clicking on
it and then clicking Mount, and here it is.
| | 00:38 | Normally when people launch Disk
Utility, they do so to use First Aid, and you
| | 00:42 | can use this for a couple of reasons.
| | 00:44 | First of all, let's start with
our startup drive, which is here.
| | 00:50 | There are couple of things you can do.
| | 00:51 | You can Verify Disk Permissions,
you can Repair Disk Permissions, or you
| | 00:55 | can verify the Disk.
| | 00:56 | Exactly what is repairing disk
permissions and why would you want to do it?
| | 01:00 | Well the Mac OS is based on UNIX,
which has a system whereby specific user
| | 01:05 | accounts have a variety of powers
or permissions they use on their Mac.
| | 01:10 | For example, the root user can do
anything, whereas standard users' capabilities
| | 01:15 | are much more limited.
| | 01:16 | Now, sometimes these permissions can
get scrambled, which can then lead to
| | 01:20 | situations where you can't move or open
a file because the Mac thinks that you
| | 01:25 | have the wrong permissions.
| | 01:27 | To check permissions, you just
select a Volume and then you either verify
| | 01:31 | permissions or you can repair permissions.
| | 01:33 | Now quite honestly, you can verify
permissions, but if you find a permission
| | 01:37 | that's out of whack, you're
going to want to repair it anyway.
| | 01:40 | So I just simply click on Repair
Disk Permissions, and we'll do that now.
| | 01:45 | Depending on how much data you have and
the speed of your Mac, this can take a while.
| | 01:50 | And lucky me, it appears that
I had no problems whatsoever.
| | 01:54 | Now sometimes, you may see a message
that appears time and time again no matter
| | 01:58 | how many times you repair permissions.
| | 02:00 | In that case, don't worry about it.
| | 02:02 | Sometimes, Disk Utility and you Mac
disagrees about these things, but it's not
| | 02:06 | really causing any problems.
| | 02:08 | You also have the option to verify a
disk, and depending on which disk it is
| | 02:12 | you can also repair it.
| | 02:13 | When you have selected your startup
disk, you don't have the option to repair
| | 02:18 | it, because a Mac can't
repair its own startup disk.
| | 02:21 | Instead, you can repair another disk
that happens to be attached to your Mac.
| | 02:25 | So, I could verify my backup disk, or
if I find the problem with it, I can
| | 02:31 | choose to repair it.
| | 02:32 | I'm not going to do either one of those
things because it can take quite a while.
| | 02:35 | Another option you have is to erase a drive.
| | 02:40 | So, I'll select my drive, select Erase, and you
see I have a couple of options. One is the Format.
| | 02:46 | The suggested format when you
format a Mac's drive is this.
| | 02:50 | Mac OS Extended (Journaled). Unless you have
a very good reason for formatting it in
| | 02:55 | another format, leave this alone.
| | 02:58 | You can also name the drive here.
| | 02:59 | When you erase, you have security options.
| | 03:05 | By default, if you choose fastest, when
you erase the drive it wipes out the
| | 03:10 | directory, but the files that were on the
drive remain there. They're just hidden from you.
| | 03:14 | You can check the next setting, and
this takes longer, but in this case, the
| | 03:19 | data that is on the drive will be
overwritten one time with a series of
| | 03:24 | nonsense characters.
| | 03:26 | This is more secure because it makes it
much harder for a bad guy to try to get
| | 03:30 | stuff of your drive but again, it takes longer.
| | 03:34 | Next option is at 3-pass wipe.
| | 03:37 | So, instead of writing nonsense one time
over your drive, it happens three times,
| | 03:42 | and again, this takes much longer to do that.
| | 03:44 | And finally, the most secure is
to overwrite your data seven times.
| | 03:49 | I can't imagine why you would want to
do this unless you were some kind of
| | 03:52 | international man or woman of
mystery, and you had government secrets
| | 03:57 | on your hard drive.
| | 03:59 | This is really excessive.
| | 04:00 | If you get to the point where you
have that kind of data and you wanted to
| | 04:04 | destroy it, the best idea really is to take the
hard drive out of your Mac and hit it with
| | 04:09 | the sledge hammer multiple times
to physically destroy the media.
| | 04:12 | But if you do choose this option,
prepare to erase your drive overnight.
| | 04:16 | This can take hours and hours to do.
| | 04:19 | For the vast majority of us,
fastest is just fine. And I'll cancel that.
| | 04:25 | When you're ready to erase,
you click on the Erase button.
| | 04:29 | This gives you a warning saying, "Are
you sure you want to do this, because your
| | 04:34 | data is going to be gone?" So make
sure that you've selected the right drive
| | 04:38 | before you do this, at which
point, go ahead and erase.
| | 04:41 | And of course it's always a good idea to
have a backup of your data anyway, so
| | 04:45 | should you do the bad thing,
you can always get it back.
| | 04:49 | Now, let's take a look at the Partition tab.
| | 04:52 | In the Partition tab, as its name
implies, you can chop your Mac's hard
| | 04:56 | drive up into volumes.
| | 04:59 | Now currently, we have a single
partition, but I can make it two partitions of
| | 05:05 | equal size, seven partitions of equal
size, 16 partitions of equal size.
| | 05:11 | Let's go back to two partitions.
| | 05:13 | Once I've created this, they don't have
to be of equal size. Instead, I can drag
| | 05:18 | this line here and make one
partition larger than another.
| | 05:24 | Now when you choose to partition
your drive, you want to take a look at
| | 05:26 | this Options button.
| | 05:28 | You have three options on how
you're going to partition your drive.
| | 05:31 | If this drive is going to be used to
boot up your Mac, make sure that this GUID
| | 05:37 | Partition Table is the option you set.
| | 05:40 | That is the option you use
for a bootable Mac drive.
| | 05:43 | Apple Partition Map and Master
Boot Record are for other purposes.
| | 05:48 | Apple Partition Map is if you have a
PowerPC-based Mac, and these are years old,
| | 05:52 | so it's unlikely you do, and you
certainly can't run Mountain Lion on it anyway.
| | 05:57 | And Master Boot Record is for a
Windows machine, so we'll cancel that.
| | 06:01 | Now, if I were to go ahead and
partition this, I would end up with what appears
| | 06:06 | to be two hard drive icons on the
desktop for this hard drive instead of one.
| | 06:10 | This is not something I want to do so I won't.
| | 06:15 | So now we're just back to our single partition.
| | 06:18 | Now, I want to show you one last
thing before we leave Disk Utility.
| | 06:21 | Using this application, you can
create virtual volumes called Disk Images.
| | 06:26 | To do this, I'll go to the File menu and I'll
choose New, and I'll choose Blank Disk Image.
| | 06:34 | In the window that appears, I'll name
my image, I'll save it on the hard drive,
| | 06:39 | I'm going to leave it at a 100 megabytes
right now, as for the size. Format is fine.
| | 06:45 | I am going to choose Encryption, and we'll
make this 128-Bit AES, reasonably secure.
| | 06:53 | I'll leave it as a single partition,
read/write, and now I will click on Create.
| | 06:58 | Now, because I've chosen to encrypt
this, it's going to ask me to enter a
| | 07:02 | password and to verify that password.
| | 07:05 | I'm going to enter a really simple
password and you shouldn't. And it will tell
| | 07:09 | me this is very, very weak.
| | 07:13 | You should do a better job but
I'm not going to, and here's key.
| | 07:18 | This will automatically
remember this password in my Keychain.
| | 07:23 | If I leave that on, and I'm working in
this account, and I leave my computer and
| | 07:28 | somebody wants to open this Disk
Image, they will be able to because the
| | 07:32 | password has been memorized.
| | 07:34 | I'm going to turn that off and
you'll see why in just a second.
| | 07:38 | Now, I click on OK.
| | 07:42 | It's just created my Disk Image.
| | 07:45 | It's mounted, so I can put stuff on
here if I like, so let me do just that.
| | 07:49 | I'll go to my Documents folder, take
this presentation, and I'll put it in there.
| | 07:57 | I'll now close it, and now I'll
unmount that Disk Image. So, where is it?
| | 08:05 | Well, it's still in here.
| | 08:07 | That was simply the mounted
version of this archive right here.
| | 08:11 | So I'll double-click on it.
| | 08:12 | When I do, I'm prompted for my
password, and the reason is because I didn't
| | 08:17 | store it in my Keychain.
| | 08:19 | So I enter the password, OK.
| | 08:22 | Here's my disk image, and there's my document.
| | 08:27 | So what good is this?
| | 08:28 | Well, this is one way to create a protected
archive so that nobody but you can open it.
| | 08:33 | So, while you can make your Mac
secure with your password or one thing or
| | 08:37 | another, this is one way to create a
little portion of your Mac where you have
| | 08:41 | super secret stuff that you don't
want anybody else to have access too.
| | 08:45 | I'll eject my image. And what the heck,
Trash the archive. And there you are, Disk
| | 08:55 | Utility's greatest talents.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Taking care of your passwords| 00:00 | As we've gone through this course,
you've likely seen instances where we are
| | 00:04 | prompted to save a password to a
Keychain, but what exactly is this Keychain?
| | 00:09 | Well, Keychain is where your
passwords are stored, and it's managed by an
| | 00:14 | application called Keychain
Access, so let's see what that does.
| | 00:18 | It's in your Utilities folder,
and here is Keychain Access.
| | 00:24 | At the top left of the
window are your Keychains.
| | 00:27 | By default, you see these three Keychains.
| | 00:29 | The first is called login.
| | 00:31 | This is tied to your login password, so the
same one you use to log in to your account.
| | 00:36 | System has its own series of
keychains, and System Roots has another set of
| | 00:40 | keychains. And then below are Categories.
| | 00:43 | So you can see all the Keychain
items by clicking on All Items.
| | 00:47 | You can see just Passwords.
| | 00:49 | Something called Secure Notes,
where you can create a note and then
| | 00:53 | password protect it.
| | 00:55 | Certificates, these are from websites
that indicate that a website is a good
| | 00:59 | website and not some fake one.
| | 01:00 | Keys, not something you need to
worry about, and then more certificates.
| | 01:06 | So what we're largely
interested in is passwords.
| | 01:10 | Now, as we go through Passwords, you'll
see a list of every website and email
| | 01:14 | account that you've saved the password for.
| | 01:17 | Now some of this is marginally
helpful, like when was it last modified, for
| | 01:21 | example, or which Keychain does it live in?
| | 01:23 | However, what we really want to use
this for is recovering a password.
| | 01:29 | So let's choose Google Calendar.
| | 01:30 | I double-click on it, and
you see the option to Show Password.
| | 01:35 | Click on that, and you are then
prompted for your login password.
| | 01:40 | So, again the password you
use to log in to your Mac.
| | 01:43 | At that point you would enter your
password, click on allow, and then here, in the
| | 01:48 | Show password field, you would
see your password in the clear.
| | 01:52 | You'd then know what that
password is in case you've forgotten it.
| | 01:55 | In this case, I'm going to choose
Deny because I don't want to expose my
| | 01:59 | password for one and all to see.
| | 02:02 | But again, this is the technique for
finding a password that you may have lost.
| | 02:06 | What else can you do in Keychain Access?
| | 02:08 | Well, suppose you're in a situation
like your email program, for example, and
| | 02:12 | you're constantly nagged for a password.
| | 02:15 | You enter the password, you allow it to
be used, and you can get your email, great.
| | 02:20 | Go back to mail an hour later, it
prompts you for that password again. Well you
| | 02:24 | already added it and you told it to
add it to Keychain Access, and yet, it
| | 02:28 | doesn't seem to be working.
| | 02:29 | Well, that's because the Keychain may be damaged.
| | 02:32 | In that case, go to Keychain Access,
choose Keychain First Aid, here's your
| | 02:38 | username, enter your
password, and click on verify.
| | 02:42 | It will run through very quickly to see if
there are any problems with the Keychain.
| | 02:47 | If there are any, a red
entry will appear in here.
| | 02:51 | If that's the case, click on Repair, click
Start, and your Keychain will be repaired.
| | 02:59 | There are other things that
you can do with Keychain Access.
| | 03:01 | For example, you can create a new
Keychain, and then you can ask that your
| | 03:07 | passwords be stored there.
| | 03:08 | If you create a Keychain and you
no longer want it, you can delete it.
| | 03:12 | You can change settings for your Keychain.
| | 03:15 | If you're really worried about security,
you can have your Keychain locked after
| | 03:19 | a certain number of minutes.
| | 03:21 | This isn't a bad idea, particularly if
you walk away from your Mac a lot of the
| | 03:26 | time and other people have access to it.
| | 03:28 | Because if you leave your Mac up and
running, somebody could come in, check
| | 03:32 | you email for you and see what's in it,
because Keychain has memorized your password.
| | 03:36 | However, if you have it lock
after a certain number of minutes,
| | 03:40 | they would have to know your login
password in order to get into your email or
| | 03:44 | some other kind of password-protected service.
| | 03:47 | And the other option is
you can lock when sleeping.
| | 03:50 | So put your Mac to sleep, before anybody
can do anything that requires a password,
| | 03:54 | they would have to know your login password.
| | 03:57 | And those are the key
elements of Keychain Access.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Setting up a Windows install with Boot Camp| 00:00 | By now, you're surely aware that
your Macintosh runs Mac OS X, which is
| | 00:05 | its operating system.
| | 00:07 | However, you can also run Windows on
your Mac if you care to, and you can run it
| | 00:12 | natively in its own partition.
| | 00:14 | I'm going to show you how to do that now.
| | 00:15 | So we'll go to the Go Menu, and I'll select
Utilities, and I will launch Boot Camp Assistant.
| | 00:23 | Boot Camp Assistant will create a
separate partition for Windows and then it
| | 00:28 | will walk through the
installation process on Windows.
| | 00:32 | Now, if you've ever set up a PC
before and installed Windows on it, you're
| | 00:35 | actually going to find this easier
to do than it is on a Windows machine
| | 00:39 | because Boot Camp takes care of answering all
the questions that Windows prompts you with.
| | 00:44 | In this case, all we have
to do is click on Continue.
| | 00:49 | Now, we have two options here,
either we can download the Windows Support
| | 00:52 | Software for this Mac, or if you've
already downloaded those files, you just have
| | 00:57 | to click that option and proceed.
| | 00:59 | We need to download the Windows
Support files so we will click Continue.
| | 01:04 | And the Mac goes off to the internet,
looking for those files, and then it
| | 01:07 | will download them.
| | 01:09 | You may be wondering exactly what
this Windows Support Software is.
| | 01:13 | It's the stuff that allows your
Apple hardware to work with Windows.
| | 01:16 | So for example, support for your
mouse and your keyboard and your trackpad.
| | 01:21 | At this point, you would
see a couple of options.
| | 01:23 | One is to burn a copy to a CD or DVD,
or you can save a copy of this Windows
| | 01:28 | Support Software to an external drive.
| | 01:30 | If your Mac doesn't have a CD burner,
you can just choose that second option.
| | 01:36 | Either way you decide to go, make
sure that you keep a copy of the software
| | 01:39 | because you're going to need
it after you install Windows.
| | 01:42 | We're going to go back so you can
see what happens in this process.
| | 01:45 | We'll say we have already downloaded the
Windows Support Software, because indeed,
| | 01:49 | we have, and I'll click Continue.
| | 01:53 | Now as I said, Windows needs its own
partition and this is where you tell the
| | 01:58 | Mac how much space to give Windows.
| | 02:01 | You could just Divide Equally.
| | 02:02 | I think that's a little generous.
| | 02:04 | You can take this dot here and drag it,
to determine the size of the partition.
| | 02:09 | In our case, I'm going to give it 30
gigabytes, and then all I have to do
| | 02:15 | is click Partition.
| | 02:17 | This will create a separate volume for Windows.
| | 02:20 | Now, don't worry that you're
going to be deleting anything.
| | 02:22 | What's actually happening here is OS X
is actually doing a little housekeeping.
| | 02:26 | What it's doing is taking the files
that are on the part of the hard drive that
| | 02:30 | will become the Windows partition and
it's moving them to the part of the hard
| | 02:34 | drive that will be the Mac OS X partition.
| | 02:37 | Once it completes the partition, you'll
see that you now have a Boot Camp volume
| | 02:42 | as well as your Mac volume.
| | 02:45 | Now it will prompt you to do the installation.
| | 02:47 | As the window suggests, insert your
Windows disk and once you've done that,
| | 02:50 | then you click Start Installation.
| | 02:54 | When you start the installation, it
will restart your computer and then it will
| | 02:57 | install Windows from that Windows disk.
| | 03:00 | Once your computer restarts, you will
see a window showing that Windows is
| | 03:04 | installing software.
| | 03:06 | At this point, you're simply
going through a Windows installation.
| | 03:10 | So, enter information as requested,
click the proper buttons, and eventually,
| | 03:14 | Windows will be installed on
your Mac in that separate partition.
| | 03:19 | Once Windows is installed, you have
a couple of ways of getting into it.
| | 03:22 | One is through the
Startup Disk System Preference.
| | 03:26 | You will find that your Windows
partition is there, you can select that, Restart,
| | 03:29 | and you'll boot into Windows.
| | 03:31 | Don't worry, when you get into Windows,
there is going to be a special control
| | 03:35 | panel that you can use then
to boot back into your Mac.
| | 03:38 | Another option is you can restart your
Mac and hold down the Option key, at which
| | 03:42 | point you can choose to boot
into your Windows partition.
| | 03:45 | And that's Boot Camp Assistant.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
13. TroubleshootingCreating a boot drive| 00:00 | As you're now aware, you can boot
into the Mac's Recovery HD partition, to
| | 00:04 | reinstall a copy of OS X. The
difficulty here is that you must re-download the
| | 00:11 | entire install, which can be multiple gigabytes.
| | 00:14 | If you have a slow internet connection,
this can take a long time, or if you have
| | 00:18 | a data cap on your internet
connection, it may end up costing you money.
| | 00:22 | Wouldn't it be more convenient if you
could create your own startup disk that
| | 00:27 | included the OS X installer?
| | 00:29 | Well, you can, and I'm going to show you how.
| | 00:32 | First thing you need is a USB stick
that has eight gigabytes of storage or more,
| | 00:37 | and I have one with me.
| | 00:38 | So, I'll plug that into my Mac
and it appears on the desktop.
| | 00:42 | Now, let's launch Disk
Utility, and here's my USB stick.
| | 00:48 | Now, I have to format it
so it can become bootable.
| | 00:50 | So I'll click on Partition.
| | 00:52 | I'll choose one Partition.
| | 00:54 | Click on Options and select
GUID Partition Table and click OK.
| | 01:02 | The format will be Mac OS Extended (Journaled),
and I'll call this Install OS X,
| | 01:09 | then I click on Apply.
| | 01:12 | Indeed, I do want to Partition it,
and now it's properly formatted.
| | 01:17 | For now, I'll leave Disk Utility open
because I'm going to need it in a second.
| | 01:21 | When we downloaded a copy of OS X,
I asked you to keep a copy of the
| | 01:25 | installer, and here's why.
| | 01:27 | We'll go to Documents, and here's my installer.
| | 01:30 | It's still here because I
moved it to another folder.
| | 01:33 | Now, I'll Control-click on it, and
choose Show Package Contents.
| | 01:38 | Open the Contents folder and then open
the SharedSupport folder, and this is the
| | 01:43 | file I'm looking at.
| | 01:44 | This is the OS X installer,
so I'll move this window aside.
| | 01:47 | I click on Restore.
| | 01:51 | I'll choose as my source,
this InstallESD.dmg file.
| | 01:57 | The Destination will be my OS X USB key drive.
| | 02:03 | Now, I click on restore.
| | 02:06 | It will erase it, asks for my password, and OK.
| | 02:12 | As you can see, this takes awhile to
do and we're not going to make you sit
| | 02:16 | through this whole thing.
| | 02:17 | We'll rush through this a
bit. And the job is done.
| | 02:20 | We now have a USB eight gigabyte key
drive, that not only includes the OS X
| | 02:25 | installer, but is bootable as well.
| | 02:28 | So, we can take a look at its contents.
| | 02:31 | Here's the installer, and here are
the things necessary to boot the Mac.
| | 02:36 | So, to boot this Mac from this drive,
you could go to System Preferences,
| | 02:41 | Startup Disk, select the
drive and then choose Restart.
| | 02:46 | Or if your Mac won't boot up because
the OS is corrupt in some way, you can
| | 02:50 | simply insert that drive into a USB
port on your Mac, restart the Mac, and hold
| | 02:56 | down the Option key.
| | 02:57 | When you do, you should see this volume
appear among your choices to boot from.
| | 03:02 | Choose to reinstall Mac OS X, and instead
of downloading it from the internet, it
| | 03:07 | will use the copy that's
stored on the USB drive.
| | 03:10 | It's a much faster installation, plus it
makes a great Emergency Startup Drive.
| | 03:15 | And that's how to make a
bootable installer for your Mac.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Understanding and configuring permissions| 00:00 | Mac OS X is based on the UNIX operating
system, and one of the beauties of UNIX
| | 00:05 | is that it does its best to prevent
you from mucking around with the more
| | 00:09 | intimate portions of the operating system.
| | 00:11 | And it does this by assigning
certain powers or permissions to each other.
| | 00:15 | The latest versions of OS X are a
little sterner about these permissions than
| | 00:19 | previous versions of the Mac OS, and
there may be times when you want to change
| | 00:23 | information to make something
easier, and this is how you go about it.
| | 00:27 | By way of demonstration, I'm going to
go to the Applications folder, and let me
| | 00:32 | find the Chess application, and I'm
going to drag it to the Trash, because I just
| | 00:37 | want to get rid of it.
| | 00:38 | And I'm told, "Chess can't be modified or
deleted because it's required by Mac OS X."
| | 00:45 | Nonsense, it is not required by Mac OS X. I
don't need Chess to run my Mac. It's just a toy.
| | 00:53 | What's really happening here is
Apple has determined that any of its
| | 00:57 | applications that are in the
Applications Folder cannot be thrown out.
| | 01:02 | You don't have to use them,
but you can't get rid of them.
| | 01:05 | Well, actually you can, and
I'm going to show you how.
| | 01:08 | We're going to do this by adjusting permissions.
| | 01:10 | So, I will click on Chess to select it,
then I'll press Command_I, to bring
| | 01:15 | up the Info window.
| | 01:16 | When I do this, you see this Sharing &
Permissions area at the bottom of the window.
| | 01:21 | If you don't see that, click the triangle
next to Sharing & Permissions and now you will.
| | 01:26 | At the bottom, we have three Users.
| | 01:28 | One is System. The second is
Wheel, and the last one is Everyone.
| | 01:33 | So, System is reserved for the Mac itself.
| | 01:35 | Wheel applies to the root account, and then
there's the rest of us schmoes and we are Everyone.
| | 01:42 | The reason I can't throw this out is
because as part of the Everyone group, I
| | 01:46 | only can read this, I can't write to it,
which really means I can't delete it.
| | 01:51 | But I'm going to change
permissions so that I can do that.
| | 01:54 | So, I'll click on the Lock icon,
enter my password, and now I can
| | 01:59 | change permissions.
| | 02:00 | For the Everyone permission, I'm going to
change that from Read Only to Read & Write.
| | 02:06 | I can then close this window, grab
Chess, move it to the Trash, and it's gone,
| | 02:14 | again, because I changed the permission.
| | 02:16 | I'll undo that by pressing
Command+Z, and back it goes.
| | 02:20 | Now, if I want to change that
permission back, as it was originally, unlock,
| | 02:26 | password, Read Only.
| | 02:30 | There are a couple of other
things that you can do here.
| | 02:33 | You can add other users, so I click on
plus, and you see that I have a few options.
| | 02:39 | One is Administrators, so I can
add this user, which means that any
| | 02:43 | administrator can use
whatever permission is applied to it.
| | 02:47 | I could add myself,
| | 02:48 | I could another account, or
one of these other users.
| | 02:52 | I can also choose people from contacts or
groups of contacts to create a group permission.
| | 02:57 | I don't care to do any of these
things so I'll click on Cancel.
| | 03:01 | One other thing you may want to look at
is the ability to change the permissions
| | 03:05 | on a folder and then apply those
permissions to everything else in that folder.
| | 03:09 | So, I'll go into Documents, I'm going
to create a new folder, and I'll drag a
| | 03:16 | few things into it.
| | 03:18 | Select the folder, press Command+I,
and now I have the option to change
| | 03:23 | permissions on that folder.
| | 03:26 | Let's say I want everybody to be
able to read and write to this folder.
| | 03:30 | Well, that's fine, but
what about the stuff in it?
| | 03:33 | Click on the Tool icon and
enable Apply to enclosed items.
| | 03:39 | Click OK, and now all the items
within this folder have inherited the
| | 03:44 | permissions that I assigned to that folder.
| | 03:47 | So, if you ever get stuck, finding that
you can access a folder, but not certain
| | 03:51 | items within it, it could be that the
items don't have the proper permissions.
| | 03:54 | If instead, you change the
permissions for the folder and then apply to the
| | 03:58 | enclosed items, you should
be able to access those items.
| | 04:01 | And that's editing permissions in Mac OS X.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Exploring troubleshooting techniques| 00:00 | Except for you and me, dear
viewer, nothing is perfect.
| | 00:03 | No, not even your Mac.
| | 00:05 | There will be times when that Mac
misbehaves in confounding ways and it won't
| | 00:10 | start up, it freezes or shows an error
when you're trying to boot up, or when
| | 00:14 | it does boot up, applications won't
launch, or they spontaneously quit, or your
| | 00:17 | Mac runs very slowly.
| | 00:19 | Fortunately, there are things you
can do to help your Mac and yourself
| | 00:22 | when things go wrong.
| | 00:24 | Let's talk about those things right now.
| | 00:26 | First of all, if you walk into your
room, you press your Mac's power button
| | 00:32 | and nothing happens.
| | 00:33 | The first thing you want to do is take
a look at power connections, so you want
| | 00:38 | to make sure that your Mac's plugged into power.
| | 00:39 | Also, if it's plugged into a power strip,
make sure that the power strip is turned on.
| | 00:43 | If it's plugged into a wall socket,
make sure that the switch on the wall is
| | 00:47 | switched on, so that
everything is connected to power.
| | 00:51 | Also check your cable connections.
| | 00:53 | It's possible that the power cord in the
back of the Mac or in your laptop isn't
| | 00:57 | seated properly so it's
not getting power that way.
| | 01:01 | You also want to scrutinize
recently installed memory and hardware.
| | 01:05 | For example, you start up your Mac, and
you see this bunch of gibberish appear
| | 01:10 | on the screen and that's
called a kernel panic.
| | 01:13 | If you see this kind of thing and you
have recently installed memory or some
| | 01:17 | kind of hardware, shut off your Mac,
disconnect it from power, re-seat that
| | 01:23 | memory, or try moving it to different
slots, or take it out altogether, and go with
| | 01:27 | the original memory.
| | 01:29 | Put it back together, restart your
Mac and see if it operates properly.
| | 01:33 | If so, it's possible that the memory
you've put in was either incompatible, or
| | 01:38 | bad, or it simply wasn't seated.
| | 01:41 | Sometimes you have to press
really hard to get the memory in.
| | 01:44 | Don't press so hard that you're going to break
something, but make sure it's well-seated.
| | 01:46 | There are also issues with adding new hardware.
| | 01:48 | Sometimes, you'll have a crash or you'll
have a kernel panic, if you've attached
| | 01:53 | an incompatible device.
| | 01:55 | So, what you want to do in that case is
shut down the Mac, disconnect everything
| | 01:59 | except your keyboard and your mouse and
your monitor, if you use one with your
| | 02:04 | Mac, and then restart.
| | 02:05 | If it seems to be starting okay,
that's an indication that there's a
| | 02:09 | problem with this hardware.
| | 02:11 | In that case, go to the manufacturer's
site and see if there's some kind of driver
| | 02:16 | that you can use that's an update of
whatever driver it's currently using.
| | 02:20 | It may be that the driver that you
originally had was incompatible with Lion.
| | 02:24 | You have a new driver and it will work okay.
| | 02:28 | As I said, disconnect non-essential peripherals.
| | 02:31 | This can be a problem, not only
because of Startup, but you may have already
| | 02:35 | started up your Mac and it still seems
to be working in kind of an odd way.
| | 02:39 | Shut down, disconnect the non-essential
stuff, start up, see how it works.
| | 02:43 | If it works better, shut down again and
start adding in peripherals one at a time.
| | 02:48 | Add it in once, see how it works, if it's
okay, shut down, add another one, start up.
| | 02:54 | Is it okay? Great.
| | 02:55 | So, keep repeating until you
find the problem peripheral.
| | 03:00 | You can also disable Startup Items at startup.
| | 03:03 | Oftentimes, when you install software,
it will install Startup Items, and these
| | 03:06 | are little programs that
launch as your Mac is booting up.
| | 03:11 | Most of the time, these things are very,
very helpful, but sometimes, there can
| | 03:15 | be a conflict, and this can
cause a problem with your Mac.
| | 03:18 | If you want to disable Startup Items
at startup, just hold down the Shift
| | 03:21 | key as you start up and you'll boot
into something called Safe Boot Mode.
| | 03:25 | If your Mac is working perfectly under
Safe Boot, but not otherwise, go into
| | 03:29 | Users & Groups, unlock the System
Preference with your user name and your
| | 03:33 | password, and then go into
Login Items and take a look there.
| | 03:37 | Remove the items there and then startup again.
| | 03:39 | If it starts up okay, just like with
peripherals, add the Startup Item, see
| | 03:43 | how your Mac runs, add another one, see how
it runs, until you can isolate the problem.
| | 03:49 | If your Mac is still misbehaving, there
maybe something corrupt on the hard drive.
| | 03:52 | In that case, you want to restart your
Mac, hold down the Option key, and then
| | 03:58 | when you have the option to choose
volumes, choose the Restore HD Partition.
| | 04:03 | A shortcut to this is to hold down
Command+R when you startup and it will boot
| | 04:06 | into that partition.
| | 04:08 | Once you've done this, run Disk Utility.
| | 04:11 | This will be one of the options in the window.
| | 04:13 | Once you run Disk Utility, launch
First Aid, and choose Verify Disk.
| | 04:18 | If it finds a problem, choose Repair
Disk and hopefully that fixes your problem.
| | 04:24 | Disk First Aid is pretty good, but
it's really not a miracle worker.
| | 04:28 | If you need a stronger repair
tool, there are others out there.
| | 04:31 | Elsewhere in the course, I've
talked about Alsoft's Disk Warrior.
| | 04:34 | This is a utility that I swear by. It's $100.
| | 04:37 | It can fix low-level corruption
that other utilities can't touch.
| | 04:41 | I think it's absolutely worth having.
| | 04:43 | You may only use it one time, but it
may save your data, and therefore, your
| | 04:47 | bacon, so worth getting.
| | 04:50 | It's also worth your
while to update your software.
| | 04:53 | It's not the case that Apple goes to
every software vendor in the world and
| | 04:56 | says, "Oh, by the way, we're going to be
coming out with a new version of Mac OS X
| | 04:59 | in the next six months.
| | 05:00 | So, why don't you please update your
software, so it's going to be compatible
| | 05:04 | with our operating system?"
| | 05:05 | Sometimes, a new operating system will
come out and software vendors need to
| | 05:09 | catch up and make their
software compatible with the Mac OS.
| | 05:14 | In this case, if things don't seem
to be working right, you launch an
| | 05:17 | application and it's crashing,
see if there's an update for it.
| | 05:20 | It's possible that update will help any
problem you're having with the software.
| | 05:25 | Check Activity Monitor.
| | 05:26 | If your Mac is churning along, go into
Activity Monitor, as I showed you in
| | 05:32 | one of our other movies, and see
what's taking all that processor time.
| | 05:35 | It's possible there's some background
process that you can do without, that
| | 05:39 | you can get rid of that won't eat up your
processor, and therefore slow down your Mac.
| | 05:44 | If you're having a real problem
with a piece of software, you've done
| | 05:49 | everything you can, delete it and
reinstall it, because it's possible that it
| | 05:53 | has become corrupted and with a fresh install
of that software, then it will work perfectly.
| | 05:58 | If everything seems to be going wrong
and you just can't figure out what the
| | 06:03 | problem is, there is no
shame in restoring from a backup.
| | 06:07 | Of course, you've backed up, I've
told you to backup and you've done it.
| | 06:11 | Good for you, so restart your Mac,
hold down the Option key, boot into the
| | 06:18 | Restore HD Partition, and when you do,
you'll see an option to restore from the
| | 06:22 | Time Machine Backup.
| | 06:23 | Choose that option, restore your
data, and everything should be okay.
| | 06:27 | If not, you can go as far back as
reformatting the drive using Disk Utility, and
| | 06:33 | then reinstall Mac OS X, and
then restore your software.
| | 06:38 | And court of last resort, if you've done
all these things, or if any one of these
| | 06:43 | things seems too difficult
for you, give Apple a call.
| | 06:46 | They made the software.
| | 06:48 | They made the hardware.
| | 06:49 | They know the answers.
| | 06:50 | If you have a local Apple Store, you
can make an appointment with a Genius,
| | 06:54 | take your computer in
there, and they'll help you out.
| | 06:57 | If you have Apple Care, which I think is
a good idea, this extends your warranty
| | 07:01 | to three years instead of one.
| | 07:03 | You can give Apple a call on the phone.
| | 07:05 | Oftentimes, they'll tell you to take
your hardware down to an Apple Store, if
| | 07:08 | there's one nearby, or if there isn't, you
can ship your stuff to Apple, free of charge.
| | 07:13 | Also, many towns have Apple
Authorized Service Centers.
| | 07:17 | These are technicians
who've been trained by Apple.
| | 07:19 | They know Apple stuff backwards and
forwards and they can fix your Apple
| | 07:23 | gear for you as well.
| | 07:24 | Now, this may seem like a
long list, but it's a logical one.
| | 07:27 | If you follow these steps, chances are
that your Mac is going to be back in the
| | 07:31 | pink in no time at all.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
14. Having Some Fun with the MacGetting your game on| 00:00 | If you've used an iOS device, you
might be familiar with a little something
| | 00:04 | called Game Center.
| | 00:05 | It's kind of a social networking service
that also allows you to challenge other
| | 00:09 | people to play games, as
well as brag about your scores.
| | 00:13 | A version of Game Center is now
found on the Mac, and it works a little
| | 00:16 | something like this.
| | 00:17 | So let's give it a go.
| | 00:19 | Here's Game Center and here is my Me
screen, and indeed, I am The GAMERATOR,
| | 00:25 | and I'm gaming the system.
| | 00:27 | If I wanted to, I could change my status,
Return, and now I have a new status.
| | 00:34 | I could also change my photo if I wanted to.
| | 00:36 | If I click on Account, I could view my
account, I could sign out, and I could sign in
| | 00:40 | with a different one.
| | 00:41 | Currently, if you look here, you
see I have three games, so let's click on
| | 00:45 | Games and see what I have got.
| | 00:47 | I have Pocket Planes.
| | 00:49 | Let me see, how good I am at that?
| | 00:50 | Oh, let's see, I believe out of 1,974,916
people, I am the worst person in the
| | 00:57 | world at this game, which is shocking.
| | 01:00 | So let me click on that, and I'm number
one of my friends, and the reason I am is
| | 01:04 | because I have no friends, and
let's do something about that.
| | 01:07 | Again, here are the games that I
have that are Game Center compatible.
| | 01:13 | And then I have some recommendations up here.
| | 01:15 | So, what happens is Game Center keeps
track of the kind of games you play and
| | 01:19 | then it will recommend some to you,
the idea of being that if you click on them,
| | 01:23 | you'll be taken to Mac App Store and
hopefully you will purchase those games.
| | 01:27 | So it's an advertising vehicle.
| | 01:30 | Go to Friends, any Friends? No, no Friends.
| | 01:34 | Well, I guess I'll just sit here and
wait until I get a friend request and then
| | 01:38 | maybe I can be friends with somebody.
| | 01:42 | Oh, Ian wants to be my friend. He is so awesome.
Okay.
| | 01:46 | So now, I'll go to Requests. Wow!
| | 01:49 | Ian Martin is THE BIG KA-IAN.
| | 01:52 | He wants to be my friend.
| | 01:53 | If I want Ian to be my friend, of
course, and I do, I will click Accept.
| | 01:57 | However, if Ian and I are not getting
along, I can just ignore him and he just
| | 02:01 | goes away, but I'm going to accept it
because, again, I want him to be my friend.
| | 02:05 | When I look at Requests now, I have no other requests,
that was the single one I got. I look in Friends.
| | 02:11 | Look, I've got a Friend! And
indeed I do, and it is Ian.
| | 02:15 | We can look at the games we have in
common and it appears that Chess, we have in
| | 02:19 | common, and so far, I've
done nothing with Chess at all.
| | 02:22 | And Ian Martin has OS X games too.
| | 02:25 | He has Alien March.
| | 02:27 | If I click on Free, I can
see how he's done with that.
| | 02:31 | Here's his ranking, he's doing okay,
but then on to the right, you can see how
| | 02:36 | many players are playing this thing, and
these are the ranked players, and it's over 53,000.
| | 02:40 | You can see the kind of
points that they've gotten.
| | 02:43 | Also, you can look at things like
Achievements, Players, so on and so forth.
| | 02:47 | So, there's a lot of information
about individual games in there.
| | 02:51 | You can also challenge other people to
games, and they can challenge you, and when
| | 02:54 | that happens, there's a Challenges Area.
| | 02:57 | Currently, I have no challenges, but
if did, let's say Ian was playing Angry
| | 03:02 | Birds and he'd racked up
three stars on every level.
| | 03:06 | And so, he could issue a challenge to me and say,
"Hey, apparently you're not doing all
| | 03:10 | that well on Angry Birds,
but you could do better.
| | 03:13 | I challenge you to do better than
me on this particular level." And I can
| | 03:17 | meet that challenge. And then --
| | 03:19 | This is kind of this
bragging bit that I talked about.
| | 03:22 | If I do better than him, then I can brag back
to him and spike the ball and say, "Ah ha ha!
| | 03:27 | I did better than you did." So, there you go.
| | 03:30 | When you go through this, on your home
screen, you will see other popular games here.
| | 03:35 | If you click on them, you'll be taken
to the Mac App Store to download games.
| | 03:40 | This is a very rough and ready
version of what Game Center can do for you.
| | 03:45 | I suggest that, if you are into Mac games,
you spend a lot of time in Game Center.
| | 03:49 | Invite people who are your friends.
| | 03:51 | Also, look at the recommendations.
| | 03:53 | There may be people you've heard of
who aren't currently your friends, go
| | 03:56 | ahead and invite them, and you will
have a richer gaming experiences.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Integrating with Facebook and Twitter| 00:00 | Mac OS X now supports
Twitter and Facebook integration.
| | 00:04 | Generally, you use this for
sharing information with other people.
| | 00:08 | Let's see how this works. Let's
set it up in System Preferences, we'll go Mail,
| | 00:12 | Contacts & Calendars.
| | 00:14 | And just like setting up an email
account, we'll choose a Twitter account.
| | 00:19 | I'll enter my name along with my
password, and then click Sign In.
| | 00:25 | Now, I'm signed in.
| | 00:26 | Now, look at the Update Contacts button.
| | 00:29 | If I click on that, Twitter will
through my contacts within Contacts
| | 00:33 | Application and it will look
specifically for email addresses and phone numbers
| | 00:38 | that happen to be part of a Twitter account.
| | 00:40 | If it finds any of those, it will
then add the Twitter user names for those
| | 00:44 | contacts to my contact cards.
| | 00:47 | In this case, I'm not going to
do that, I'll click on Cancel.
| | 00:50 | So now, Twitter is integrated with my Mac.
| | 00:53 | Let's see how that works.
| | 00:54 | I could go to Notification Center, and
notice there is now a Click to Tweet area.
| | 00:59 | Click there, I can then enter my tweet if I
want to, Add Location, and I can send out my tweet.
| | 01:06 | Now, how about Facebook? Here's Facebook.
| | 01:09 | I'll enter my User Name, which in
this case is my email address, and my
| | 01:13 | password, and click Next.
| | 01:15 | So, you are told what will happen. So
those friends you have on Facebook, they
| | 01:21 | will be added to your Contacts application.
| | 01:23 | It also allows you to post status updates,
photos, and that kind of thing to Facebook.
| | 01:28 | So, for example, you may be in iPhoto,
then you have the opportunity to share
| | 01:32 | your photos through Facebook, and with
your permission, you can use other kinds
| | 01:37 | of Facebook integration
as well, so I'll sign in.
| | 01:41 | It goes through and it syncs those contacts.
| | 01:43 | Now, if I don't want those contacts
synced, I can just simply click on that
| | 01:48 | button and contacts are no
longer part of the picture.
| | 01:51 | So, we saw after adding a Twitter
account, that Notification Center changed.
| | 01:55 | Let's see if it's done
anything now that we have Facebook.
| | 01:57 | Cancel that tweet. And sure
enough, here's Facebook. Click to Post.
| | 02:03 | I can then type up something, post it,
and it will appear on my Facebook page.
| | 02:08 | As I mentioned, Facebook and Twitter are
now part of my applications. So let's go to iPhoto.
| | 02:17 | I'll choose this image, click on Share,
and if I want now, I can tweet that image
| | 02:23 | or I can send it out to Facebook.
| | 02:25 | You'll find these same kinds of
settings whenever you click a Share button
| | 02:29 | throughout your Mac. And that's it.
| | 02:32 | Once you've added your accounts,
Facebook and Twitter are now integrated
| | 02:36 | into Mac OS X.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Advanced tips and tricks| 00:00 | During the setup process for OS X,
you were assigned some kind of icon.
| | 00:05 | Now, if you liked, you could change that
icon or if you had a camera attached to
| | 00:09 | your Mac, you could take a picture
of yourself and use that as your icon.
| | 00:12 | But suppose you skipped right past that
part because you were so excited about
| | 00:16 | starting to use your Mac.
| | 00:18 | Well, you can still change your icon
after the fact and I'm going to show
| | 00:21 | you how to do that now.
| | 00:23 | So, we'll go to System Preferences,
click on Users & Groups, I will unlock the
| | 00:28 | preference, add my password. And note,
I have been assigned a hockey puck.
| | 00:35 | Now, if you're Don Rickles, that goes over
great, and if you're not, you may wish to
| | 00:39 | change it to something else.
| | 00:41 | So, there are a couple of ways you can do this.
| | 00:43 | Hover over it and you see
that there's a white triangle.
| | 00:46 | Click on the white triangle and you
can browse through Apple's default icons.
| | 00:53 | Let's say I wanted to be a penguin.
| | 00:55 | Click on the penguin and I click on Done.
| | 00:57 | Well, that's pretty good but what if I want
to alter that penguin? I can do that too.
| | 01:02 | I'll double click on the penguin.
| | 01:04 | Now, I click on the Edit Icon.
| | 01:06 | I can zoom in on that penguin.
| | 01:09 | So, we can just have the big penguin
head, and I can also add effects very much
| | 01:14 | like I did in Photobooth.
| | 01:16 | And you'll recognize a lot of these effects.
| | 01:20 | I kind of like this outline,
this neon look for the penguin.
| | 01:24 | I think that's great.
| | 01:25 | So, I will then click on Done to add it.
| | 01:28 | Now if you've recently worked with
Icons, you'll find them under Recents.
| | 01:31 | Also, if you have a camera, and this Mac
doesn't, but if you did, select Camera,
| | 01:36 | you would see what's in front of the
Camera, you could put your face in front of
| | 01:39 | the Camera, and then add effects as you like.
| | 01:42 | I'm going to go back to my
altered penguin. And there is my icon.
| | 01:51 | There's one other way to add an icon
and that's to add an image of your own.
| | 01:55 | That's easily done. So I'll just shift this over.
| | 01:58 | I'll go into my Documents folder, drag a
picture of my mug over to the thumbnail,
| | 02:05 | and there's my picture.
| | 02:06 | Same idea, I can zoom in if I
want to give people a hairy eyeball.
| | 02:11 | Zoom out, put it where I want it,
and then I can add effects to it.
| | 02:17 | I'll make myself a little bit blurry.
| | 02:22 | Click on Done, and now I have my new icon.
| | 02:26 | No need to put up with
what Apple has assigned you.
| | 02:29 | With just these simple steps,
you can change your icon.
| | 02:32 | By now you've spent plenty of time with
your Mac and with OS X, and there are maybe
| | 02:37 | a couple of things that
you're not so tickled with.
| | 02:40 | For example, let's open up Calendar.
| | 02:42 | Notice this interface, have kind
of this leather look, the torn page.
| | 02:47 | You have some stitching.
| | 02:49 | Let's open up Contacts as well.
| | 02:51 | Again, here you've got your little leather look.
| | 02:53 | Now some people don't actually like the
look of this, so we can get rid of it.
| | 03:01 | So I'm going to quit Calendar, I'll
quit Contacts, and what I have done is I've
| | 03:05 | downloaded a program called Mountain Tweaks.
| | 03:09 | This is a donationware
program from Fredrik Wiker.
| | 03:12 | He's a Norwegian, 17 years old, working
to make his way through college, and he's
| | 03:17 | created this cool
utility called Mountain Tweaks.
| | 03:20 | Let's see what that looks like.
| | 03:22 | Go ahead and search for it.
| | 03:25 | There it is. So, he provides you with a
variety of options for tweaking the Mac's interface.
| | 03:31 | One of them is Remove Leather from Contacts
and Remove Leather from Calendar. Let's do that.
| | 03:39 | This is going to launch an installer.
| | 03:42 | We'll go through it, we'll go ahead and
install it for everybody, Continue and Install.
| | 03:49 | Enter my password,
install software, and it's done.
| | 03:53 | Let's take a look at Contacts now.
| | 03:57 | No more leather look.
| | 04:00 | So, what the heck let's do it to Calendar too.
| | 04:02 | Yes, Continue, All Users, Continue,
Install, my password, Close, Calendar, and
| | 04:18 | the leather is gone.
| | 04:21 | Now, if you've tried this and you find,
"Well, you know, I kind of miss that
| | 04:24 | leather look so --."
| | 04:25 | Okay, fine, let's put it back.
| | 04:27 | We can also add the leather look back.
So Calendar, choose No instead, Continue,
| | 04:36 | All Users, Install, password, Install
software, and let me do it with Contacts as
| | 04:46 | well while we're here. Make sure it took.
| | 04:50 | Yup, leather, and leather once again.
| | 04:55 | So, as you could see, this is not
doing any harm to these applications.
| | 04:58 | What's happening is that he has
created some images that replaced the images
| | 05:05 | of the leather look.
| | 05:06 | What the installer is doing is simply
taking those images that he has used and
| | 05:10 | then replacing the
leather within the applications.
| | 05:13 | Not hard to do, very inexpensive,
though you should give him some money. And if
| | 05:18 | you're unhappy with the look of these
two applications, you can change it with
| | 05:22 | this simple utility.
| | 05:24 | Here's a quiz for old-time Mac users.
| | 05:27 | Let's go to your User folder.
| | 05:30 | Tell me what's missing.
| | 05:32 | Desktop, Documents, Downloads, Movies,
Music, Pictures, Public, hey where is
| | 05:37 | the Library folder?
| | 05:39 | That's right, prior to Mac OS X Lion,
there was a Library folder within your
| | 05:46 | User Folder, and within this Library
Folder were lots of preferences, settings,
| | 05:50 | and other kinds of application support files.
| | 05:53 | Now typical Mac users don't
need to go into this folder.
| | 05:56 | However, if you are a more advanced user,
there may be reasons to go into that folder.
| | 06:01 | For example you may wish to throw out a
corrupt preference file. So how do you
| | 06:06 | get into this folder?
| | 06:07 | I can offer a couple of solutions.
| | 06:09 | Close this window, click on the Go Menu.
| | 06:12 | Now hold down the Option key.
| | 06:14 | Notice when I do that,
the Library Folder appears.
| | 06:17 | Click on that, and here we are in the
Library folder at which point I can go into
| | 06:23 | the folders I like and do what I
want. But this is not a permanent fix.
| | 06:28 | So, if I don't hold down the Option
key, the Library folder is missing.
| | 06:32 | It's only until I hold
down Option that I see that.
| | 06:35 | What if I want that folder
to be visible all the time?
| | 06:39 | This is how you do it.
| | 06:40 | I'm going to launch something called Terminal.
| | 06:43 | Now we haven't covered Terminal in this
course because it really is beyond essentials.
| | 06:48 | However, as you travel around the
internet, you may encounter times when
| | 06:52 | somebody says, "Oh, just enter this
into Terminal," to do something wonderful.
| | 06:57 | This is one of those times.
| | 06:59 | So I will now enter a
command, so what does this mean?
| | 07:05 | Well essentially, in the computer,
there's something called the Flag and the
| | 07:10 | Flag indicates the
properties of a certain object.
| | 07:14 | So in this case, there's a Hidden
Flag and there's a No Hidden Flag.
| | 07:18 | What's happened with the Library
folder is Apple has set that Flag to hidden
| | 07:23 | for the Library folder.
| | 07:25 | So, what I'm telling it is, Go to the
Flag for the Library folder, which appears
| | 07:31 | within your User folder, and
that's what that tilde stands for,
| | 07:35 | it means your User Folder, and the
command is nohidden, meaning don't hide it.
| | 07:41 | So now I'll press Return.
| | 07:43 | Nothing seems to have happened,
but let's see if the command took.
| | 07:46 | So, I'll go to my User
folder, and look, here it is.
| | 07:51 | The Library is now
visible within my User folder.
| | 07:54 | Let's keep this around so we
can see what happens later.
| | 08:01 | Notice, however, that it
is still not in the Go menu.
| | 08:04 | In that case, I have to hold down
the Option key to make it visible.
| | 08:08 | Now what if I want to
hide this again? No problem.
| | 08:11 | We'll just undo what we just did, so
chflags hidden~/Library/, press Return,
| | 08:24 | and notice that when I did
that, the Library folder is gone.
| | 08:28 | So, if you're the kind of person that
really wants to see that Library folder
| | 08:32 | inside your User folder, you
can use Terminal to do that.
| | 08:36 | Before I wrap up this tip, note that
Terminal can be really, really dangerous.
| | 08:41 | If you don't know what you're doing,
you could do things in Terminal that are
| | 08:45 | very powerful that could make
your Mac unstable or even unusable.
| | 08:50 | So unless you have a very good idea
of what you're doing and know that a
| | 08:53 | particular command is going to work,
you should probably stay out of Terminal.
| | 08:58 | This is just a taste of the cool and
unexpected things that you can do with your Mac.
| | 09:02 | Thankfully there's a thriving community
of people who love nothing better than
| | 09:06 | exploring the Mac's finest features.
| | 09:08 | To learn more, I suggest you visit
Macworld.com, which is packed with Apple
| | 09:13 | information. Also check out Mac OS X
Hints, where you're sure to learn something
| | 09:18 | new each and everyday.
| | 09:19 | There's TidBits.com, which has some
terrific reporting on all things Apple.
| | 09:24 | The Unauthorized Apple Weblog, also
known as TUAW, or Arstechnica, which has some
| | 09:29 | great technical information, and of
course, the many courses here at lynda.com.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Sharing files with AirDrop| 00:00 | And now time for a little bedtime story.
| | 00:03 | This is a story of how
things use to be in the old days.
| | 00:06 | In the old days, when you had a
building full of computers and you had a file
| | 00:11 | on one computer, and you wanted to take
to another computer and you didn't have
| | 00:15 | a network between them, what you
would do is you'd take this thing called a
| | 00:19 | floppy disk and you'd shove it into your computer,
and you'd write data to it and would go *ka-chunk*.
| | 00:24 | And eventually the file wwould be
written to it, and then you'd eject it and spit
| | 00:28 | it out, and you would get up out of
your chair, and you would walk across the
| | 00:33 | floor, and you would find somebody else
in their cubicle and you'd say, "Here's
| | 00:37 | the file you wanted." And that was
called Sneakernet because everybody in those
| | 00:42 | days wore sneakers.
| | 00:44 | And then they would copy the file and would go
*ka-chunk* *ka-chunk* onto their machine and then they
| | 00:49 | would give you that floppy disk and you
would take it back so you would be able to
| | 00:53 | Sneakernet to as well as fro.
| | 00:55 | So we don't have to do that anymore
because we have something called AirDrop, and
| | 01:00 | this is how it works.
| | 01:02 | So I will double-click on my hard
drive, and notice the AirDrop window.
| | 01:06 | I click on this window, and I see
anybody else on my local network who also
| | 01:13 | has their AirDrop window open, and it turns
out that Ian has his AirDrop window open too.
| | 01:20 | Now, instead of all this floppy drive
business, I'm going to go to my Documents folder.
| | 01:27 | I'm going to grab something.
| | 01:29 | Let me grab this picture, take it
here, go back to AirDrop, there's Ian.
| | 01:35 | So I'll grab this file, I drag it
over to Ian, he is then asked to accept it
| | 01:40 | once I press on Send.
| | 01:43 | He has accepted it, and that little
blue circle there indicted that it was
| | 01:48 | sending across the network.
| | 01:49 | Now, I'm going to ask Ian to send me a
file just so you can see what that looks like.
| | 01:54 | Now, we have a few options here.
| | 01:57 | The first is Save and Open.
| | 02:00 | That's not something we're going to do,
but what would happen is if I chose that,
| | 02:05 | because I have a compatible application
that will open that file, that file would
| | 02:10 | indeed move over to my Mac and it
would open up, probably in TextEdit.
| | 02:14 | I can also choose to
Decline, and I can choose to Save.
| | 02:19 | You may end up with one other option,
and that is when you choose to save the
| | 02:23 | thing, and you don't have a
compatible application to open it, you will be
| | 02:27 | directed to go to the Mac App
Store and purchase that application.
| | 02:31 | For example, if Ian had sent me a
GarageBand file and I didn't have a copy of
| | 02:36 | GarageBand, the Mac is smart
enough to know, "Ah, you need GarageBand.
| | 02:40 | Here, let me take you to the Mac App
Store where you can get it and then you
| | 02:45 | can use that file."
| | 02:46 | In this case, I'll simply
press Save, here comes the file.
| | 02:50 | And it is in my Downloads folder.
| | 02:52 | So I'll look at my
Downloads folder, and there it is.
| | 02:57 | The very important Doc that was set over by Ian.
| | 03:02 | One thing to note, in order for AirDrop to
work, you must be using a Wi-Fi connection.
| | 03:08 | So this must be over a Wi-Fi network,
thus the name Air as part of this system.
| | 03:14 | Much easier than hiking across the
office with a floppy drive, that's AirDrop.
| | 03:19 | I think you're going to like it.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
ConclusionGoodbye| 00:00 | While Mountain Lion is to some
simply an incremental update to Lion, the
| | 00:04 | version of Mac OS X that preceded it,
it packs a significant number of
| | 00:08 | features that will make your computing
safer and more productive and enjoyable,
| | 00:12 | including notifications, reminders,
dictation, Facebook and Twitter
| | 00:17 | integration, and AirPlay Mirroring.
| | 00:20 | With this information now under your
belt, you should find your Mac a far
| | 00:24 | more useful companion.
| | 00:26 | This is Chris Breen for lynda.com,
thanks very much for watching.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
